Difference between revisions of "RFC5247"

From RFC-Wiki
imported>Admin
(Created page with " Network Working Group B. AbobaRequest for Comments: 5247 D. SimonUpdates: 3748 ...")
 
 
(One intermediate revision by the same user not shown)
Line 1: Line 1:
 +
Network Working Group                                          B. Aboba
 +
Request for Comments: 5247                                      D. Simon
 +
Updates: 3748                                      Microsoft Corporation
 +
Category: Standards Track                                      P. Eronen
 +
                                                                Nokia
 +
                                                          August 2008
  
 +
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) Key Management Framework
  
 
+
'''Status of This Memo'''
 
 
 
 
 
 
Network Working Group                                          B. AbobaRequest for Comments: 5247                                      D. SimonUpdates: 3748                                      Microsoft CorporationCategory: Standards Track                                      P. Eronen                                                                Nokia                                                          August 2008
 
 
 
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) Key Management Framework
 
Status of This Memo
 
  
 
This document specifies an Internet standards track protocol for the
 
This document specifies an Internet standards track protocol for the
 
Internet community, and requests discussion and suggestions for
 
Internet community, and requests discussion and suggestions for
 
improvements.  Please refer to the current edition of the "Internet
 
improvements.  Please refer to the current edition of the "Internet
Official Protocol Standards" (STD 1) for the standardization state
+
Official Protocol Standards" ([[STD1|STD 1]]) for the standardization state
 
and status of this protocol.  Distribution of this memo is unlimited.
 
and status of this protocol.  Distribution of this memo is unlimited.
  
Abstract
+
'''Abstract'''
  
 
The Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP), defined in [[RFC3748|RFC 3748]],
 
The Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP), defined in [[RFC3748|RFC 3748]],
Line 26: Line 26:
 
under which the key management guidelines described in [[RFC4962|RFC 4962]] can
 
under which the key management guidelines described in [[RFC4962|RFC 4962]] can
 
be satisfied.
 
be satisfied.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
== Introduction ==
 
== Introduction ==
  
The Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP), defined in [RFC3748],
+
The Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP), defined in [[RFC3748]],
 
was designed to enable extensible authentication for network access
 
was designed to enable extensible authentication for network access
 
in situations in which the Internet Protocol (IP) protocol is not
 
in situations in which the Internet Protocol (IP) protocol is not
 
available.  Originally developed for use with Point-to-Point Protocol
 
available.  Originally developed for use with Point-to-Point Protocol
(PPP) [RFC1661], it has subsequently also been applied to IEEE 802
+
(PPP) [[RFC1661]], it has subsequently also been applied to IEEE 802
 
wired networks [IEEE-802.1X], Internet Key Exchange Protocol version
 
wired networks [IEEE-802.1X], Internet Key Exchange Protocol version
2 (IKEv2) [RFC4306], and wireless networks such as [IEEE-802.11] and
+
2 (IKEv2) [[RFC4306]], and wireless networks such as [IEEE-802.11] and
 
[IEEE-802.16e].
 
[IEEE-802.16e].
  
Line 77: Line 53:
 
security analysis, describing the conditions under which the
 
security analysis, describing the conditions under which the
 
requirements described in "Guidance for Authentication,
 
requirements described in "Guidance for Authentication,
Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) Key Management" [RFC4962] can be
+
Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) Key Management" [[RFC4962]] can be
 
satisfied.
 
satisfied.
  
Line 84: Line 60:
 
The key words "MUST", "MUST NOT", "REQUIRED", "SHALL", "SHALL NOT",
 
The key words "MUST", "MUST NOT", "REQUIRED", "SHALL", "SHALL NOT",
 
"SHOULD", "SHOULD NOT", "RECOMMENDED", "MAY", and "OPTIONAL" in this
 
"SHOULD", "SHOULD NOT", "RECOMMENDED", "MAY", and "OPTIONAL" in this
document are to be interpreted as described in [RFC2119].
+
document are to be interpreted as described in [[RFC2119]].
  
 
=== Terminology ===
 
=== Terminology ===
  
 
The terms "Cryptographic binding", "Cryptographic separation", "Key
 
The terms "Cryptographic binding", "Cryptographic separation", "Key
strength" and "Mutual authentication" are defined in [RFC3748] and
+
strength" and "Mutual authentication" are defined in [[RFC3748]] and
 
are used with the same meaning in this document, which also
 
are used with the same meaning in this document, which also
 
frequently uses the following terms:
 
frequently uses the following terms:
Line 97: Line 73:
 
   defined in [IEEE-802.11], which confirms mutual possession of a
 
   defined in [IEEE-802.11], which confirms mutual possession of a
 
   Pairwise Master Key by two parties and distributes a Group Key.
 
   Pairwise Master Key by two parties and distributes a Group Key.
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
AAA  Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting
 
AAA  Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting
 
   AAA protocols with EAP support include "RADIUS Support for EAP"
 
   AAA protocols with EAP support include "RADIUS Support for EAP"
   [RFC3579] and "Diameter EAP Application" [RFC4072].  In this
+
   [[RFC3579]] and "Diameter EAP Application" [[RFC4072]].  In this
 
   document, the terms "AAA server" and "backend authentication
 
   document, the terms "AAA server" and "backend authentication
 
   server" are used interchangeably.
 
   server" are used interchangeably.
Line 150: Line 120:
 
   EAP peer shares valid unexpired EAP keying material.
 
   EAP peer shares valid unexpired EAP keying material.
  
 
+
EAP Server
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
EAP Server
 
 
   The entity that terminates the EAP authentication method with the
 
   The entity that terminates the EAP authentication method with the
 
   peer.  In the case where no backend authentication server is used,
 
   peer.  In the case where no backend authentication server is used,
Line 178: Line 141:
 
   initialization vector field, that is derived between the peer and
 
   initialization vector field, that is derived between the peer and
 
   EAP server.  Since the IV is a known value in methods such as
 
   EAP server.  Since the IV is a known value in methods such as
   EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) [RFC5216], it cannot be used by
+
   EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) [[RFC5216]], it cannot be used by
 
   itself for computation of any quantity that needs to remain
 
   itself for computation of any quantity that needs to remain
 
   secret.  As a result, its use has been deprecated and it is
 
   secret.  As a result, its use has been deprecated and it is
Line 204: Line 167:
 
   public-key-based method, the long-term credential is the
 
   public-key-based method, the long-term credential is the
 
   corresponding private key.
 
   corresponding private key.
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
Lower Layer
 
Lower Layer
Line 234: Line 192:
 
   Session Keys (TSKs) solely from the PMK, whereas the Wired
 
   Session Keys (TSKs) solely from the PMK, whereas the Wired
 
   Equivalent Privacy (WEP) ciphersuite, as noted in "IEEE 802.1X
 
   Equivalent Privacy (WEP) ciphersuite, as noted in "IEEE 802.1X
   RADIUS Usage Guidelines" [RFC3580], derives its TSKs from both
+
   RADIUS Usage Guidelines" [[RFC3580]], derives its TSKs from both
 
   halves of the MSK.  In [IEEE-802.16e], the MSK is truncated to 20
 
   halves of the MSK.  In [IEEE-802.16e], the MSK is truncated to 20
 
   octets for PMK and 20 octets for PMK2.
 
   octets for PMK and 20 octets for PMK2.
Line 255: Line 213:
 
   for the use of the keys.  An example of a Secure Association
 
   for the use of the keys.  An example of a Secure Association
 
   Protocol is the 4-way handshake defined within [IEEE-802.11].
 
   Protocol is the 4-way handshake defined within [IEEE-802.11].
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
Session-Id
 
Session-Id
Line 309: Line 260:
 
Secure Association.  Discovery can occur manually or automatically,
 
Secure Association.  Discovery can occur manually or automatically,
 
depending on the lower layer over which EAP runs.
 
depending on the lower layer over which EAP runs.
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
The authentication phase (phase 1) can begin once the peer and
 
The authentication phase (phase 1) can begin once the peer and
Line 363: Line 308:
 
  |    (optional; phase 2b)      |                              |
 
  |    (optional; phase 2b)      |                              |
 
  |                              |                              |
 
  |                              |                              |
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
               Figure 1: Conversation Overview
 
               Figure 1: Conversation Overview
Line 377: Line 317:
  
 
PPP
 
PPP
   The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), defined in [RFC1661], does not
+
   The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), defined in [[RFC1661]], does not
 
   support discovery, nor does it include a Secure Association
 
   support discovery, nor does it include a Secure Association
 
   Protocol.
 
   Protocol.
  
 
PPPoE
 
PPPoE
   PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE), defined in [RFC2516], includes support
+
   PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE), defined in [[RFC2516]], includes support
 
   for a Discovery stage (phase 0).  In this step, the EAP peer sends
 
   for a Discovery stage (phase 0).  In this step, the EAP peer sends
 
   a PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation (PADI) packet to the broadcast
 
   a PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation (PADI) packet to the broadcast
Line 393: Line 333:
  
 
IKEv2
 
IKEv2
   Internet Key Exchange v2 (IKEv2), defined in [RFC4306], includes
+
   Internet Key Exchange v2 (IKEv2), defined in [[RFC4306]], includes
 
   support for EAP and handles the establishment of unicast security
 
   support for EAP and handles the establishment of unicast security
 
   associations (phase 2a).  However, the establishment of multicast
 
   associations (phase 2a).  However, the establishment of multicast
 
   security associations (phase 2b) typically does not involve EAP
 
   security associations (phase 2b) typically does not involve EAP
 
   and needs to be handled by a group key management protocol such as
 
   and needs to be handled by a group key management protocol such as
   Group Domain of Interpretation (GDOI) [RFC3547], Group Secure
+
   Group Domain of Interpretation (GDOI) [[RFC3547]], Group Secure
   Association Key Management Protocol (GSAKMP) [RFC4535], Multimedia
+
   Association Key Management Protocol (GSAKMP) [[RFC4535]], Multimedia
   Internet KEYing  (MIKEY) [RFC3830], or Group Key Distribution
+
   Internet KEYing  (MIKEY) [[RFC3830]], or Group Key Distribution
 
   Protocol (GKDP) [GKDP].  Several mechanisms have been proposed for
 
   Protocol (GKDP) [GKDP].  Several mechanisms have been proposed for
   the discovery of IPsec security gateways.  [RFC2230] discusses the
+
   the discovery of IPsec security gateways.  [[RFC2230]] discusses the
 
   use of Key eXchange (KX) Resource Records (RRs) for IPsec gateway
 
   use of Key eXchange (KX) Resource Records (RRs) for IPsec gateway
 
   discovery; while KX RRs are supported by many Domain Name Service
 
   discovery; while KX RRs are supported by many Domain Name Service
 
   (DNS) server implementations, they have not yet been widely
 
   (DNS) server implementations, they have not yet been widely
   deployed.  Alternatively, DNS SRV RRs [RFC2782] can be used for
+
   deployed.  Alternatively, DNS SRV RRs [[RFC2782]] can be used for
 
   this purpose.  Where DNS is used for gateway location, DNS
 
   this purpose.  Where DNS is used for gateway location, DNS
   security mechanisms such as DNS Security (DNSSEC) ([RFC4033],
+
   security mechanisms such as DNS Security (DNSSEC) ([[RFC4033]],
   [RFC4035]), TSIG [RFC2845], and Simple Secure Dynamic Update
+
   [[RFC4035]]), TSIG [[RFC2845]], and Simple Secure Dynamic Update
   [RFC3007] are available.
+
   [[RFC3007]] are available.
  
 
IEEE 802.11
 
IEEE 802.11
Line 417: Line 357:
 
   Points (APs) periodically announce their Service Set Identifiers
 
   Points (APs) periodically announce their Service Set Identifiers
 
   (SSIDs) as well as capabilities using Beacon frames.  Stations can
 
   (SSIDs) as well as capabilities using Beacon frames.  Stations can
 
 
 
 
  
 
   query for APs by sending a Probe Request.  Neither Beacon nor
 
   query for APs by sending a Probe Request.  Neither Beacon nor
Line 464: Line 400:
 
       Vector (IV).
 
       Vector (IV).
  
As noted in [RFC3748] Section 7.10:
+
As noted in [[RFC3748]] Section 7.10:
  
 
   In order to provide keying material for use in a subsequently
 
   In order to provide keying material for use in a subsequently
Line 471: Line 407:
 
   an Extended Master Session Key (EMSK) of at least 64 octets.
 
   an Extended Master Session Key (EMSK) of at least 64 octets.
  
 
+
EAP methods also MAY export the IV; however, the use of the IV is
 
+
deprecated.  The EMSK MUST NOT be provided to an entity outside the
 
 
 
 
EAP methods also MAY export the IV; however, the use of the IV is
 
deprecated.  The EMSK MUST NOT be provided to an entity outside the
 
 
EAP server or peer, nor is it permitted to pass any quantity to an
 
EAP server or peer, nor is it permitted to pass any quantity to an
 
entity outside the EAP server or peer from which the EMSK could be
 
entity outside the EAP server or peer from which the EMSK could be
Line 494: Line 426:
 
Peer-Id, Server-Id, and Session-Id are defined in Appendix A.
 
Peer-Id, Server-Id, and Session-Id are defined in Appendix A.
  
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+        ---+
 +
|                                                        |            ^
 +
|                EAP Method                              |            |
 +
|                                                        |            |
 +
| +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+  |            |
 +
| |                                |  |            |  |            |
 +
| |      EAP Method Key            |<->| Long-Term  |  |            |
 +
| |        Derivation              |  | Credential  |  |            |
 +
| |                                |  |            |  |            |
 +
| |                                |  +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+  |  Local to  |
 +
| |                                |                    |      EAP  |
 +
| +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+                    |    Method |
 +
|  |            |              |                      |            |
 +
|  |            |              |                      |            |
 +
|  |            |              |                      |            |
 +
|  |            |              |                      |            |
 +
|  |        +-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ |            |
 +
|  |        | TEK      | |MSK, EMSK  | |IV          | |            |
 +
|  |        |Derivation | |Derivation | |Derivation  | |            |
 +
|  |        |          | |          | |(Deprecated) | |            |
 +
|  |        +-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ |            |
 +
|  |              ^            |              |      |            |
 +
|  |              |            |              |      |            V
 +
+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+        ---+
 +
|              |            |              |                    ^
 +
|              |            |              |          Exported |
 +
| Peer-Id(s),  | channel    | MSK (64+B)    | IV (64B)      by  |
 +
| Server-Id(s), | bindings    | EMSK (64+B)  | (Optional)    EAP  |
 +
| Session-Id    | & Result    |              |            Method |
 +
V              V            V              V                    V
  
 +
  Figure 2:  EAP Method Parameter Import/Export
  
 +
Peer-Id
  
 +
  If an EAP method that generates keys authenticates one or more
 +
  method-specific peer identities, those identities are exported by
 +
  the method as the Peer-Id(s).  It is possible for more than one
 +
  Peer-Id to be exported by an EAP method.  Not all EAP methods
 +
  provide a method-specific peer identity; where this is not
 +
  defined, the Peer-Id is the null string.  In EAP methods that do
 +
  not support key generation, the Peer-Id MUST be the null string.
 +
  Where an EAP method that derives keys does not provide a Peer-Id,
 +
  the EAP server will not authenticate the identity of the EAP peer
 +
  with which it derived keying material.
  
 +
Server-Id
  
 +
  If an EAP method that generates keys authenticates one or more
 +
  method-specific server identities, those identities are exported
 +
  by the method as the Server-Id(s).  It is possible for more than
 +
  one Server-Id to be exported by an EAP method.  Not all EAP
 +
  methods provide a method-specific server identity; where this is
 +
  not defined, the Server-Id is the null string.  If the EAP method
 +
  does not generate keying material, the Server-Id MUST be the null
 +
  string.  Where an EAP method that derives keys does not provide a
 +
  Server-Id, the EAP peer will not authenticate the identity of the
 +
  EAP server with which it derived EAP keying material.
  
 +
Session-Id
  
 +
  The Session-Id uniquely identifies an EAP session between an EAP
 +
  peer (as identified by the Peer-Id) and server (as identified by
 +
  the Server-Id).  Where non-expanded EAP Type Codes are used (EAP
 +
  Type Code not equal to 254), the EAP Session-Id is the
 +
  concatenation of the single octet EAP Type Code and a temporally
 +
  unique identifier obtained from the method (known as the
 +
  Method-Id):
  
 +
  Session-Id = Type-Code || Method-Id
  
 +
  Where expanded EAP Type Codes are used, the EAP Session-Id
 +
  consists of the Expanded Type Code (including the Type, Vendor-Id
 +
  (in network byte order) and Vendor-Type fields (in network byte
 +
  order) defined in [[RFC3748]] Section 5.7), concatenated with a
 +
  temporally unique identifier obtained from the method (Method-Id):
  
 +
  Session-Id = 0xFE || Vendor-Id || Vendor-Type || Method-Id
  
 +
  The Method-Id is typically constructed from nonces or counters
 +
  used within the EAP method exchange.  The inclusion of the Type
 +
  Code or Expanded Type Code in the EAP Session-Id ensures that each
 +
  EAP method has a distinct Session-Id space.  Since an EAP session
 +
  is not bound to a particular authenticator or specific ports on
 +
  the peer and authenticator, the authenticator port or identity are
 +
  not included in the Session-Id.
  
 +
Channel Binding
  
 +
  Channel binding is the process by which lower-layer parameters are
 +
  verified for consistency between the EAP peer and server.  In
 +
  order to avoid introducing media dependencies, EAP methods that
 +
  transport channel binding parameters MUST treat this data as
 +
  opaque octets.  See Section 5.3.3 for further discussion.
  
 +
==== Key Naming ====
  
 +
Each key created within the EAP key management framework has a name
 +
(a unique identifier), as well as a scope (the parties to whom the
 +
key is available).  The scope of exported keying material and TEKs is
 +
defined by the authenticated method-specific peer identities
 +
(Peer-Id(s)) and the authenticated server identities (Server-Id(s)),
 +
where available.
  
 +
MSK and EMSK Names
 +
    The MSK and EMSK are exported by the EAP peer and EAP server,
 +
    and MUST be named using the EAP Session-Id and a binary or
 +
    textual indication of the EAP keying material being referred to.
  
 +
PMK Name
 +
    This document does not specify a naming scheme for the Pairwise
 +
    Master Key (PMK).  The PMK is only identified by the name of the
 +
    key from which it is derived.
  
 +
    Note: IEEE 802.11 names the PMK for the purposes of being able
 +
    to refer to it in the Secure Association Protocol; the PMK name
 +
    (known as the PMKID) is based on a hash of the PMK itself as
 +
    well as some other parameters (see [IEEE-802.11] Section
 +
    8.5.1.2).
  
 +
TEK Name
 +
    Transient EAP Keys (TEKs) MAY be named; their naming is
 +
    specified in the EAP method specification.
  
 +
TSK Name
 +
    Transient Session Keys (TSKs) are typically named.  Their naming
 +
    is specified in the lower layer so that the correct set of TSKs
 +
    can be identified for processing a given packet.
  
 +
=== Security Goals ===
  
 +
The goal of the EAP conversation is to derive fresh session keys
 +
between the EAP peer and authenticator that are known only to those
 +
parties, and for both the EAP peer and authenticator to demonstrate
 +
that they are authorized to perform their roles either by each other
 +
or by a trusted third party (the backend authentication server).
  
 +
Completion of an EAP method exchange (phase 1a) supporting key
 +
derivation results in the derivation of EAP keying material (MSK,
 +
EMSK, TEKs) known only to the EAP peer (identified by the Peer-Id(s))
 +
and EAP server (identified by the Server-Id(s)).  Both the EAP peer
 +
and EAP server know this keying material to be fresh.  The Peer-Id
 +
and Server-Id are discussed in Sections 1.4, 2.4, and 2.5 as well as
 +
in Appendix A.  Key freshness is discussed in Sections 3.4, 3.5, and
 +
5.7.
  
 +
Completion of the AAA exchange (phase 1b) results in the transport of
 +
keying material from the EAP server (identified by the Server-Id(s))
 +
to the EAP authenticator (identified by the NAS-Identifier) without
 +
disclosure to any other party.  Both the EAP server and EAP
 +
authenticator know this keying material to be fresh.  Disclosure
 +
issues are discussed in Sections 3.8 and 5.3; security properties of
 +
AAA protocols are discussed in Sections 5.1 - 5.9.
  
 +
The backend authentication server is trusted to transport keying
 +
material only to the authenticator that was established with the
 +
peer, and it is trusted to transport that keying material to no other
 +
parties.  In many systems, EAP keying material established by the EAP
 +
peer and EAP server are combined with publicly available data to
 +
derive other keys.  The backend authentication server is trusted to
 +
refrain from deriving these same keys or acting as a
 +
man-in-the-middle even though it has access to the keying material
 +
that is needed to do so.
  
 +
The authenticator is also a trusted party.  The authenticator is
 +
trusted not to distribute keying material provided by the backend
 +
authentication server to any other parties.  If the authenticator
 +
uses a key derivation function to derive additional keying material,
 +
the authenticator is trusted to distribute the derived keying
 +
material only to the appropriate party that is known to the peer, and
 +
no other party.  When this approach is used, care must be taken to
 +
ensure that the resulting key management system meets all of the
 +
principles in [[RFC4962]], confirming that keys used to protect data
 +
are to be known only by the peer and authenticator.
 +
 +
Completion of the Secure Association Protocol (phase 2) results in
 +
the derivation or transport of Transient Session Keys (TSKs) known
 +
only to the EAP peer (identified by the Peer-Id(s)) and authenticator
 +
(identified by the NAS-Identifier).  Both the EAP peer and
 +
authenticator know the TSKs to be fresh.  Both the EAP peer and
 +
authenticator demonstrate that they are authorized to perform their
 +
roles.  Authorization issues are discussed in Sections 4.3.2 and 5.5;
 +
security properties of Secure Association Protocols are discussed in
 +
Section 3.1.
 +
 +
=== EAP Invariants ===
 +
 +
Certain basic characteristics, known as "EAP Invariants", hold true
 +
for EAP implementations:
 +
 +
  Mode independence
 +
  Media independence
 +
  Method independence
 +
  Ciphersuite independence
  
 +
==== Mode Independence ====
  
 +
EAP is typically deployed to support extensible network access
 +
authentication in situations where a peer desires network access via
 +
one or more authenticators.  Where authenticators are deployed
 +
standalone, the EAP conversation occurs between the peer and
 +
authenticator, and the authenticator locally implements one or more
 +
EAP methods.  However, when utilized in "pass-through" mode, EAP
 +
enables the deployment of new authentication methods without
 +
requiring the development of new code on the authenticator.
  
 +
While the authenticator can implement some EAP methods locally and
 +
use those methods to authenticate local users, it can at the same
 +
time act as a pass-through for other users and methods, forwarding
 +
EAP packets back and forth between the backend authentication server
 +
and the peer.  This is accomplished by encapsulating EAP packets
 +
within the Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA)
 +
protocol spoken between the authenticator and backend authentication
 +
server.  AAA protocols supporting EAP include RADIUS [[RFC3579]] and
 +
Diameter [[RFC4072]].
  
 +
It is a fundamental property of EAP that at the EAP method layer, the
 +
conversation between the EAP peer and server is unaffected by whether
 +
the EAP authenticator is operating in "pass-through" mode.  EAP
 +
methods operate identically in all aspects, including key derivation
 +
and parameter import/export, regardless of whether or not the
 +
authenticator is operating as a pass-through.
  
 +
The successful completion of an EAP method that supports key
 +
derivation results in the export of EAP keying material and
 +
parameters on the EAP peer and server.  Even though the EAP peer or
 +
server can import channel binding parameters that can include the
 +
identity of the EAP authenticator, this information is treated as
 +
opaque octets.  As a result, within EAP, the only relevant identities
 +
are the Peer-Id(s) and Server-Id(s).  Channel binding parameters are
 +
only interpreted by the lower layer.
  
 +
Within EAP, the primary function of the AAA protocol is to maintain
 +
the principle of mode independence.  As far as the EAP peer is
 +
concerned, its conversation with the EAP authenticator, and all
 +
consequences of that conversation, are identical, regardless of the
 +
authenticator mode of operation.
  
 +
==== Media Independence ====
  
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+        ---+
+
One of the goals of EAP is to allow EAP methods to function on any
|                                                        |            ^
+
lower layer meeting the criteria outlined in [[RFC3748]] Section 3.1.
|                EAP Method                              |            |
+
For example, as described in [[RFC3748]], EAP authentication can be run
|                                                        |            |
+
over PPP [[RFC1661]], IEEE 802 wired networks [IEEE-802.1X], and
| +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+  |            |
+
wireless networks such as 802.11 [IEEE-802.11] and 802.16
| |                                |  |            |  |            |
+
[IEEE-802.16e].
| |      EAP Method Key            |<->| Long-Term  |  |            |
 
| |        Derivation              |  | Credential  |  |            |
 
| |                                |  |            |  |            |
 
| |                                |  +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+  |  Local to |
 
| |                                |                    |      EAP  |
 
| +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+                    |    Method |
 
|  |            |              |                      |            |
 
|  |            |              |                      |            |
 
|  |            |              |                      |            |
 
|  |            |              |                      |            |
 
|  |        +-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ |            |
 
|  |        | TEK      | |MSK, EMSK  | |IV          | |            |
 
|  |        |Derivation | |Derivation | |Derivation  | |            |
 
|  |        |          | |          | |(Deprecated) | |            |
 
|  |        +-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ |            |
 
|  |              ^            |              |      |            |
 
|  |              |            |              |      |            V
 
+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+        ---+
 
|              |            |              |                    ^
 
|              |            |              |          Exported |
 
| Peer-Id(s),   | channel    | MSK (64+B)    | IV (64B)      by  |
 
| Server-Id(s), | bindings    | EMSK (64+B)  | (Optional)    EAP  |
 
| Session-Id    | & Result    |              |            Method |
 
V              V            V              V                    V
 
 
 
  Figure 2:  EAP Method Parameter Import/Export
 
 
 
Peer-Id
 
 
 
  If an EAP method that generates keys authenticates one or more
 
  method-specific peer identities, those identities are exported by
 
  the method as the Peer-Id(s). It is possible for more than one
 
  Peer-Id to be exported by an EAP method. Not all EAP methods
 
  provide a method-specific peer identity; where this is not
 
  defined, the Peer-Id is the null string. In EAP methods that do
 
  not support key generation, the Peer-Id MUST be the null string.
 
  Where an EAP method that derives keys does not provide a Peer-Id,
 
  the EAP server will not authenticate the identity of the EAP peer
 
  with which it derived keying material.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 +
In order to maintain media independence, it is necessary for EAP to
 +
avoid consideration of media-specific elements.  For example, EAP
 +
methods cannot be assumed to have knowledge of the lower layer over
 +
which they are transported, and cannot be restricted to identifiers
 +
associated with a particular usage environment (e.g., Medium Access
 +
Control (MAC) addresses).
  
 +
Note that media independence can be retained within EAP methods that
 +
support channel binding or method-specific identification.  An EAP
 +
method need not be aware of the content of an identifier in order to
 +
use it.  This enables an EAP method to use media-specific identifiers
 +
such as MAC addresses without compromising media independence.
 +
Channel binding parameters are treated as opaque octets by EAP
 +
methods so that handling them does not require media-specific
 +
knowledge.
  
 +
==== Method Independence ====
  
Server-Id
+
By enabling pass-through, authenticators can support any method
 +
implemented on the peer and server, not just locally implemented
 +
methods.  This allows the authenticator to avoid having to implement
 +
the EAP methods configured for use by peers.  In fact, since a
 +
pass-through authenticator need not implement any EAP methods at all,
 +
it cannot be assumed to support any EAP method-specific code.  As
 +
noted in [[RFC3748]] Section 2.3:
 +
 
 +
  Compliant pass-through authenticator implementations MUST by
 +
  default forward EAP packets of any Type.
  
  If an EAP method that generates keys authenticates one or more
+
This is useful where there is no single EAP method that is both
  method-specific server identities, those identities are exported
+
mandatory to implement and offers acceptable security for the media
  by the method as the Server-Id(s).  It is possible for more than
+
in useFor example, the [[RFC3748]] mandatory-to-implement EAP method
  one Server-Id to be exported by an EAP method.  Not all EAP
+
(MD5-Challenge) does not provide dictionary attack resistance, mutual
  methods provide a method-specific server identity; where this is
+
authentication, or key derivation, and as a result, is not
  not defined, the Server-Id is the null string.  If the EAP method
+
appropriate for use in Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)
  does not generate keying material, the Server-Id MUST be the null
+
authentication [[RFC4017]]. However, despite this, it is possible for
  stringWhere an EAP method that derives keys does not provide a
+
the peer and authenticator to interoperate as long as a suitable EAP
  Server-Id, the EAP peer will not authenticate the identity of the
+
method is supported both on the EAP peer and server.
  EAP server with which it derived EAP keying material.
 
 
 
Session-Id
 
 
 
  The Session-Id uniquely identifies an EAP session between an EAP
 
  peer (as identified by the Peer-Id) and server (as identified by
 
  the Server-Id).  Where non-expanded EAP Type Codes are used (EAP
 
  Type Code not equal to 254), the EAP Session-Id is the
 
  concatenation of the single octet EAP Type Code and a temporally
 
  unique identifier obtained from the method (known as the
 
  Method-Id):
 
 
 
 
 
  Session-Id = Type-Code || Method-Id
 
 
 
  Where expanded EAP Type Codes are used, the EAP Session-Id
 
  consists of the Expanded Type Code (including the Type, Vendor-Id
 
  (in network byte order) and Vendor-Type fields (in network byte
 
  order) defined in [RFC3748] Section 5.7), concatenated with a
 
  temporally unique identifier obtained from the method (Method-Id):
 
 
 
  Session-Id = 0xFE || Vendor-Id || Vendor-Type || Method-Id
 
 
 
  The Method-Id is typically constructed from nonces or counters
 
  used within the EAP method exchange.  The inclusion of the Type
 
  Code or Expanded Type Code in the EAP Session-Id ensures that each
 
  EAP method has a distinct Session-Id space.  Since an EAP session
 
  is not bound to a particular authenticator or specific ports on
 
  the peer and authenticator, the authenticator port or identity are
 
  not included in the Session-Id.
 
  
 +
==== Ciphersuite Independence ====
  
 +
Ciphersuite Independence is a requirement for media independence.
 +
Since lower-layer ciphersuites vary between media, media independence
 +
requires that exported EAP keying material be large enough (with
 +
sufficient entropy) to handle any ciphersuite.
  
 +
While EAP methods can negotiate the ciphersuite used in protection of
 +
the EAP conversation, the ciphersuite used for the protection of the
 +
data exchanged after EAP authentication has completed is negotiated
 +
between the peer and authenticator within the lower layer, outside of
 +
EAP.
  
 +
For example, within PPP, the ciphersuite is negotiated within the
 +
Encryption Control Protocol (ECP) defined in [[RFC1968]], after EAP
 +
authentication is completed.  Within [IEEE-802.11], the AP
 +
ciphersuites are advertised in the Beacon and Probe Responses prior
 +
to EAP authentication and are securely verified during a 4-way
 +
handshake exchange.
  
 +
Since the ciphersuites used to protect data depend on the lower
 +
layer, requiring that EAP methods have knowledge of lower-layer
 +
ciphersuites would compromise the principle of media independence.
 +
As a result, methods export EAP keying material that is ciphersuite
 +
independent.  Since ciphersuite negotiation occurs in the lower
 +
layer, there is no need for lower-layer ciphersuite negotiation
 +
within EAP.
  
 +
In order to allow a ciphersuite to be usable within the EAP keying
 +
framework, the ciphersuite specification needs to describe how TSKs
 +
suitable for use with the ciphersuite are derived from exported EAP
 +
keying material.  To maintain method independence, algorithms for
 +
deriving TSKs MUST NOT depend on the EAP method, although algorithms
 +
for TEK derivation MAY be specific to the EAP method.
  
 +
Advantages of ciphersuite-independence include:
  
 +
Reduced update requirements
 +
    Ciphersuite independence enables EAP methods to be used with new
 +
    ciphersuites without requiring the methods to be updated.  If
 +
    EAP methods were to specify how to derive transient session keys
 +
    for each ciphersuite, they would need to be updated each time a
 +
    new ciphersuite is developed.  In addition, backend
 +
    authentication servers might not be usable with all EAP-capable
 +
    authenticators, since the backend authentication server would
 +
    also need to be updated each time support for a new ciphersuite
 +
    is added to the authenticator.
  
 +
Reduced EAP method complexity
 +
    Ciphersuite independence enables EAP methods to avoid having to
 +
    include ciphersuite-specific code.  Requiring each EAP method to
 +
    include ciphersuite-specific code for transient session key
 +
    derivation would increase method complexity and result in
 +
    duplicated effort.
  
 +
Simplified configuration
 +
    Ciphersuite independence enables EAP method implementations on
 +
    the peer and server to avoid having to configure
 +
    ciphersuite-specific parameters.  The ciphersuite is negotiated
 +
    between the peer and authenticator outside of EAP.  Where the
 +
    authenticator operates in "pass-through" mode, the EAP server is
 +
    not a party to this negotiation, nor is it involved in the data
 +
    flow between the EAP peer and authenticator.  As a result, the
 +
    EAP server does not have knowledge of the ciphersuites and
 +
    negotiation policies implemented by the peer and authenticator,
 +
    nor is it aware of the ciphersuite negotiated between them.  For
 +
    example, since Encryption Control Protocol (ECP) negotiation
 +
    occurs after authentication, when run over PPP, the EAP peer and
  
 +
    server cannot anticipate the negotiated ciphersuite, and
 +
    therefore, this information cannot be provided to the EAP
 +
    method.
  
Channel Binding
+
== Lower-Layer Operation ==
  
  Channel binding is the process by which lower-layer parameters are
+
On completion of EAP authentication, EAP keying material and
  verified for consistency between the EAP peer and serverIn
+
parameters exported by the EAP method are provided to the lower layer
  order to avoid introducing media dependencies, EAP methods that
+
and AAA layer (if present)These include the Master Session Key
  transport channel binding parameters MUST treat this data as
+
(MSK), Extended Master Session Key (EMSK), Peer-Id(s), Server-Id(s),
  opaque octetsSee Section 5.3.3 for further discussion.
+
and Session-IdThe Initialization Vector (IV) is deprecated, but
 +
might be provided.
  
==== Key Naming ====
+
In order to preserve the security of EAP keying material derived
 +
within methods, lower layers MUST NOT export keys passed down by EAP
 +
methods.  This implies that EAP keying material passed down to a
 +
lower layer is for the exclusive use of that lower layer and MUST NOT
 +
be used within another lower layer.  This prevents compromise of one
 +
lower layer from compromising other applications using EAP keying
 +
material.
  
Each key created within the EAP key management framework has a name
+
EAP keying material provided to a lower layer MUST NOT be transported
(a unique identifier), as well as a scope (the parties to whom the
+
to another entityFor example, EAP keying material passed down to
key is available)The scope of exported keying material and TEKs is
+
the EAP peer lower layer MUST NOT leave the peer;  EAP keying
defined by the authenticated method-specific peer identities
+
material passed down or transported to the EAP authenticator lower
(Peer-Id(s)) and the authenticated server identities (Server-Id(s)),
+
layer MUST NOT leave the authenticator.
where available.
 
 
 
MSK and EMSK Names
 
    The MSK and EMSK are exported by the EAP peer and EAP server,
 
    and MUST be named using the EAP Session-Id and a binary or
 
    textual indication of the EAP keying material being referred to.
 
 
 
PMK Name
 
    This document does not specify a naming scheme for the Pairwise
 
    Master Key (PMK).  The PMK is only identified by the name of the
 
    key from which it is derived.
 
 
 
    Note: IEEE 802.11 names the PMK for the purposes of being able
 
    to refer to it in the Secure Association Protocol; the PMK name
 
    (known as the PMKID) is based on a hash of the PMK itself as
 
    well as some other parameters (see [IEEE-802.11] Section
 
    8.5.1.2).
 
 
 
TEK Name
 
    Transient EAP Keys (TEKs) MAY be named; their naming is
 
    specified in the EAP method specification.
 
 
 
TSK Name
 
    Transient Session Keys (TSKs) are typically named.  Their naming
 
    is specified in the lower layer so that the correct set of TSKs
 
    can be identified for processing a given packet.
 
  
 +
On the EAP server, keying material and parameters requested by and
 +
passed down to the AAA layer MAY be replicated to the AAA layer on
 +
the authenticator (with the exception of the EMSK).  On the
 +
authenticator, the AAA layer provides the replicated keying material
 +
and parameters to the lower layer over which the EAP authentication
 +
conversation took place.  This enables mode independence to be
 +
maintained.
  
 +
The EAP layer, as well as the peer and authenticator layers, MUST NOT
 +
modify or cache keying material or parameters (including channel
 +
bindings) passing in either direction between the EAP method layer
 +
and the lower layer or AAA layer.
  
 +
=== Transient Session Keys ===
  
 +
Where explicitly supported by the lower layer, lower layers MAY cache
 +
keying material, including exported EAP keying material and/or TSKs;
 +
the structure of this key cache is defined by the lower layer.  So as
 +
to enable interoperability, new lower-layer specifications MUST
 +
describe key caching behavior.  Unless explicitly specified by the
 +
lower layer, the EAP peer, server, and authenticator MUST assume that
  
 +
peers and authenticators do not cache keying material.  Existing EAP
 +
lower layers and AAA layers handle the generation of transient
 +
session keys and caching of EAP keying material in different ways:
  
 +
IEEE 802.1X-2004
 +
    When used with wired networks, IEEE 802.1X-2004 [IEEE-802.1X]
 +
    does not support link-layer ciphersuites, and as a result, it
 +
    does not provide for the generation of TSKs or caching of EAP
 +
    keying material and parameters.  Once EAP authentication
 +
    completes, it is assumed that EAP keying material and parameters
 +
    are discarded; on IEEE 802 wired networks, there is no
 +
    subsequent Secure Association Protocol exchange.  Perfect
 +
    Forward Secrecy (PFS) is only possible if the negotiated EAP
 +
    method supports this.
  
 +
PPP
 +
    PPP, defined in [[RFC1661]], does not include support for a Secure
 +
    Association Protocol, nor does it support caching of EAP keying
 +
    material or parameters.  PPP ciphersuites derive their TSKs
 +
    directly from the MSK, as described in [[RFC2716]] Section 3.5.
 +
    This is NOT RECOMMENDED, since if PPP were to support caching of
 +
    EAP keying material, this could result in TSK reuse.  As a
 +
    result, once the PPP session is terminated, EAP keying material
 +
    and parameters MUST be discarded.  Since caching of EAP keying
 +
    material is not permitted within PPP, there is no way to handle
 +
    TSK re-key without EAP re-authentication.  Perfect Forward
 +
    Secrecy (PFS) is only possible if the negotiated EAP method
 +
    supports this.
  
 +
IKEv2
 +
    IKEv2, defined in [[RFC4306]], only uses the MSK for
 +
    authentication purposes and not key derivation.  The EMSK, IV,
 +
    Peer-Id, Server-Id or Session-Id are not used.  As a result, the
 +
    TSKs derived by IKEv2 are cryptographically independent of the
 +
    EAP keying material and re-key of IPsec SAs can be handled
 +
    without requiring EAP re-authentication.  Within IKEv2, it is
 +
    possible to negotiate PFS, regardless of which EAP method is
 +
    negotiated.  IKEv2 as specified in [[RFC4306]] does not cache EAP
 +
    keying material or parameters; once IKEv2 authentication
 +
    completes, it is assumed that EAP keying material and parameters
 +
    are discarded.  The Session-Timeout Attribute is therefore
 +
    interpreted as a limit on the VPN session time, rather than an
 +
    indication of the MSK key lifetime.
  
 +
IEEE 802.11
 +
    IEEE 802.11 enables caching of the MSK, but not the EMSK, IV,
 +
    Peer-Id, Server-Id, or Session-Id.  More details about the
 +
    structure of the cache are available in [IEEE-802.11].  In IEEE
  
 +
    802.11, TSKs are derived from the MSK using a Secure Association
 +
    Protocol known as the 4-way handshake, which includes a nonce
 +
    exchange.  This guarantees TSK freshness even if the MSK is
 +
    reused.  The 4-way handshake also enables TSK re-key without EAP
 +
    re-authentication.  PFS is only possible within IEEE 802.11 if
 +
    caching is not enabled and the negotiated EAP method supports
 +
    PFS.
  
 +
IEEE 802.16e
 +
    IEEE 802.16e, defined in [IEEE-802.16e], supports caching of the
 +
    MSK, but not the EMSK, IV, Peer-Id, Server-Id, or Session-Id.
 +
    IEEE 802.16e supports a Secure Association Protocol in which
 +
    TSKs are chosen by the authenticator without any contribution by
 +
    the peer.  The TSKs are encrypted, authenticated, and integrity
 +
    protected using the MSK and are transported from the
 +
    authenticator to the peer.  TSK re-key is possible without EAP
 +
    re-authentication.  PFS is not possible even if the negotiated
 +
    EAP method supports it.
  
=== Security Goals ===
+
AAA
 +
    Existing implementations and specifications for RADIUS/EAP
 +
    [[RFC3579]] or Diameter EAP [[RFC4072]] do not support caching of
 +
    keying material or parameters.  In existing AAA clients, proxy
 +
    and server implementations, exported EAP keying material (MSK,
 +
    EMSK, and IV), as well as parameters and derived keys are not
 +
    cached and MUST be presumed lost after the AAA exchange
 +
    completes.
  
The goal of the EAP conversation is to derive fresh session keys
+
    In order to avoid key reuse, the AAA layer MUST delete
between the EAP peer and authenticator that are known only to those
+
    transported keys once they are sent.  The AAA layer MUST NOT
parties, and for both the EAP peer and authenticator to demonstrate
+
    retain keys that it has previously sent.  For example, a AAA
that they are authorized to perform their roles either by each other
+
    layer that has transported the MSK MUST delete it, and keys MUST
or by a trusted third party (the backend authentication server).
+
    NOT be derived from the MSK from that point forward.
  
Completion of an EAP method exchange (phase 1a) supporting key
+
=== Authenticator and Peer Architecture ===
derivation results in the derivation of EAP keying material (MSK,
 
EMSK, TEKs) known only to the EAP peer (identified by the Peer-Id(s))
 
and EAP server (identified by the Server-Id(s)).  Both the EAP peer
 
and EAP server know this keying material to be fresh.  The Peer-Id
 
and Server-Id are discussed in Sections 1.4, 2.4, and 2.5 as well as
 
in Appendix A.  Key freshness is discussed in Sections 3.4, 3.5, and
 
5.7.
 
  
Completion of the AAA exchange (phase 1b) results in the transport of
+
This specification does not impose constraints on the architecture of
keying material from the EAP server (identified by the Server-Id(s))
+
the EAP authenticator or peerFor example, any of the authenticator
to the EAP authenticator (identified by the NAS-Identifier) without
+
architectures described in [[RFC4118]] can be usedAs a result, lower
disclosure to any other partyBoth the EAP server and EAP
+
layers need to identify EAP peers and authenticators unambiguously,
authenticator know this keying material to be fresh.  Disclosure
+
without incorporating implicit assumptions about peer and
issues are discussed in Sections 3.8 and 5.3; security properties of
+
authenticator architectures.
AAA protocols are discussed in Sections 5.1 - 5.9.
 
 
 
The backend authentication server is trusted to transport keying
 
material only to the authenticator that was established with the
 
peer, and it is trusted to transport that keying material to no other
 
parties.  In many systems, EAP keying material established by the EAP
 
peer and EAP server are combined with publicly available data to
 
derive other keys.  The backend authentication server is trusted to
 
refrain from deriving these same keys or acting as a
 
man-in-the-middle even though it has access to the keying material
 
that is needed to do so.
 
 
 
The authenticator is also a trusted party.  The authenticator is
 
trusted not to distribute keying material provided by the backend
 
authentication server to any other partiesIf the authenticator
 
uses a key derivation function to derive additional keying material,
 
the authenticator is trusted to distribute the derived keying
 
material only to the appropriate party that is known to the peer, and
 
no other party.  When this approach is used, care must be taken to
 
ensure that the resulting key management system meets all of the
 
principles in [RFC4962], confirming that keys used to protect data
 
are to be known only by the peer and authenticator.
 
  
 +
For example, it is possible for multiple base stations and a
 +
"controller" (e.g., WLAN switch) to comprise a single EAP
 +
authenticator.  In such a situation, the "base station identity" is
 +
irrelevant to the EAP method conversation, except perhaps as an
 +
opaque blob to be used in channel binding.  Many base stations can
 +
share the same authenticator identity.  An EAP authenticator or peer:
  
 +
  (a) can contain one or more physical or logical ports;
 +
  (b) can advertise itself as one or more "virtual" authenticators
 +
      or peers;
 +
  (c) can utilize multiple CPUs;
 +
  (d) can support clustering services for load balancing or
 +
      failover.
  
 +
Both the EAP peer and authenticator can have more than one physical
 +
or logical port.  A peer can simultaneously access the network via
 +
multiple authenticators, or via multiple physical or logical ports on
 +
a given authenticator.  Similarly, an authenticator can offer network
 +
access to multiple peers, each via a separate physical or logical
 +
port.  When a single physical authenticator advertises itself as
 +
multiple virtual authenticators, it is possible for a single physical
 +
port to belong to multiple virtual authenticators.
  
 +
An authenticator can be configured to communicate with more than one
 +
EAP server, each of which is configured to communicate with a subset
 +
of the authenticators.  The situation is illustrated in Figure 3.
  
 +
=== Authenticator Identification ===
  
 +
The EAP method conversation is between the EAP peer and server.  The
 +
authenticator identity, if considered at all by the EAP method, is
 +
treated as an opaque blob for the purpose of channel binding (see
 +
Section 5.3.3).  However, the authenticator identity is important in
 +
two other exchanges - the AAA protocol exchange and the Secure
 +
Association Protocol conversation.
  
 +
The AAA conversation is between the EAP authenticator and the backend
 +
authentication server.  From the point of view of the backend
 +
authentication server, keying material and parameters are transported
 +
to the EAP authenticator identified by the NAS-Identifier Attribute.
 +
Since an EAP authenticator MUST NOT share EAP keying material or
 +
parameters with another party, if the EAP peer or backend
 +
authentication server detects use of EAP keying material and
 +
parameters outside the scope defined by the NAS-Identifier, the
 +
keying material MUST be considered compromised.
  
Completion of the Secure Association Protocol (phase 2) results in
+
The Secure Association Protocol conversation is between the peer and
the derivation or transport of Transient Session Keys (TSKs) known
+
the authenticatorFor lower layers that support key caching, it is
only to the EAP peer (identified by the Peer-Id(s)) and authenticator
+
particularly important for the EAP peer, authenticator, and backend
(identified by the NAS-Identifier)Both the EAP peer and
+
server to have a consistent view of the usage scope of the
authenticator know the TSKs to be freshBoth the EAP peer and
+
transported keying materialIn order to enable this, it is
authenticator demonstrate that they are authorized to perform their
+
RECOMMENDED that the Secure Association Protocol explicitly
roles.  Authorization issues are discussed in Sections 4.3.2 and 5.5;
+
communicate the usage scope of the EAP keying material passed down to
security properties of Secure Association Protocols are discussed in
+
the lower layer, rather than implicitly assuming that this is defined
Section 3.1.
+
by the authenticator and peer endpoint addresses.
  
=== EAP Invariants ===
+
                  +-+-+-+-+
 
+
                  | EAP   |
Certain basic characteristics, known as "EAP Invariants", hold true
+
                  | Peer  |
for EAP implementations:
+
                  +-+-+-+-+
 +
                    | | |  Peer Ports
 +
                  /  |  \
 +
                  /  |  \
 +
                /    |    \
 +
                /    |    \
 +
              /      |      \
 +
              /      |      \
 +
            /        |        \
 +
            /        |        \    Authenticator
 +
        | | |      | | |      | | |  Ports
 +
      +-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+
 +
      |      |  |      |  |      |
 +
      | Auth1 |  | Auth2 |  | Auth3 |
 +
      |      |  |      |  |      |
 +
      +-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+
 +
            \        | \        |
 +
            \      |  \        |
 +
              \      |  \      |
 +
EAP over AAA  \    |    \      |
 +
  (optional)    \    |    \    |
 +
                \  |      \    |
 +
                  \  |      \  |
 +
                  \ |        \  |
 +
                +-+-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+-+  Backend
 +
                |  EAP   |  |  EAP    |  Authentication
 +
                | Server1 |  | Server2 |  Servers
 +
                +-+-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+-+
  
  Mode independence
+
Figure 3: Relationship between EAP Peer, Authenticator, and Server
  Media independence
 
  Method independence
 
  Ciphersuite independence
 
  
==== Mode Independence ====
+
Since an authenticator can have multiple ports, the scope of the
 +
authenticator key cache cannot be described by a single endpoint
 +
address.  Similarly, where a peer can have multiple ports and sharing
 +
of EAP keying material and parameters between peer ports of the same
  
EAP is typically deployed to support extensible network access
+
link type is allowed, the extent of the peer key cache cannot be
authentication in situations where a peer desires network access via
+
communicated by using a single endpoint addressInstead, it is
one or more authenticatorsWhere authenticators are deployed
+
RECOMMENDED that the EAP peer and authenticator consistently identify
standalone, the EAP conversation occurs between the peer and
+
themselves utilizing explicit identifiers, rather than endpoint
authenticator, and the authenticator locally implements one or more
+
addresses or port identifiers.
EAP methods.  However, when utilized in "pass-through" mode, EAP
 
enables the deployment of new authentication methods without
 
requiring the development of new code on the authenticator.
 
  
While the authenticator can implement some EAP methods locally and
+
AAA protocols such as RADIUS [[RFC3579]] and Diameter [[RFC4072]] provide
use those methods to authenticate local users, it can at the same
+
a mechanism for the identification of AAA clients; since the EAP
time act as a pass-through for other users and methods, forwarding
+
authenticator and AAA client MUST be co-resident, this mechanism is
EAP packets back and forth between the backend authentication server
+
applicable to the identification of EAP authenticators.
and the peer.  This is accomplished by encapsulating EAP packets
 
within the Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA)
 
protocol spoken between the authenticator and backend authentication
 
server.  AAA protocols supporting EAP include RADIUS [RFC3579] and
 
Diameter [RFC4072].
 
 
 
It is a fundamental property of EAP that at the EAP method layer, the
 
conversation between the EAP peer and server is unaffected by whether
 
the EAP authenticator is operating in "pass-through" mode.  EAP
 
methods operate identically in all aspects, including key derivation
 
and parameter import/export, regardless of whether or not the
 
authenticator is operating as a pass-through.
 
  
 +
RADIUS [[RFC2865]] requires that an Access-Request packet contain one
 +
or more of the NAS-Identifier, NAS-IP-Address, and NAS-IPv6-Address
 +
attributes.  Since a NAS can have more than one IP address, the
 +
NAS-Identifier Attribute is RECOMMENDED for explicit identification
 +
of the authenticator, both within the AAA protocol exchange and the
 +
Secure Association Protocol conversation.
  
 +
Problems that can arise where the peer and authenticator implicitly
 +
identify themselves using endpoint addresses include the following:
  
 +
(a)  It is possible that the peer will not be able to determine which
 +
    authenticator ports are associated with which authenticators.
 +
    As a result, the EAP peer will be unable to utilize the
 +
    authenticator key cache in an efficient way, and will also be
 +
    unable to determine whether EAP keying material has been shared
 +
    outside its authorized scope, and therefore needs to be
 +
    considered compromised.
  
 +
(b)  It is possible that the authenticator will not be able to
 +
    determine which peer ports are associated with which peers,
 +
    preventing the peer from communicating with it utilizing
 +
    multiple peer ports.
  
 +
(c)  It is possible that the peer will not be able to determine with
 +
    which virtual authenticator it is communicating.  For example,
 +
    multiple virtual authenticators can share a MAC address, but
 +
    utilize different NAS-Identifiers.
  
The successful completion of an EAP method that supports key
+
(d)  It is possible that the authenticator will not be able to
derivation results in the export of EAP keying material and
+
    determine with which virtual peer it is communicatingMultiple
parameters on the EAP peer and serverEven though the EAP peer or
+
    virtual peers can share a MAC address, but utilize different
server can import channel binding parameters that can include the
+
    Peer-Ids.
identity of the EAP authenticator, this information is treated as
 
opaque octets.  As a result, within EAP, the only relevant identities
 
are the Peer-Id(s) and Server-Id(s).  Channel binding parameters are
 
only interpreted by the lower layer.
 
  
Within EAP, the primary function of the AAA protocol is to maintain
+
(e)  It is possible that the EAP peer and server will not be able to
the principle of mode independence.  As far as the EAP peer is
+
    verify the authenticator identity via channel binding.
concerned, its conversation with the EAP authenticator, and all
 
consequences of that conversation, are identical, regardless of the
 
authenticator mode of operation.
 
  
==== Media Independence ====
+
For example, problems (a), (c), and (e) occur in [IEEE-802.11], which
 +
utilizes peer and authenticator MAC addresses within the 4-way
 +
handshake.  Problems (b) and (d) do not occur since [IEEE-802.11]
 +
only allows a virtual peer to utilize a single port.
  
One of the goals of EAP is to allow EAP methods to function on any
+
The following steps enable lower-layer identities to be securely
lower layer meeting the criteria outlined in [RFC3748] Section 3.1.
+
verified by all parties:
For example, as described in [RFC3748], EAP authentication can be run
 
over PPP [RFC1661], IEEE 802 wired networks [IEEE-802.1X], and
 
wireless networks such as 802.11 [IEEE-802.11] and 802.16
 
[IEEE-802.16e].
 
  
In order to maintain media independence, it is necessary for EAP to
+
(f)  Specify the lower-layer parameters used to identify the
avoid consideration of media-specific elementsFor example, EAP
+
    authenticator and peerAs noted earlier, endpoint or port
methods cannot be assumed to have knowledge of the lower layer over
+
    identifiers are not recommended for identification of the
which they are transported, and cannot be restricted to identifiers
+
    authenticator or peer when it is possible for them to have
associated with a particular usage environment (e.g., Medium Access
+
    multiple ports.
Control (MAC) addresses).
 
  
Note that media independence can be retained within EAP methods that
+
(g)  Communicate the lower-layer identities between the peer and
support channel binding or method-specific identification.  An EAP
+
    authenticator within phase 0.  This allows the peer and
method need not be aware of the content of an identifier in order to
+
    authenticator to determine the key scope if a key cache is
use it.  This enables an EAP method to use media-specific identifiers
+
    utilized.
such as MAC addresses without compromising media independence.
 
Channel binding parameters are treated as opaque octets by EAP
 
methods so that handling them does not require media-specific
 
knowledge.
 
  
 +
(h)  Communicate the lower-layer authenticator identity between the
 +
    authenticator and backend authentication server within the NAS-
 +
    Identifier Attribute.
  
 +
(i)  Include the lower-layer identities within channel bindings (if
 +
    supported) in phase 1a, ensuring that they are communicated
 +
    between the EAP peer and server.
  
 +
(j)  Support the integrity-protected exchange of identities within
 +
    phase 2a.
  
 +
(k)  Utilize the advertised lower-layer identities to enable the peer
 +
    and authenticator to verify that keys are maintained within the
 +
    advertised scope.
  
 +
==== Virtual Authenticators ====
  
 +
When a single physical authenticator advertises itself as multiple
 +
virtual authenticators, if the virtual authenticators do not maintain
 +
logically separate key caches, then by authenticating to one virtual
 +
authenticator, the peer can gain access to the other virtual
 +
authenticators sharing a key cache.
  
 +
For example, where a physical authenticator implements "Guest" and
 +
"Corporate Intranet" virtual authenticators, an attacker acting as a
 +
peer could authenticate with the "Guest" virtual authenticator and
 +
derive EAP keying material.  If the "Guest" and "Corporate Intranet"
 +
virtual authenticators share a key cache, then the peer can utilize
 +
the EAP keying material derived for the "Guest" network to obtain
 +
access to the "Corporate Intranet" network.
  
 +
The following steps can be taken to mitigate this vulnerability:
  
 +
(a)  Authenticators are REQUIRED to cache associated authorizations
 +
    along with EAP keying material and parameters and to apply
 +
    authorizations to the peer on each network access, regardless of
 +
    which virtual authenticator is being accessed.  This ensures
 +
    that an attacker cannot obtain elevated privileges even where
 +
    the key cache is shared between virtual authenticators, and a
 +
    peer obtains access to one virtual authenticator utilizing a key
 +
    cache entry created for use with another virtual authenticator.
  
 +
(b)  It is RECOMMENDED that physical authenticators maintain separate
 +
    key caches for each virtual authenticator.  This ensures that a
 +
    cache entry created for use with one virtual authenticator
 +
    cannot be used for access to another virtual authenticator.
 +
    Since a key cache entry can no longer be shared between virtual
 +
    authentications, this step provides protection beyond that
 +
    offered in (a).  This is valuable in situations where
 +
    authorizations are not used to enforce access limitations.  For
 +
    example, where access is limited using a filter installed on a
 +
    router rather than using authorizations provided to the
 +
    authenticator, a peer can gain unauthorized access to resources
 +
    by exploiting a shared key cache entry.
  
 +
(c)  It is RECOMMENDED that each virtual authenticator identify
 +
    itself consistently to the peer and to the backend
 +
    authentication server, so as to enable the peer to verify the
 +
    authenticator identity via channel binding (see Section 5.3.3).
  
 +
(d)  It is RECOMMENDED that each virtual authenticator identify
 +
    itself distinctly, in order to enable the peer and backend
 +
    authentication server to tell them apart.  For example, this can
 +
    be accomplished by utilizing a distinct value of the NAS-
 +
    Identifier Attribute.
  
 +
=== Peer Identification ===
  
==== Method Independence ====
+
As described in [[RFC3748]] Section 7.3, the peer identity provided in
 +
the EAP-Response/Identity can be different from the peer identities
 +
authenticated by the EAP method.  For example, the identity provided
  
By enabling pass-through, authenticators can support any method
+
in the EAP-Response/Identity can be a privacy identifier as described
implemented on the peer and server, not just locally implemented
+
in "The Network Access Identifier" [[RFC4282]] Section 2As noted in
methodsThis allows the authenticator to avoid having to implement
+
[[RFC4284]], it is also possible to utilize a Network Access Identifier
the EAP methods configured for use by peers.  In fact, since a
+
(NAI) for the purposes of source routing; an NAI utilized for source
pass-through authenticator need not implement any EAP methods at all,
+
routing is said to be "decorated" as described in [[RFC4282]] Section
it cannot be assumed to support any EAP method-specific code.  As
+
2.7.
noted in [RFC3748] Section 2.3:
 
  
  Compliant pass-through authenticator implementations MUST by
+
When the EAP peer provides the Network Access Identity (NAI) within
  default forward EAP packets of any Type.
+
the EAP-Response/Identity, as described in [[RFC3579]], the
 +
authenticator copies the NAI included in the EAP-Response/Identity
 +
into the User-Name Attribute included within the Access-Request.  As
 +
the Access-Request is forwarded toward the backend authentication
 +
server, AAA proxies remove decoration from the NAI included in the
 +
User-Name Attribute; the NAI included within the
 +
EAP-Response/Identity encapsulated in the Access-Request remains
 +
unchanged.  As a result, when the Access-Request arrives at the
 +
backend authentication server, the EAP-Response/Identity can differ
 +
from the User-Name Attribute (which can have some or all of the
 +
decoration removed).  In the absence of a Peer-Id, the backend
 +
authentication server SHOULD use the contents of the User-Name
 +
Attribute, rather than the EAP-Response/Identity, as the peer
 +
identity.
  
This is useful where there is no single EAP method that is both
+
It is possible for more than one Peer-Id to be exported by an EAP
mandatory to implement and offers acceptable security for the media
+
method.  For example, a peer certificate can contain more than one
in use.  For example, the [RFC3748] mandatory-to-implement EAP method
+
peer identity; in a tunnel method, peer identities can be
(MD5-Challenge) does not provide dictionary attack resistance, mutual
+
authenticated within both an outer and inner exchange, and these
authentication, or key derivation, and as a result, is not
+
identities could be different in type and contents.  For example, an
appropriate for use in Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)
+
outer exchange could provide a Peer-Id in the form of a Relative
authentication [RFC4017].  However, despite this, it is possible for
+
Distinguished Name (RDN), whereas an inner exchange could identify
the peer and authenticator to interoperate as long as a suitable EAP
+
the peer via its NAI or MAC address.  Where EAP keying material is
method is supported both on the EAP peer and server.
+
determined solely from the outer exchange, only the outer Peer-Id(s)
 +
are exported; where the EAP keying material is determined from both
 +
the inner and outer exchanges, then both the inner and outer
 +
Peer-Id(s) are exported by the tunnel method.
  
==== Ciphersuite Independence ====
+
=== Server Identification ===
 
 
Ciphersuite Independence is a requirement for media independence.
 
Since lower-layer ciphersuites vary between media, media independence
 
requires that exported EAP keying material be large enough (with
 
sufficient entropy) to handle any ciphersuite.
 
 
 
While EAP methods can negotiate the ciphersuite used in protection of
 
the EAP conversation, the ciphersuite used for the protection of the
 
data exchanged after EAP authentication has completed is negotiated
 
between the peer and authenticator within the lower layer, outside of
 
EAP.
 
 
 
For example, within PPP, the ciphersuite is negotiated within the
 
Encryption Control Protocol (ECP) defined in [RFC1968], after EAP
 
authentication is completed.  Within [IEEE-802.11], the AP
 
ciphersuites are advertised in the Beacon and Probe Responses prior
 
to EAP authentication and are securely verified during a 4-way
 
handshake exchange.
 
  
 +
It is possible for more than one Server-Id to be exported by an EAP
 +
method.  For example, a server certificate can contain more than one
 +
server identity; in a tunnel method, server identities could be
 +
authenticated within both an outer and inner exchange, and these
 +
identities could be different in type and contents.  For example, an
 +
outer exchange could provide a Server-Id in the form of an IP
 +
address, whereas an inner exchange could identify the server via its
 +
Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) or hostname.  Where EAP keying
 +
material is determined solely from the outer exchange, only the outer
 +
Server-Id(s) are exported by the EAP method; where the EAP keying
 +
material is determined from both the inner and outer exchanges, then
 +
both the inner and outer Server-Id(s) are exported by the EAP method.
  
 +
As shown in Figure 3, an authenticator can be configured to
 +
communicate with multiple EAP servers; the EAP server that an
 +
authenticator communicates with can vary according to configuration
 +
and network and server availability.  While the EAP peer can assume
 +
that all EAP servers within a realm have access to the credentials
 +
necessary to validate an authentication attempt, it cannot assume
 +
that all EAP servers share persistent state.
  
 +
Authenticators can be configured with different primary or secondary
 +
EAP servers, in order to balance the load.  Also, the authenticator
 +
can dynamically determine the EAP server to which requests will be
 +
sent; in the event of a communication failure, the authenticator can
 +
fail over to another EAP server.  For example, in Figure 3,
 +
Authenticator2 can be initially configured with EAP server1 as its
 +
primary backend authentication server, and EAP server2 as the backup,
 +
but if EAP server1 becomes unavailable, EAP server2 can become the
 +
primary server.
  
 +
In general, the EAP peer cannot direct an authentication attempt to a
 +
particular EAP server within a realm, this decision is made by AAA
 +
clients, nor can the peer determine with which EAP server it will be
 +
communicating, prior to the start of the EAP method conversation.
 +
The Server-Id is not included in the EAP-Request/Identity, and since
 +
the EAP server may be determined dynamically, it typically is not
 +
possible for the authenticator to advertise the Server-Id during the
 +
discovery phase.  Some EAP methods do not export the Server-Id so
 +
that it is possible that the EAP peer will not learn with which
 +
server it was conversing after the EAP conversation completes
 +
successfully.
  
 +
As a result, an EAP peer, on connecting to a new authenticator or
 +
reconnecting to the same authenticator, can find itself communicating
 +
with a different EAP server.  Fast reconnect, defined in [[RFC3748]]
  
 +
Section 7.2, can fail if the EAP server with which the peer
 +
communicates is not the same one with which it initially established
 +
a security association.  For example, an EAP peer attempting an
 +
EAP-TLS session resume can find that the new EAP-TLS server will not
 +
have access to the TLS Master Key identified by the TLS Session-Id,
 +
and therefore the session resumption attempt will fail, requiring
 +
completion of a full EAP-TLS exchange.
  
 +
EAP methods that export the Server-Id MUST authenticate the server.
 +
However, not all EAP methods supporting mutual authentication provide
 +
a non-null Server-Id; some methods only enable the EAP peer to verify
 +
that the EAP server possesses a long-term secret, but do not provide
 +
the identity of the EAP server.  In this case, the EAP peer will know
 +
that an authenticator has been authorized by an EAP server, but will
 +
not confirm the identity of the EAP server.  Where the EAP method
 +
does not provide a Server-Id, the peer cannot identify the EAP server
 +
with which it generated keying material.  This can make it difficult
 +
for the EAP peer to identify the location of a key possessed by that
 +
EAP server.
  
 +
As noted in [[RFC5216]] Section 5.2, EAP methods supporting
 +
authentication using server certificates can determine the Server-Id
 +
from the subject or subjectAltName fields in the server certificate.
 +
Validating the EAP server identity can help the EAP peer to decide
 +
whether a specific EAP server is authorized.  In some cases, such as
 +
where the certificate extensions defined in [[RFC4334]] are included in
 +
the server certificate, it can even be possible for the peer to
 +
verify some channel binding parameters from the server certificate.
  
 +
It is possible for problems to arise in situations where the EAP
 +
server identifies itself differently to the EAP peer and
 +
authenticator.  For example, it is possible that the Server-Id
 +
exported by EAP methods will not be identical to the Fully Qualified
 +
Domain Name (FQDN) of the backend authentication server.  Where
 +
certificate-based authentication is used within RADIUS or Diameter,
 +
it is possible that the subjectAltName used in the backend
 +
authentication server certificate will not be identical to the
 +
Server-Id or backend authentication server FQDN.  This is not
 +
normally an issue in EAP, as the authenticator will be unaware of the
 +
identities used between the EAP peer and server.  However, this can
 +
be an issue for key caching, if the authenticator is expected to
 +
locate a backend authentication server corresponding to a Server-Id
 +
provided by an EAP peer.
  
 +
Where the backend authentication server FQDN differs from the
 +
subjectAltName in the backend authentication server certificate, it
 +
is possible that the AAA client will not be able to determine whether
 +
it is talking to the correct backend authentication server.  Where
  
Since the ciphersuites used to protect data depend on the lower
+
the Server-Id and backend authentication server FQDN differ, it is
layer, requiring that EAP methods have knowledge of lower-layer
+
possible that the combination of the key scope (Peer-Id(s), Server-
ciphersuites would compromise the principle of media independence.
+
Id(s)) and EAP conversation identifier (Session-Id) will not be
As a result, methods export EAP keying material that is ciphersuite
+
sufficient to determine where the key resides. For example, the
independentSince ciphersuite negotiation occurs in the lower
+
authenticator can identify backend authentication servers by their IP
layer, there is no need for lower-layer ciphersuite negotiation
+
address (as occurs in RADIUS), or using a Fully Qualified Domain Name
within EAP.
+
(as in Diameter)If the Server-Id does not correspond to the IP
 +
address or FQDN of a known backend authentication server, then it may
 +
not be possible to locate which backend authentication server
 +
possesses the key.
  
In order to allow a ciphersuite to be usable within the EAP keying
+
== Security Association Management ==
framework, the ciphersuite specification needs to describe how TSKs
 
suitable for use with the ciphersuite are derived from exported EAP
 
keying material.  To maintain method independence, algorithms for
 
deriving TSKs MUST NOT depend on the EAP method, although algorithms
 
for TEK derivation MAY be specific to the EAP method.
 
  
Advantages of ciphersuite-independence include:
+
EAP, as defined in [[RFC3748]], supports key derivation, but does not
 +
provide for the management of lower-layer security associations.
 +
Missing functionality includes:
  
Reduced update requirements
+
(a)  Security Association negotiation.  EAP does not negotiate
     Ciphersuite independence enables EAP methods to be used with new
+
     lower-layer unicast or multicast security associations,
     ciphersuites without requiring the methods to be updatedIf
+
     including cryptographic algorithms or traffic profilesEAP
     EAP methods were to specify how to derive transient session keys
+
     methods only negotiate cryptographic algorithms for their own
     for each ciphersuite, they would need to be updated each time a
+
     use, not for the underlying lower layersEAP also does not
    new ciphersuite is developedIn addition, backend
+
     negotiate the traffic profiles to be protected with the
     authentication servers might not be usable with all EAP-capable
+
     negotiated ciphersuites; in some cases the traffic to be
     authenticators, since the backend authentication server would
+
     protected can have lower-layer source and destination addresses
     also need to be updated each time support for a new ciphersuite
+
     different from the lower-layer peer or authenticator addresses.
     is added to the authenticator.
 
  
Reduced EAP method complexity
+
(b) Re-key. EAP does not support the re-keying of exported EAP
    Ciphersuite independence enables EAP methods to avoid having to
+
     keying material without EAP re-authentication, although EAP
    include ciphersuite-specific code. Requiring each EAP method to
+
     methods can support "fast reconnect" as defined in [[RFC3748]]
    include ciphersuite-specific code for transient session key
+
     Section 7.2.1.
    derivation would increase method complexity and result in
 
    duplicated effort.
 
 
 
Simplified configuration
 
    Ciphersuite independence enables EAP method implementations on
 
    the peer and server to avoid having to configure
 
    ciphersuite-specific parameters.  The ciphersuite is negotiated
 
    between the peer and authenticator outside of EAP.  Where the
 
     authenticator operates in "pass-through" mode, the EAP server is
 
     not a party to this negotiation, nor is it involved in the data
 
     flow between the EAP peer and authenticator. As a result, the
 
    EAP server does not have knowledge of the ciphersuites and
 
    negotiation policies implemented by the peer and authenticator,
 
    nor is it aware of the ciphersuite negotiated between them. For
 
    example, since Encryption Control Protocol (ECP) negotiation
 
    occurs after authentication, when run over PPP, the EAP peer and
 
  
 +
(c)  Key delete/install semantics.  EAP does not synchronize
 +
    installation or deletion of keying material on the EAP peer and
 +
    authenticator.
  
 +
(d)  Lifetime negotiation.  EAP does not support lifetime negotiation
 +
    for exported EAP keying material, and existing EAP methods also
 +
    do not support key lifetime negotiation.
  
 +
(e)  Guaranteed TSK freshness.  Without a post-EAP handshake, TSKs
 +
    can be reused if EAP keying material is cached.
  
 +
These deficiencies are typically addressed via a post-EAP handshake
 +
known as the Secure Association Protocol.
  
    server cannot anticipate the negotiated ciphersuite, and
+
=== Secure Association Protocol ===
    therefore, this information cannot be provided to the EAP
 
    method.
 
  
== Lower-Layer Operation ==
+
Since neither EAP nor EAP methods provide for establishment of
 +
lower-layer security associations, it is RECOMMENDED that these
 +
facilities be provided within the Secure Association Protocol,
 +
including:
  
On completion of EAP authentication, EAP keying material and
+
(a)  Entity Naming.  A basic feature of a Secure Association Protocol
parameters exported by the EAP method are provided to the lower layer
+
    is the explicit naming of the parties engaged in the exchange.
and AAA layer (if present). These include the Master Session Key
+
    Without explicit identification, the parties engaged in the
(MSK), Extended Master Session Key (EMSK), Peer-Id(s), Server-Id(s),
+
    exchange are not identified and the scope of the EAP keying
and Session-Id.  The Initialization Vector (IV) is deprecated, but
+
    parameters negotiated during the EAP exchange is undefined.
might be provided.
 
  
In order to preserve the security of EAP keying material derived
+
(b)  Mutual proof of possession of EAP keying material.  During the
within methods, lower layers MUST NOT export keys passed down by EAP
+
    Secure Association Protocol, the EAP peer and authenticator MUST
methods.  This implies that EAP keying material passed down to a
+
    demonstrate possession of the keying material transported
lower layer is for the exclusive use of that lower layer and MUST NOT
+
    between the backend authentication server and authenticator
be used within another lower layerThis prevents compromise of one
+
    (e.g., MSK), in order to demonstrate that the peer and
lower layer from compromising other applications using EAP keying
+
    authenticator have been authorizedSince mutual proof of
material.
+
    possession is not the same as mutual authentication, the peer
 +
    cannot verify authenticator assertions (including the
 +
    authenticator identity) as a result of this exchange.
 +
    Authenticator identity verification is discussed in Section 2.3.
  
EAP keying material provided to a lower layer MUST NOT be transported
+
(c)  Secure capabilities negotiation.  In order to protect against
to another entityFor example, EAP keying material passed down to
+
    spoofing during the discovery phase, ensure selection of the
the EAP peer lower layer MUST NOT leave the peer; EAP keying
+
    "best" ciphersuite, and protect against forging of negotiated
material passed down or transported to the EAP authenticator lower
+
    security parameters, the Secure Association Protocol MUST
layer MUST NOT leave the authenticator.
+
    support secure capabilities negotiationThis includes the
 +
    secure negotiation of usage modes, session parameters (such as
 +
    security association identifiers (SAIDs) and key lifetimes),
 +
    ciphersuites and required filters, including confirmation of
 +
    security-relevant capabilities discovered during phase 0. The
 +
    Secure Association Protocol MUST support integrity and replay
 +
    protection of all capability negotiation messages.
  
On the EAP server, keying material and parameters requested by and
+
(d)  Key naming and selection.  Where key caching is supported, it is
passed down to the AAA layer MAY be replicated to the AAA layer on
+
    possible for the EAP peer and authenticator to share more than
the authenticator (with the exception of the EMSK)On the
+
    one key of a given typeAs a result, the Secure Association
authenticator, the AAA layer provides the replicated keying material
+
    Protocol MUST explicitly name the keys used in the proof of
and parameters to the lower layer over which the EAP authentication
+
    possession exchange, so as to prevent confusion when more than
conversation took place. This enables mode independence to be
+
    one set of keying material could potentially be used as the
maintained.
+
    basis for the exchange.  Use of the key naming mechanism
 +
    described in Section 1.4.1 is RECOMMENDED.
  
The EAP layer, as well as the peer and authenticator layers, MUST NOT
+
    In order to support the correct processing of phase 2 security
modify or cache keying material or parameters (including channel
+
    associations, the Secure Association (phase 2) protocol MUST
bindings) passing in either direction between the EAP method layer
+
    support the naming of phase 2 security associations and
and the lower layer or AAA layer.
 
  
=== Transient Session Keys ===
+
    associated transient session keys so that the correct set of
 
+
    transient session keys can be identified for processing a given
Where explicitly supported by the lower layer, lower layers MAY cache
+
    packetThe phase 2 Secure Association Protocol also MUST
keying material, including exported EAP keying material and/or TSKs;
+
    support transient session key activation and SHOULD support
the structure of this key cache is defined by the lower layerSo as
+
    deletion so that establishment and re-establishment of transient
to enable interoperability, new lower-layer specifications MUST
+
    session keys can be synchronized between the parties.
describe key caching behavior.  Unless explicitly specified by the
 
lower layer, the EAP peer, server, and authenticator MUST assume that
 
  
 +
(e)  Generation of fresh transient session keys (TSKs).  Where the
 +
    lower layer supports caching of keying material, the EAP peer
 +
    lower layer can initiate a new session using keying material
 +
    that was derived in a previous session.  Were the TSKs to be
 +
    derived solely from a portion of the exported EAP keying
 +
    material, this would result in reuse of the session keys that
 +
    could expose the underlying ciphersuite to attack.
  
 +
    In lower layers where caching of keying material is supported,
 +
    the Secure Association Protocol phase is REQUIRED, and MUST
 +
    support the derivation of fresh unicast and multicast TSKs, even
 +
    when the transported keying material provided by the backend
 +
    authentication server is not fresh.  This is typically supported
 +
    via the exchange of nonces or counters, which are then mixed
 +
    with the keying material in order to generate fresh unicast
 +
    (phase 2a) and possibly multicast (phase 2b) session keys.  By
 +
    not using exported EAP keying material directly to protect data,
 +
    the Secure Association Protocol protects it against compromise.
  
 +
(f)  Key lifetime management.  This includes explicit key lifetime
 +
    negotiation or seamless re-key.  EAP does not support the
 +
    re-keying of EAP keying material without re-authentication, and
 +
    existing EAP methods do not support key lifetime negotiation.
 +
    As a result, the Secure Association Protocol MAY handle the
 +
    re-key and determination of the key lifetime.  Where key caching
 +
    is supported, secure negotiation of key lifetimes is
 +
    RECOMMENDED.  Lower layers that support re-key, but not key
 +
    caching, may not require key lifetime negotiation.  For example,
 +
    a difference between IKEv1 [[RFC2409]] and IKEv2 [[RFC4306]] is that
 +
    in IKEv1 SA lifetimes were negotiated; in IKEv2, each end of the
 +
    SA is responsible for enforcing its own lifetime policy on the
 +
    SA and re-keying the SA when necessary.
  
 +
(g)  Key state resynchronization.  It is possible for the peer or
 +
    authenticator to reboot or reclaim resources, clearing portions
 +
    or all of the key cache.  Therefore, key lifetime negotiation
 +
    cannot guarantee that the key cache will remain synchronized,
 +
    and it may not be possible for the peer to determine before
 +
    attempting to use a key whether it exists within the
 +
    authenticator cache.  It is therefore RECOMMENDED for the EAP
 +
    lower layer to provide a mechanism for key state
  
peers and authenticators do not cache keying material.  Existing EAP
+
    resynchronization, either via the SAP or using a lower layer
lower layers and AAA layers handle the generation of transient
+
    indication (see [[RFC3748]] Section 3.4).  Where the peer and
session keys and caching of EAP keying material in different ways:
+
    authenticator do not jointly possess a key with which to protect
 +
    the resynchronization exchange, secure resynchronization is not
 +
    possible, and alternatives (such as an initiation of EAP
 +
    re-authentication after expiration of a timer) are needed to
 +
    ensure timely resynchronization.
  
IEEE 802.1X-2004
+
(h)  Key scope synchronization. To support key scope determination,
    When used with wired networks, IEEE 802.1X-2004 [IEEE-802.1X]
+
     the Secure Association Protocol SHOULD provide a mechanism by
     does not support link-layer ciphersuites, and as a result, it
+
     which the peer can determine the scope of the key cache on each
     does not provide for the generation of TSKs or caching of EAP
+
     authenticator and by which the authenticator can determine the
     keying material and parameters.  Once EAP authentication
+
     scope of the key cache on a peerThis includes negotiation of
     completes, it is assumed that EAP keying material and parameters
+
     restrictions on key usage.
    are discarded; on IEEE 802 wired networks, there is no
 
    subsequent Secure Association Protocol exchangePerfect
 
     Forward Secrecy (PFS) is only possible if the negotiated EAP
 
    method supports this.
 
  
PPP
+
(i)  Traffic profile negotiation.  The traffic to be protected by a
     PPP, defined in [RFC1661], does not include support for a Secure
+
    lower-layer security association will not necessarily have the
     Association Protocol, nor does it support caching of EAP keying
+
     same lower-layer source or destination address as the EAP peer
     material or parametersPPP ciphersuites derive their TSKs
+
    and authenticator, and it is possible for the peer and
     directly from the MSK, as described in [RFC2716] Section 3.5.
+
     authenticator to negotiate multiple security associations, each
     This is NOT RECOMMENDED, since if PPP were to support caching of
+
     with a different traffic profileWhere this is the case, the
     EAP keying material, this could result in TSK reuse. As a
+
    profile of protected traffic SHOULD be explicitly negotiated.
     result, once the PPP session is terminated, EAP keying material
+
     For example, in IKEv2 it is possible for an Initiator and
     and parameters MUST be discardedSince caching of EAP keying
+
    Responder to utilize EAP for authentication, then negotiate a
     material is not permitted within PPP, there is no way to handle
+
     Tunnel Mode Security Association (SA), which permits passing of
     TSK re-key without EAP re-authenticationPerfect Forward
+
     traffic originating from hosts other than the Initiator and
     Secrecy (PFS) is only possible if the negotiated EAP method
+
    Responder.  Similarly, in IEEE 802.16e, a Subscriber Station
     supports this.
+
     (SS) can forward traffic to the Base Station (BS), which
 +
    originates from the Local Area Network (LAN) to which it is
 +
     attachedTo enable this, Security Associations within IEEE
 +
     802.16e are identified by the Connection Identifier (CID), not
 +
     by the EAP peer and authenticator MAC addressesIn both IKEv2
 +
     and IEEE 802.16e, multiple security associations can exist
 +
    between the EAP peer and authenticator, each with their own
 +
     traffic profile and quality of service parameters.
  
IKEv2
+
(j) Direct operationSince the phase 2 Secure Association Protocol
    IKEv2, defined in [RFC4306], only uses the MSK for
+
     is concerned with the establishment of security associations
    authentication purposes and not key derivation. The EMSK, IV,
+
     between the EAP peer and authenticator, including the derivation
    Peer-Id, Server-Id or Session-Id are not usedAs a result, the
+
     of transient session keys, only those parties have "a need to
     TSKs derived by IKEv2 are cryptographically independent of the
+
     know" the transient session keysThe Secure Association
     EAP keying material and re-key of IPsec SAs can be handled
+
     Protocol MUST operate directly between the peer and
     without requiring EAP re-authentication.  Within IKEv2, it is
+
     authenticator and MUST NOT be passed-through to the backend
    possible to negotiate PFS, regardless of which EAP method is
+
     authentication server or include additional parties.
     negotiatedIKEv2 as specified in [RFC4306] does not cache EAP
 
     keying material or parameters; once IKEv2 authentication
 
     completes, it is assumed that EAP keying material and parameters
 
    are discarded.  The Session-Timeout Attribute is therefore
 
    interpreted as a limit on the VPN session time, rather than an
 
     indication of the MSK key lifetime.
 
  
IEEE 802.11
+
(k)  Bi-directional operation. While some ciphersuites only require
     IEEE 802.11 enables caching of the MSK, but not the EMSK, IV,
+
     a single set of transient session keys to protect traffic in
     Peer-Id, Server-Id, or Session-Id.  More details about the
+
     both directions, other ciphersuites require a unique set of
    structure of the cache are available in [IEEE-802.11].  In IEEE
 
  
 +
    transient session keys in each direction.  The phase 2 Secure
 +
    Association Protocol SHOULD provide for the derivation of
 +
    unicast and multicast keys in each direction, so as not to
 +
    require two separate phase 2 exchanges in order to create a
 +
    bi-directional phase 2 security association.  See [[RFC3748]]
 +
    Section 2.4 for more discussion.
  
 +
=== Key Scope ===
  
 +
Absent explicit specification within the lower layer, after the
 +
completion of phase 1b, transported keying material, and parameters
 +
are bound to the EAP peer and authenticator, but are not bound to a
 +
specific peer or authenticator port.
  
 +
While EAP keying material passed down to the lower layer is not
 +
intrinsically bound to particular authenticator and peer ports, TSKs
 +
MAY be bound to particular authenticator and peer ports by the Secure
 +
Association Protocol.  However, a lower layer MAY also permit TSKs to
 +
be used on multiple peer and/or authenticator ports, provided that
 +
TSK freshness is guaranteed (such as by keeping replay counter state
 +
within the authenticator).
  
    802.11, TSKs are derived from the MSK using a Secure Association
+
In order to further limit the key scope, the following measures are
    Protocol known as the 4-way handshake, which includes a nonce
+
suggested:
    exchange.  This guarantees TSK freshness even if the MSK is
 
    reused.  The 4-way handshake also enables TSK re-key without EAP
 
    re-authentication.  PFS is only possible within IEEE 802.11 if
 
    caching is not enabled and the negotiated EAP method supports
 
    PFS.
 
 
 
IEEE 802.16e
 
    IEEE 802.16e, defined in [IEEE-802.16e], supports caching of the
 
    MSK, but not the EMSK, IV, Peer-Id, Server-Id, or Session-Id.
 
    IEEE 802.16e supports a Secure Association Protocol in which
 
    TSKs are chosen by the authenticator without any contribution by
 
    the peer.  The TSKs are encrypted, authenticated, and integrity
 
    protected using the MSK and are transported from the
 
    authenticator to the peer.  TSK re-key is possible without EAP
 
    re-authentication.  PFS is not possible even if the negotiated
 
    EAP method supports it.
 
  
AAA
+
(a) The lower layer MAY specify additional restrictions on key
    Existing implementations and specifications for RADIUS/EAP
+
     usage, such as limiting the use of EAP keying material and
    [RFC3579] or Diameter EAP [RFC4072] do not support caching of
+
     parameters on the EAP peer to the port over which the EAP
    keying material or parameters. In existing AAA clients, proxy
+
     conversation was conducted.
     and server implementations, exported EAP keying material (MSK,
 
     EMSK, and IV), as well as parameters and derived keys are not
 
    cached and MUST be presumed lost after the AAA exchange
 
     completes.
 
  
     In order to avoid key reuse, the AAA layer MUST delete
+
(b)  The backend authentication server and authenticator MAY
     transported keys once they are sent.  The AAA layer MUST NOT
+
     implement additional attributes in order to further restrict the
    retain keys that it has previously sent.  For example, a AAA
+
     scope of keying material.  For example, in IEEE 802.11, the
     layer that has transported the MSK MUST delete it, and keys MUST
+
     backend authentication server can provide the authenticator with
     NOT be derived from the MSK from that point forward.
+
    a list of authorized Called or Calling-Station-Ids and/or SSIDs
 +
     for which keying material is valid.
  
=== Authenticator and Peer Architecture ===
+
(c)  Where the backend authentication server provides attributes
 +
    restricting the key scope, it is RECOMMENDED that restrictions
 +
    be securely communicated by the authenticator to the peer.  This
 +
    can be accomplished using the Secure Association Protocol, but
 +
    also can be accomplished via the EAP method or the lower layer.
  
This specification does not impose constraints on the architecture of
+
=== Parent-Child Relationships ===
the EAP authenticator or peer.  For example, any of the authenticator
 
architectures described in [RFC4118] can be used.  As a result, lower
 
layers need to identify EAP peers and authenticators unambiguously,
 
without incorporating implicit assumptions about peer and
 
authenticator architectures.
 
  
 +
When an EAP re-authentication takes place, new EAP keying material is
 +
exported by the EAP method.  In EAP lower layers where EAP
 +
re-authentication eventually results in TSK replacement, the maximum
  
 +
lifetime of derived keying material (including TSKs) can be less than
 +
or equal to that of EAP keying material (MSK/EMSK), but it cannot be
 +
greater.
  
 +
Where TSKs are derived from or are wrapped by exported EAP keying
 +
material, compromise of that exported EAP keying material implies
 +
compromise of TSKs.  Therefore, if EAP keying material is considered
 +
stale, not only SHOULD EAP re-authentication be initiated, but also
 +
replacement of child keys, including TSKs.
  
 +
Where EAP keying material is used only for entity authentication but
 +
not for TSK derivation (as in IKEv2), compromise of exported EAP
 +
keying material does not imply compromise of the TSKs.  Nevertheless,
 +
the compromise of EAP keying material could enable an attacker to
 +
impersonate an authenticator, so that EAP re-authentication and TSK
 +
re-key are RECOMMENDED.
  
 +
With respect to IKEv2, Section 5.2 of [[RFC4718]], "IKEv2
 +
Clarifications and Implementation Guidelines", states:
  
 +
  Rekeying the IKE_SA and reauthentication are different concepts in
 +
  IKEv2.  Rekeying the IKE_SA establishes new keys for the IKE_SA
 +
  and resets the Message ID counters, but it does not authenticate
 +
  the parties again (no AUTH or EAP payloads are involved)...  This
 +
  means that reauthentication also establishes new keys for the
 +
  IKE_SA and CHILD_SAs.  Therefore while rekeying can be performed
 +
  more often than reauthentication, the situation where
 +
  "authentication lifetime" is shorter than "key lifetime" does not
 +
  make sense.
  
 +
Child keys that are used frequently (such as TSKs that are used for
 +
traffic protection) can expire sooner than the exported EAP keying
 +
material on which they are dependent, so that it is advantageous to
 +
support re-key of child keys prior to EAP re-authentication.  Note
 +
that deletion of the MSK/EMSK does not necessarily imply deletion of
 +
TSKs or child keys.
  
 +
Failure to mutually prove possession of exported EAP keying material
 +
during the Secure Association Protocol exchange need not be grounds
 +
for deletion of keying material by both parties; rate-limiting Secure
 +
Association Protocol exchanges could be used to prevent a brute force
 +
attack.
  
 +
=== Local Key Lifetimes ===
  
 +
The Transient EAP Keys (TEKs) are session keys used to protect the
 +
EAP conversation.  The TEKs are internal to the EAP method and are
 +
not exported.  TEKs are typically created during an EAP conversation,
 +
used until the end of the conversation and then discarded.  However,
 +
methods can re-key TEKs during an EAP conversation.
  
For example, it is possible for multiple base stations and a
+
When using TEKs within an EAP conversation or across conversations,
"controller" (e.g., WLAN switch) to comprise a single EAP
+
it is necessary to ensure that replay protection and key separation
authenticator.  In such a situation, the "base station identity" is
+
requirements are fulfilled. For instance, if a replay counter is
irrelevant to the EAP method conversation, except perhaps as an
+
used, TEK re-key MUST occur prior to wrapping of the counter.
opaque blob to be used in channel bindingMany base stations can
+
Similarly, TSKs MUST remain cryptographically separate from TEKs
share the same authenticator identity. An EAP authenticator or peer:
+
despite TEK re-keying or cachingThis prevents TEK compromise from
 +
leading directly to compromise of the TSKs and vice versa.
  
  (a) can contain one or more physical or logical ports;
+
EAP methods MAY cache local EAP keying material (TEKs) that can
  (b) can advertise itself as one or more "virtual" authenticators
+
persist for multiple EAP conversations when fast reconnect is used
      or peers;
+
[[RFC3748]].  For example, EAP methods based on TLS (such as EAP-TLS
  (c) can utilize multiple CPUs;
+
[[RFC5216]]) derive and cache the TLS Master Secret, typically for
  (d) can support clustering services for load balancing or
+
substantial time periods.  The lifetime of other local EAP keying
      failover.
+
material calculated within the EAP method is defined by the method.
 +
Note that in general, when using fast reconnect, there is no
 +
guarantee that the original long-term credentials are still in the
 +
possession of the peer.  For instance, a smart-card holding the
 +
private key for EAP-TLS may have been removed.  EAP servers SHOULD
 +
also verify that the long-term credentials are still valid, such as
 +
by checking that certificate used in the original authentication has
 +
not yet expired.
  
Both the EAP peer and authenticator can have more than one physical
+
=== Exported and Calculated Key Lifetimes ===
or logical port.  A peer can simultaneously access the network via
 
multiple authenticators, or via multiple physical or logical ports on
 
a given authenticator.  Similarly, an authenticator can offer network
 
access to multiple peers, each via a separate physical or logical
 
port.  When a single physical authenticator advertises itself as
 
multiple virtual authenticators, it is possible for a single physical
 
port to belong to multiple virtual authenticators.
 
  
An authenticator can be configured to communicate with more than one
+
The following mechanisms are available for communicating the lifetime
EAP server, each of which is configured to communicate with a subset
+
of keying material between the EAP peer, server, and authenticator:
of the authenticators.  The situation is illustrated in Figure 3.
 
  
=== Authenticator Identification ===
+
  AAA protocols  (backend authentication server and authenticator)
 +
  Lower-layer mechanisms (authenticator and peer)
 +
  EAP method-specific negotiation (peer and server)
  
The EAP method conversation is between the EAP peer and server.  The
+
Where the EAP method does not support the negotiation of the lifetime
authenticator identity, if considered at all by the EAP method, is
+
of exported EAP keying material, and a key lifetime negotiation
treated as an opaque blob for the purpose of channel binding (see
+
mechanism is not provided by the lower layer, it is possible that
Section 5.3.3)However, the authenticator identity is important in
+
there will not be a way for the peer to learn the lifetime of keying
two other exchanges - the AAA protocol exchange and the Secure
+
material. This can leave the peer uncertain of how long the
Association Protocol conversation.
+
authenticator will maintain keying material within the key cacheIn
 +
this case the lifetime of keying material can be managed as a system
 +
parameter on the peer and authenticator; a default lifetime of 8
 +
hours is RECOMMENDED.
  
The AAA conversation is between the EAP authenticator and the backend
+
==== AAA Protocols ====
authentication server.  From the point of view of the backend
 
authentication server, keying material and parameters are transported
 
to the EAP authenticator identified by the NAS-Identifier Attribute.
 
Since an EAP authenticator MUST NOT share EAP keying material or
 
parameters with another party, if the EAP peer or backend
 
authentication server detects use of EAP keying material and
 
parameters outside the scope defined by the NAS-Identifier, the
 
keying material MUST be considered compromised.
 
  
 +
AAA protocols such as RADIUS [[RFC2865]] and Diameter [[RFC4072]] can be
 +
used to communicate the maximum key lifetime from the backend
 +
authentication server to the authenticator.
  
 +
The Session-Timeout Attribute is defined for RADIUS in [[RFC2865]] and
 +
for Diameter in [[RFC4005]].  Where EAP is used for authentication,
 +
[[RFC3580]] Section 3.17, indicates that a Session-Timeout Attribute
 +
sent in an Access-Accept along with a Termination-Action value of
 +
RADIUS-Request specifies the maximum number of seconds of service
 +
provided prior to EAP re-authentication.
  
 +
However, there is also a need to be able to specify the maximum
 +
lifetime of cached keying material.  Where EAP pre-authentication is
 +
supported, cached keying material can be pre-established on the
 +
authenticator prior to session start and will remain there until
 +
expiration.  EAP lower layers supporting caching of keying material
 +
MAY also persist that material after the end of a session, enabling
 +
the peer to subsequently resume communication utilizing the cached
 +
keying material.  In these situations it can be desirable for the
 +
backend authentication server to specify the maximum lifetime of
 +
cached keying material.
  
 +
To accomplish this, [IEEE-802.11] overloads the Session-Timeout
 +
Attribute, assuming that it represents the maximum time after which
 +
transported keying material will expire on the authenticator,
 +
regardless of whether transported keying material is cached.
  
 +
An IEEE 802.11 authenticator receiving transported keying material is
 +
expected to initialize a timer to the Session-Timeout value, and once
 +
the timer expires, the transported keying material expires.  Whether
 +
this results in session termination or EAP re-authentication is
 +
controlled by the value of the Termination-Action Attribute.  Where
 +
EAP re-authentication occurs, the transported keying material is
 +
replaced, and with it, new calculated keys are put in place.  Where
 +
session termination occurs, transported and derived keying material
 +
is deleted.
  
 +
Overloading the Session-Timeout Attribute is problematic in
 +
situations where it is necessary to control the maximum session time
 +
and key lifetime independently.  For example, it might be desirable
 +
to limit the lifetime of cached keying material to 5 minutes while
 +
permitting a user once authenticated to remain connected for up to an
 +
hour without re-authenticating.  As a result, in the future,
 +
additional attributes can be specified to control the lifetime of
 +
cached keys; these attributes MAY modify the meaning of the
 +
Session-Timeout Attribute in specific circumstances.
  
 +
Since the TSK lifetime is often determined by authenticator
 +
resources, and the backend authentication server has no insight into
 +
the TSK derivation process by the principle of ciphersuite
 +
independence, it is not appropriate for the backend authentication
 +
server to manage any aspect of the TSK derivation process, including
 +
the TSK lifetime.
  
The Secure Association Protocol conversation is between the peer and
+
==== Lower-Layer Mechanisms ====
the authenticator.  For lower layers that support key caching, it is
 
particularly important for the EAP peer, authenticator, and backend
 
server to have a consistent view of the usage scope of the
 
transported keying material.  In order to enable this, it is
 
RECOMMENDED that the Secure Association Protocol explicitly
 
communicate the usage scope of the EAP keying material passed down to
 
the lower layer, rather than implicitly assuming that this is defined
 
by the authenticator and peer endpoint addresses.
 
  
                  +-+-+-+-+
+
Lower-layer mechanisms can be used to enable the lifetime of keying
                  | EAP  |
+
material to be negotiated between the peer and authenticator. This
                  | Peer  |
+
can be accomplished either using the Secure Association Protocol or
                  +-+-+-+-+
+
within the lower-layer transport.
                    | | |  Peer Ports
 
                  /  |  \
 
                  /  |  \
 
                /    |    \
 
                /    |    \
 
              /      |      \
 
              /      |      \
 
            /        |        \
 
            /        |        \    Authenticator
 
        | | |      | | |      | | |  Ports
 
      +-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+
 
      |      |  |      |  |      |
 
      | Auth1 |  | Auth2 |  | Auth3 |
 
      |      |  |      |  |      |
 
      +-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+
 
            \        | \        |
 
            \      | \        |
 
              \      |  \      |
 
EAP over AAA  \    |    \      |
 
  (optional)    \    |    \    |
 
                \  |      \    |
 
                  \  |      \  |
 
                  \ |        \  |
 
                +-+-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+-+  Backend
 
                |  EAP    |  |  EAP    |  Authentication
 
                | Server1 |  | Server2 |  Servers
 
                +-+-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+-+
 
  
Figure 3: Relationship between EAP Peer, Authenticator, and Server
+
Where TSKs are established as the result of a Secure Association
 +
Protocol exchange, it is RECOMMENDED that the Secure Association
 +
Protocol include support for TSK re-key.  Where the TSK is taken
 +
directly from the MSK, there is no need to manage the TSK lifetime as
 +
a separate parameter, since the TSK lifetime and MSK lifetime are
 +
identical.
  
Since an authenticator can have multiple ports, the scope of the
+
==== EAP Method-Specific Negotiation ====
authenticator key cache cannot be described by a single endpoint
 
address.  Similarly, where a peer can have multiple ports and sharing
 
of EAP keying material and parameters between peer ports of the same
 
  
 +
As noted in [[RFC3748]] Section 7.10:
  
 +
  In order to provide keying material for use in a subsequently
 +
  negotiated ciphersuite, an EAP method supporting key derivation
 +
  MUST export a Master Session Key (MSK) of at least 64 octets, and
 +
  an Extended Master Session Key (EMSK) of at least 64 octets.  EAP
 +
  Methods deriving keys MUST provide for mutual authentication
 +
  between the EAP peer and the EAP Server.
  
 +
However, EAP does not itself support the negotiation of lifetimes for
 +
exported EAP keying material such as the MSK, EMSK, and IV.
  
 +
While EAP itself does not support lifetime negotiation, it would be
 +
possible to specify methods that do.  However, systems that rely on
 +
key lifetime negotiation within EAP methods would only function with
 +
these methods.  Also, there is no guarantee that the key lifetime
 +
negotiated within the EAP method would be compatible with backend
 +
authentication server policy.  In the interest of method independence
 +
and compatibility with backend authentication server implementations,
 +
management of the lifetime of keying material SHOULD NOT be provided
 +
within EAP methods.
  
link type is allowed, the extent of the peer key cache cannot be
+
=== Key Cache Synchronization ===
communicated by using a single endpoint address.  Instead, it is
 
RECOMMENDED that the EAP peer and authenticator consistently identify
 
themselves utilizing explicit identifiers, rather than endpoint
 
addresses or port identifiers.
 
  
AAA protocols such as RADIUS [RFC3579] and Diameter [RFC4072] provide
+
Key lifetime negotiation alone cannot guarantee key cache
a mechanism for the identification of AAA clients; since the EAP
+
synchronization.  Even where a lower-layer exchange is run
authenticator and AAA client MUST be co-resident, this mechanism is
+
immediately after EAP in order to determine the lifetime of keying
applicable to the identification of EAP authenticators.
+
material, it is still possible for the authenticator to purge all or
 +
part of the key cache prematurely (e.g., due to reboot or need to
 +
reclaim memory).
  
RADIUS [RFC2865] requires that an Access-Request packet contain one
+
The lower layer can utilize the Discovery phase 0 to improve key
or more of the NAS-Identifier, NAS-IP-Address, and NAS-IPv6-Address
+
cache synchronizationFor example, if the authenticator manages the
attributesSince a NAS can have more than one IP address, the
+
key cache by deleting the oldest key first, the relative creation
NAS-Identifier Attribute is RECOMMENDED for explicit identification
+
time of the last key to be deleted could be advertised within the
of the authenticator, both within the AAA protocol exchange and the
+
Discovery phase, enabling the peer to determine whether keying
Secure Association Protocol conversation.
+
material had been prematurely expired from the authenticator key
 +
cache.
  
Problems that can arise where the peer and authenticator implicitly
+
=== Key Strength ===
identify themselves using endpoint addresses include the following:
 
  
(a)  It is possible that the peer will not be able to determine which
+
As noted in Section 2.1, EAP lower layers determine TSKs in different
    authenticator ports are associated with which authenticators.
+
ways.  Where exported EAP keying material is utilized in the
    As a result, the EAP peer will be unable to utilize the
+
derivation, encryption or authentication of TSKs, it is possible for
    authenticator key cache in an efficient way, and will also be
+
EAP key generation to represent the weakest link.
    unable to determine whether EAP keying material has been shared
 
    outside its authorized scope, and therefore needs to be
 
    considered compromised.
 
  
(b)  It is possible that the authenticator will not be able to
+
In order to ensure that methods produce EAP keying material of an
    determine which peer ports are associated with which peers,
+
appropriate symmetric key strength, it is RECOMMENDED that EAP
    preventing the peer from communicating with it utilizing
+
methods utilizing public key cryptography choose a public key that
    multiple peer ports.
+
has a cryptographic strength providing the required level of attack
 +
resistance.  This is typically provided by configuring EAP methods,
 +
since there is no coordination between the lower layer and EAP method
 +
with respect to minimum required symmetric key strength.
  
(c)  It is possible that the peer will not be able to determine with
+
Section 5 of [[BCP86|BCP 86]] [[RFC3766]] offers advice on the required RSA or DH
    which virtual authenticator it is communicating.  For example,
+
module and DSA subgroup size in bits, for a given level of attack
    multiple virtual authenticators can share a MAC address, but
+
resistance in bits. The National Institute for Standards and
    utilize different NAS-Identifiers.
+
Technology (NIST) also offers advice on appropriate key sizes in
 
+
[SP800-57].
(d) It is possible that the authenticator will not be able to
 
    determine with which virtual peer it is communicating.  Multiple
 
    virtual peers can share a MAC address, but utilize different
 
    Peer-Ids.
 
 
 
(e)  It is possible that the EAP peer and server will not be able to
 
    verify the authenticator identity via channel binding.
 
  
 +
=== Key Wrap ===
  
 +
The key wrap specified in [[RFC2548]], which is based on an MD5-based
 +
stream cipher, has known problems, as described in [[RFC3579]] Section
 +
4.3.  RADIUS uses the shared secret for multiple purposes, including
 +
per-packet authentication and attribute hiding, considerable
 +
information is exposed about the shared secret with each packet.
 +
This exposes the shared secret to dictionary attacks.  MD5 is used
 +
both to compute the RADIUS Response Authenticator and the
 +
Message-Authenticator Attribute, and concerns exist relating to the
 +
security of this hash [MD5Collision].
  
 +
As discussed in [[RFC3579]] Section 4.3, the security vulnerabilities
 +
of RADIUS are extensive, and therefore development of an alternative
 +
key wrap technique based on the RADIUS shared secret would not
 +
substantially improve security.  As a result, [[RFC3579]] Section 4.2
 +
recommends running RADIUS over IPsec.  The same approach is taken in
 +
Diameter EAP [[RFC4072]], which in Section 4.1.3 defines the
 +
EAP-Master-Session-Key Attribute-Value Pair (AVP) in clear-text, to
 +
be protected by IPsec or TLS.
  
 +
== Handoff Vulnerabilities ==
  
 +
A handoff occurs when an EAP peer moves to a new authenticator.
 +
Several mechanisms have been proposed for reducing handoff latency
 +
within networks utilizing EAP.  These include:
  
 +
EAP pre-authentication
 +
  In EAP pre-authentication, an EAP peer pre-establishes EAP keying
 +
  material with an authenticator prior to arrival.  EAP
 +
  pre-authentication only affects the timing of EAP authentication,
 +
  but does not shorten or eliminate EAP (phase 1a) or AAA (phase 1b)
 +
  exchanges;  Discovery (phase 0) and Secure Association Protocol
 +
  (phase 2) exchanges occur as described in Section 1.3.  As a
 +
  result, the primary benefit is to enable EAP authentication to be
 +
  removed from the handoff critical path, thereby reducing latency.
 +
  Use of EAP pre-authentication within IEEE 802.11 is described in
 +
  [IEEE-802.11] and [8021XPreAuth].
  
For example, problems (a), (c), and (e) occur in [IEEE-802.11], which
+
Proactive key distribution
utilizes peer and authenticator MAC addresses within the 4-way
+
  In proactive key distribution, keying material and authorizations
handshake.  Problems (b) and (d) do not occur since [IEEE-802.11]
+
  are transported from the backend authentication server to a
only allows a virtual peer to utilize a single port.
+
  candidate authenticator in advance of a handoff.  As a result, EAP
 +
  (phase 1a) is not needed, but the Discovery (phase 0), and Secure
 +
  Association Protocol exchanges (phase 2) are still necessary.
 +
  Within the AAA exchange (phase 1b), authorization and key
 +
  distribution functions are typically supported, but not
 +
  authentication.  Proactive key distribution is described in
 +
  [MishraPro], [IEEE-03-084], and [HANDOFF].
  
The following steps enable lower-layer identities to be securely
+
Key caching
verified by all parties:
+
  Caching of EAP keying material enables an EAP peer to re-attach to
 +
  an authenticator without requiring EAP (phase 1a) or AAA (phase
 +
  1b) exchanges.  However, Discovery (phase 0) and Secure
 +
  Association Protocol (phase 2) exchanges are still needed.  Use of
 +
  key caching within IEEE 802.11 is described in [IEEE-802.11].
  
(fSpecify the lower-layer parameters used to identify the
+
Context transfer
    authenticator and peer.  As noted earlier, endpoint or port
+
  In context transfer schemes, keying material and authorizations
    identifiers are not recommended for identification of the
+
  are transferred between a previous authenticator and a new
    authenticator or peer when it is possible for them to have
+
  authenticator.  This can occur in response to a handoff request by
    multiple ports.
+
  the EAP peer, or in advance, as in proactive key distribution.  As
 +
  a result, EAP (phase 1a) is eliminated, but not the Discovery
 +
  (phase 0) or Secure Association Protocol exchanges (phase 2). If
 +
  a secure channel can be established between the new and previous
 +
  authenticator without assistance from the backend authentication
 +
  server, then the AAA exchange (phase 1b) can be eliminated;
 +
  otherwise, it is still needed, although it can be shortened.
 +
  Context transfer protocols are described in [IEEE-802.11F] (now
 +
  deprecated) and "Context Transfer Protocol (CXTP)" [[RFC4067]].
 +
  "Fast Authentication Methods for Handovers between IEEE 802.11
 +
  Wireless LANs" [Bargh] analyzes fast handoff techniques, including
 +
  context transfer mechanisms.
 +
 
 +
Token distribution
 +
  In token distribution schemes, the EAP peer is provided with a
 +
  credential, subsequently enabling it to authenticate with one or
 +
  more additional authenticatorsDuring the subsequent
 +
  authentications, EAP (phase 1a) is eliminated or shortened; the
 +
  Discovery (phase 0) and Secure Association Protocol exchanges
 +
  (phase 2) still occur, although the latter can be shortened.  If
 +
  the token includes authorizations and can be validated by an
 +
  authenticator without assistance from the backend authentication
 +
  server, then the AAA exchange (phase 1b) can be eliminated;
 +
  otherwise, it is still needed, although it can be shortened.
 +
  Token-based schemes, initially proposed in early versions of IEEE
 +
  802.11i [IEEE-802.11i], are described in [Token], [Tokenk], and
 +
  [SHORT-TERM].
  
(g)  Communicate the lower-layer identities between the peer and
+
The sections that follow discuss the security vulnerabilities
    authenticator within phase 0.  This allows the peer and
+
introduced by the above schemes.
    authenticator to determine the key scope if a key cache is
 
    utilized.
 
 
 
(h)  Communicate the lower-layer authenticator identity between the
 
    authenticator and backend authentication server within the NAS-
 
    Identifier Attribute.
 
 
 
(i)  Include the lower-layer identities within channel bindings (if
 
    supported) in phase 1a, ensuring that they are communicated
 
    between the EAP peer and server.
 
 
 
(j)  Support the integrity-protected exchange of identities within
 
    phase 2a.
 
 
 
(k)  Utilize the advertised lower-layer identities to enable the peer
 
    and authenticator to verify that keys are maintained within the
 
    advertised scope.
 
 
 
==== Virtual Authenticators ====
 
 
 
When a single physical authenticator advertises itself as multiple
 
virtual authenticators, if the virtual authenticators do not maintain
 
logically separate key caches, then by authenticating to one virtual
 
authenticator, the peer can gain access to the other virtual
 
authenticators sharing a key cache.
 
  
 +
=== EAP Pre-Authentication ===
  
 +
EAP pre-authentication differs from a normal EAP conversation
 +
primarily with respect to the lower-layer encapsulation.  For
 +
example, in [IEEE-802.11], EAP pre-authentication frames utilize a
 +
distinct Ethertype, but otherwise conforms to the encapsulation
 +
described in [IEEE-802.1X].  As a result, an EAP pre-authentication
 +
conversation differs little from the model described in Section 1.3,
 +
other than the introduction of a delay between phase 1 and phase 2.
  
 +
EAP pre-authentication relies on lower-layer mechanisms for discovery
 +
of candidate authenticators.  Where discovery can provide information
 +
on candidate authenticators outside the immediate listening range,
 +
and the peer can determine whether it already possesses valid EAP
 +
keying material with candidate authenticators, the peer can avoid
 +
unnecessary EAP pre-authentications and can establish EAP keying
 +
material well in advance, regardless of the coverage overlap between
 +
authenticators.  However, if the peer can only discover candidate
 +
authenticators within listening range and cannot determine whether it
 +
can reuse existing EAP keying material, then it is possible that the
 +
peer will not be able to complete EAP pre-authentication prior to
 +
connectivity loss or that it can pre-authenticate multiple times with
 +
the same authenticator, increasing backend authentication server
 +
load.
  
 +
Since a peer can complete EAP pre-authentication with an
 +
authenticator without eventually attaching to it, it is possible that
 +
phase 2 will not occur.  In this case, an Accounting-Request
 +
signifying the start of service will not be sent, or will only be
 +
sent with a substantial delay after the completion of authentication.
  
 +
As noted in "IEEE 802.1X RADIUS Usage Guidelines" [[RFC3580]], the AAA
 +
exchange resulting from EAP pre-authentication differs little from an
 +
ordinary exchange described in "RADIUS Support for EAP" [[RFC3579]].
 +
For example, since in IEEE 802.11 [IEEE-802.11] an Association
 +
exchange does not occur prior to EAP pre-authentication, the SSID is
 +
not known by the authenticator at authentication time, so that an
 +
Access-Request cannot include the SSID within the Called-Station-Id
 +
attribute as described in [[RFC3580]] Section 3.20.
  
 +
Since only the absence of an SSID in the Called-Station-Id attribute
 +
distinguishes an EAP pre-authentication attempt, if the authenticator
 +
does not always include the SSID for a normal EAP authentication
 +
attempt, it is possible that the backend authentication server will
 +
not be able to determine whether a session constitutes an EAP
 +
pre-authentication attempt, potentially resulting in authorization or
 +
accounting problems.  Where the number of simultaneous sessions is
 +
limited, the backend authentication server can refuse to authorize a
 +
valid EAP pre-authentication attempt or can enable the peer to engage
 +
in more simultaneous sessions than they are authorized for.  Where
 +
EAP pre-authentication occurs with an authenticator which the peer
 +
never attaches to, it is possible that the backend accounting server
 +
will not be able to determine whether the absence of an
 +
Accounting-Request was due to packet loss or a session that never
 +
started.
  
 +
In order to enable pre-authentication requests to be handled more
 +
reliably, it is RECOMMENDED that AAA protocols explicitly identify
 +
EAP pre-authentication.  In order to suppress unnecessary EAP
 +
pre-authentication exchanges, it is RECOMMENDED that authenticators
 +
unambiguously identify themselves as described in Section 2.3.
  
 +
=== Proactive Key Distribution ===
  
 +
In proactive key distribution schemes, the backend authentication
 +
server transports keying material and authorizations to an
 +
authenticator in advance of the arrival of the peer.  The
 +
authenticators selected to receive the transported key material are
 +
selected based on past patterns of peer movement between
 +
authenticators known as the "neighbor graph".  In order to reduce
 +
handoff latency, proactive key distribution schemes typically only
 +
demonstrate proof of possession of transported keying material
 +
between the EAP peer and authenticator.  During a handoff, the
 +
backend authentication server is not provided with proof that the
 +
peer successfully authenticated to an authenticator; instead, the
 +
authenticator generates a stream of accounting messages without a
 +
corresponding set of authentication exchanges.  As described in
 +
[MishraPro], knowledge of the neighbor graph can be established via
 +
static configuration or analysis of authentication exchanges.  In
  
 +
order to prevent corruption of the neighbor graph, new neighbor graph
 +
entries can only be created as the result of a successful EAP
 +
exchange, and accounting packets with no corresponding authentication
 +
exchange need to be verified to correspond to neighbor graph entries
 +
(e.g., corresponding to handoffs between neighbors).
  
 +
In order to prevent compromise of one authenticator from resulting in
 +
compromise of other authenticators, cryptographic separation needs to
 +
be maintained between the keying material transported to each
 +
authenticator.  However, even where cryptographic separation is
 +
maintained, an attacker compromising an authenticator can still
 +
disrupt the operation of other authenticators.  As noted in [[RFC3579]]
 +
Section 4.3.7, in the absence of spoofing detection within the AAA
 +
infrastructure, it is possible for EAP authenticators to impersonate
 +
each other.  By forging NAS identification attributes within
 +
authentication messages, an attacker compromising one authenticator
 +
could corrupt the neighbor graph, tricking the backend authentication
 +
server into transporting keying material to arbitrary authenticators.
 +
While this would not enable recovery of EAP keying material without
 +
breaking fundamental cryptographic assumptions, it could enable
 +
subsequent fraudulent accounting messages, or allow an attacker to
 +
disrupt service by increasing load on the backend authentication
 +
server or thrashing the authenticator key cache.
  
For example, where a physical authenticator implements "Guest" and
+
Since proactive key distribution requires the distribution of derived
"Corporate Intranet" virtual authenticators, an attacker acting as a
+
keying material to candidate authenticators, the effectiveness of
peer could authenticate with the "Guest" virtual authenticator and
+
this scheme depends on the ability of backend authentication server
derive EAP keying materialIf the "Guest" and "Corporate Intranet"
+
to anticipate the movement of the EAP peerSince proactive key
virtual authenticators share a key cache, then the peer can utilize
+
distribution relies on backend authentication server knowledge of the
the EAP keying material derived for the "Guest" network to obtain
+
neighbor graph, it is most applicable to intra-domain handoff
access to the "Corporate Intranet" network.
+
scenarios.  However, in inter-domain handoff, where there can be many
 +
authenticators, peers can frequently connect to authenticators that
 +
have not been previously encountered, making it difficult for the
 +
backend authentication server to derive a complete neighbor graph.
  
The following steps can be taken to mitigate this vulnerability:
+
Since proactive key distribution schemes typically require
 +
introduction of server-initiated messages as described in [[RFC5176]]
 +
and [HANDOFF], security issues described in [[RFC5176]] Section 6 are
 +
applicable, including authorization (Section 6.1) and replay
 +
detection (Section 6.3) problems.
  
(a)  Authenticators are REQUIRED to cache associated authorizations
+
=== AAA Bypass ===
    along with EAP keying material and parameters and to apply
 
    authorizations to the peer on each network access, regardless of
 
    which virtual authenticator is being accessed.  This ensures
 
    that an attacker cannot obtain elevated privileges even where
 
    the key cache is shared between virtual authenticators, and a
 
    peer obtains access to one virtual authenticator utilizing a key
 
    cache entry created for use with another virtual authenticator.
 
  
(b) It is RECOMMENDED that physical authenticators maintain separate
+
Fast handoff techniques that enable elimination of the AAA exchange
    key caches for each virtual authenticator. This ensures that a
+
(phase 1b) differ fundamentally from typical network access scenarios
    cache entry created for use with one virtual authenticator
+
(dial-up, wired LAN, etc.) that include user authentication as well
    cannot be used for access to another virtual authenticator.
+
as authorization for the offered service. Where the AAA exchange
    Since a key cache entry can no longer be shared between virtual
+
(phase 1b) is omitted, authorizations and keying material are not
    authentications, this step provides protection beyond that
+
provided by the backend authentication server, and as a result, they
    offered in (a).  This is valuable in situations where
+
need to be supplied by other means.  This section describes some of
    authorizations are not used to enforce access limitations.  For
+
the implications.
    example, where access is limited using a filter installed on a
 
    router rather than using authorizations provided to the
 
    authenticator, a peer can gain unauthorized access to resources
 
    by exploiting a shared key cache entry.
 
  
(c)  It is RECOMMENDED that each virtual authenticator identify
+
==== Key Transport ====
    itself consistently to the peer and to the backend
 
    authentication server, so as to enable the peer to verify the
 
    authenticator identity via channel binding (see Section 5.3.3).
 
  
(d)  It is RECOMMENDED that each virtual authenticator identify
+
Where transported keying material is not supplied by the backend
    itself distinctly, in order to enable the peer and backend
+
authentication server, it needs to be provided by another party
    authentication server to tell them apart.  For example, this can
+
authorized to access that keying material.  As noted in Section 1.5,
    be accomplished by utilizing a distinct value of the NAS-
+
only the EAP peer, authenticator, and server are authorized to
    Identifier Attribute.
+
possess transported keying material.  Since EAP peers do not trust
 +
each other, if the backend authentication server does not supply
 +
transported keying material to a new authenticator, it can only be
 +
provided by a previous authenticator.
  
=== Peer Identification ===
+
As noted in Section 1.5, the goal of the EAP conversation is to
 +
derive session keys known only to the peer and the authenticator.  If
 +
keying material is replicated between a previous authenticator and a
 +
new authenticator, then the previous authenticator can possess
 +
session keys used between the peer and new authenticator.  Also, the
 +
new authenticator can possess session keys used between the peer and
 +
the previous authenticator.
  
As described in [RFC3748] Section 7.3, the peer identity provided in
+
If a one-way function is used to derive the keying material to be
the EAP-Response/Identity can be different from the peer identities
+
transported to the new authenticator, then the new authenticator
authenticated by the EAP method. For example, the identity provided
+
cannot possess previous session keys without breaking a fundamental
 +
cryptographic assumption.
  
 +
==== Authorization ====
  
 +
As a part of the authentication process, the backend authentication
 +
server determines the user's authorization profile and transmits the
 +
authorizations to the authenticator along with the transported keying
 +
material.  Typically, the profile is determined based on the user
 +
identity, but a certificate presented by the user can also provide
 +
authorization information.
  
 +
The backend authentication server is responsible for making a user
 +
authorization decision, which requires answering the following
 +
questions:
  
 +
(a)  Is this a legitimate user of this network?
  
in the EAP-Response/Identity can be a privacy identifier as described
+
(b)  Is the user allowed to access this network?
in "The Network Access Identifier" [RFC4282] Section 2.  As noted in
+
 
[RFC4284], it is also possible to utilize a Network Access Identifier
+
(c) Is the user permitted to access this network on this day and at
(NAI) for the purposes of source routing; an NAI utilized for source
+
    this time?
routing is said to be "decorated" as described in [RFC4282] Section
 
2.7.
 
  
When the EAP peer provides the Network Access Identity (NAI) within
+
(dIs the user within the concurrent session limit?
the EAP-Response/Identity, as described in [RFC3579], the
 
authenticator copies the NAI included in the EAP-Response/Identity
 
into the User-Name Attribute included within the Access-Request. As
 
the Access-Request is forwarded toward the backend authentication
 
server, AAA proxies remove decoration from the NAI included in the
 
User-Name Attribute; the NAI included within the
 
EAP-Response/Identity encapsulated in the Access-Request remains
 
unchanged.  As a result, when the Access-Request arrives at the
 
backend authentication server, the EAP-Response/Identity can differ
 
from the User-Name Attribute (which can have some or all of the
 
decoration removed).  In the absence of a Peer-Id, the backend
 
authentication server SHOULD use the contents of the User-Name
 
Attribute, rather than the EAP-Response/Identity, as the peer
 
identity.
 
  
It is possible for more than one Peer-Id to be exported by an EAP
+
(eAre there any fraud, credit limit, or other concerns that could
method.  For example, a peer certificate can contain more than one
+
    lead to access denial?
peer identity; in a tunnel method, peer identities can be
 
authenticated within both an outer and inner exchange, and these
 
identities could be different in type and contents.  For example, an
 
outer exchange could provide a Peer-Id in the form of a Relative
 
Distinguished Name (RDN), whereas an inner exchange could identify
 
the peer via its NAI or MAC address. Where EAP keying material is
 
determined solely from the outer exchange, only the outer Peer-Id(s)
 
are exported; where the EAP keying material is determined from both
 
the inner and outer exchanges, then both the inner and outer
 
Peer-Id(s) are exported by the tunnel method.
 
  
 +
(f)  If access is to be granted, what are the service parameters
 +
    (mandatory tunneling, bandwidth, filters, and so on) to be
 +
    provisioned for the user?
  
 +
While the authorization decision is, in principle, simple, the
 +
distributed decision making process can add complexity.  Where
 +
brokers or proxies are involved, all of the AAA entities in the chain
 +
from the authenticator to the home backend authentication server are
 +
involved in the decision.  For example, a broker can deny access even
 +
if the home backend authentication server would allow it, or a proxy
 +
can add authorizations (e.g., bandwidth limits).
  
 +
Decisions can be based on static policy definitions and profiles as
 +
well as dynamic state (e.g., time of day or concurrent session
 +
limits).  In addition to the Accept/Reject decisions made by AAA
 +
entities, service parameters or constraints can be communicated to
 +
the authenticator.
  
 +
The criteria for Accept/Reject decisions or the reasons for choosing
 +
particular authorizations are typically not communicated to the
 +
authenticator, only the final result is.  As a result, the
 +
authenticator has no way to know on what the decision was based.  Was
 +
a set of authorization parameters sent because this service is always
 +
provided to the user, or was the decision based on the time of day
 +
and the capabilities of the authenticator?
  
 +
==== Correctness ====
  
 +
When the AAA exchange (phase 1b) is bypassed, several challenges
 +
arise in ensuring correct authorization:
  
 +
Theft of service
 +
  Bypassing the AAA exchange (phase 1b) SHOULD NOT enable a user to
 +
  extend their network access or gain access to services they are
 +
  not entitled to.
  
 +
Consideration of network-wide state
 +
  Handoff techniques SHOULD NOT render the backend authentication
 +
  server incapable of keeping track of network-wide state.  For
 +
  example, a backend authentication server can need to keep track of
 +
  simultaneous user sessions.
  
 +
Elevation of privilege
 +
  Backend authentication servers often perform conditional
 +
  evaluation, in which the authorizations returned in an
 +
  Access-Accept message are contingent on the authenticator or on
 +
  dynamic state such as the time of day.  In this situation,
 +
  bypassing the AAA exchange could enable unauthorized access unless
 +
  the restrictions are explicitly encoded within the authorizations
 +
  provided by the backend authentication server.
  
 +
A handoff mechanism that provides proper authorization is said to be
 +
"correct".  One condition for correctness is as follows:
  
 +
  For a handoff to be "correct" it MUST establish on the new
 +
  authenticator the same authorizations as would have been created
 +
  had the new authenticator completed a AAA conversation with the
 +
  backend authentication server.
  
 +
A properly designed handoff scheme will only succeed if it is
 +
"correct" in this way.  If a successful handoff would establish
 +
"incorrect" authorizations, it is preferable for it to fail.  Where
 +
the supported services differ between authenticators, a handoff that
 +
bypasses the backend authentication server is likely to fail.
 +
Section 1.1 of [[RFC2865]] states:
  
 +
  A authenticator that does not implement a given service MUST NOT
 +
  implement the RADIUS attributes for that service.  For example, a
 +
  authenticator that is unable to offer ARAP service MUST NOT
 +
  implement the RADIUS attributes for ARAP.  A authenticator MUST
 +
  treat a RADIUS access-accept authorizing an unavailable service as
 +
  an access-reject instead.
  
 +
This behavior applies to attributes that are known, but not
 +
implemented.  For attributes that are unknown, Section 5 of [[RFC2865]]
 +
states:
  
 +
  A RADIUS server MAY ignore Attributes with an unknown Type.  A
 +
  RADIUS client MAY ignore Attributes with an unknown Type.
  
 +
In order to perform a correct handoff, if a new authenticator is
 +
provided with RADIUS authorizations for a known but unavailable
 +
service, then it MUST process these authorizations the same way it
 +
would handle a RADIUS Access-Accept requesting an unavailable
  
 +
service;  this MUST cause the handoff to fail.  However, if a new
 +
authenticator is provided with authorizations including unknown
 +
attributes, then these attributes MAY be ignored.  The definition of
 +
a "known but unsupported service" MUST encompass requests for
 +
unavailable security services.  This includes vendor-specific
 +
attributes related to security, such as those described in [[RFC2548]].
 +
Although it can seem somewhat counter-intuitive, failure is indeed
 +
the "correct" result where a known but unsupported service is
 +
requested.
  
=== Server Identification ===
+
Presumably, a correctly configured backend authentication server
 +
would not request that an authenticator provide a service that it
 +
does not implement.  This implies that if the new authenticator were
 +
to complete a AAA conversation, it would be likely to receive
 +
different service instructions.  Failure of the handoff is the
 +
desired result since it will cause the new authenticator to go back
 +
to the backend server in order to receive the appropriate service
 +
definition.
  
It is possible for more than one Server-Id to be exported by an EAP
+
Handoff mechanisms that bypass the backend authentication server are
methodFor example, a server certificate can contain more than one
+
most likely to be successful when employed in a homogeneous
server identity; in a tunnel method, server identities could be
+
deployment within a single administrative domainIn a heterogeneous
authenticated within both an outer and inner exchange, and these
+
deployment, the backend authentication server can return different
identities could be different in type and contents. For example, an
+
authorizations depending on the authenticator making the request in
outer exchange could provide a Server-Id in the form of an IP
+
order to make sure that the requested service is consistent with the
address, whereas an inner exchange could identify the server via its
+
authenticator capabilities.  Where a backend authentication server
Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) or hostname. Where EAP keying
+
would send different authorizations to the new authenticator than
material is determined solely from the outer exchange, only the outer
+
were sent to a previous authenticator, transferring authorizations
Server-Id(s) are exported by the EAP method; where the EAP keying
+
between the previous authenticator and the new authenticator will
material is determined from both the inner and outer exchanges, then
+
result in incorrect authorization.
both the inner and outer Server-Id(s) are exported by the EAP method.
+
 
 +
Virtual LAN (VLAN) support is defined in [IEEE-802.1Q]; RADIUS
 +
support for dynamic VLANs is described in [[RFC3580]] and [[RFC4675]].
 +
If some authenticators support dynamic VLANs while others do not,
 +
then attributes present in the Access-Request (such as the
 +
NAS-Port-Type, NAS-IP-Address, NAS-IPv6-Address, and NAS-Identifier)
 +
could be examined by the backend authentication server to determine
 +
when VLAN attributes will be returned, and if so, which ones.
 +
However, if the backend authenticator is bypassed, then a handoff
 +
occurring between authenticators supporting different VLAN
 +
capabilities could result in a user obtaining access to an
 +
unauthorized VLAN (e.g., a user with access to a guest VLAN being
 +
given unrestricted access to the network).
  
As shown in Figure 3, an authenticator can be configured to
+
Similarly, it is preferable for a handoff between an authenticator
communicate with multiple EAP servers; the EAP server that an
+
providing confidentiality and another that does not to fail, since if
authenticator communicates with can vary according to configuration
+
the handoff were successful, the user would be moved from a secure to
and network and server availability.  While the EAP peer can assume
+
an insecure channel without permission from the backend
that all EAP servers within a realm have access to the credentials
+
authentication server.
necessary to validate an authentication attempt, it cannot assume
 
that all EAP servers share persistent state.
 
  
Authenticators can be configured with different primary or secondary
+
== Security Considerations ==
EAP servers, in order to balance the load.  Also, the authenticator
 
can dynamically determine the EAP server to which requests will be
 
sent; in the event of a communication failure, the authenticator can
 
fail over to another EAP server.  For example, in Figure 3,
 
Authenticator2 can be initially configured with EAP server1 as its
 
primary backend authentication server, and EAP server2 as the backup,
 
but if EAP server1 becomes unavailable, EAP server2 can become the
 
primary server.
 
  
In general, the EAP peer cannot direct an authentication attempt to a
+
The EAP threat model is described in [[RFC3748]] Section 7.1.  The
particular EAP server within a realm, this decision is made by AAA
+
security properties of EAP methods (known as "security claims") are
clients, nor can the peer determine with which EAP server it will be
+
described in [[RFC3748]] Section 7.2.1.  EAP method requirements for
communicating, prior to the start of the EAP method conversation.
+
applications such as Wireless LAN authentication are described in
The Server-Id is not included in the EAP-Request/Identity, and since
+
[[RFC4017]]. The RADIUS threat model is described in [[RFC3579]] Section
the EAP server may be determined dynamically, it typically is not
+
4.1, and responses to these threats are described in [[RFC3579]],
possible for the authenticator to advertise the Server-Id during the
+
Sections 4.2 and 4.3.
discovery phase. Some EAP methods do not export the Server-Id so
 
that it is possible that the EAP peer will not learn with which
 
server it was conversing after the EAP conversation completes
 
successfully.
 
  
As a result, an EAP peer, on connecting to a new authenticator or
+
However, in addition to threats against EAP and AAA, there are other
reconnecting to the same authenticator, can find itself communicating
+
system level threats.  In developing the threat model, it is assumed
with a different EAP server.  Fast reconnect, defined in [RFC3748]
+
that:
  
 +
  All traffic is visible to the attacker.
 +
  The attacker can alter, forge, or replay messages.
 +
  The attacker can reroute messages to another principal.
 +
  The attacker can be a principal or an outsider.
 +
  The attacker can compromise any key that is sufficiently old.
  
 +
Threats arising from these assumptions include:
  
 +
(a)  An attacker can compromise or steal an EAP peer or
 +
    authenticator, in an attempt to gain access to other EAP peers
 +
    or authenticators or to obtain long-term secrets.
  
 +
(b)  An attacker can attempt a downgrade attack in order to exploit
 +
    known weaknesses in an authentication method or cryptographic
 +
    algorithm.
  
Section 7.2, can fail if the EAP server with which the peer
+
(c) An attacker can try to modify or spoof packets, including
communicates is not the same one with which it initially established
+
    Discovery or Secure Association Protocol frames, EAP or AAA
a security association. For example, an EAP peer attempting an
+
    packets.
EAP-TLS session resume can find that the new EAP-TLS server will not
 
have access to the TLS Master Key identified by the TLS Session-Id,
 
and therefore the session resumption attempt will fail, requiring
 
completion of a full EAP-TLS exchange.
 
  
EAP methods that export the Server-Id MUST authenticate the server.
+
(d)  An attacker can attempt to induce an EAP peer, authenticator, or
However, not all EAP methods supporting mutual authentication provide
+
    server to disclose keying material to an unauthorized party, or
a non-null Server-Id; some methods only enable the EAP peer to verify
+
    utilize keying material outside the context that it was intended
that the EAP server possesses a long-term secret, but do not provide
+
    for.
the identity of the EAP server.  In this case, the EAP peer will know
+
 
that an authenticator has been authorized by an EAP server, but will
+
(e)  An attacker can alter, forge, or replay packets.
not confirm the identity of the EAP server.  Where the EAP method
 
does not provide a Server-Id, the peer cannot identify the EAP server
 
with which it generated keying material.  This can make it difficult
 
for the EAP peer to identify the location of a key possessed by that
 
EAP server.
 
  
As noted in [RFC5216] Section 5.2, EAP methods supporting
+
(f)  An attacker can cause an EAP peer, authenticator, or server to
authentication using server certificates can determine the Server-Id
+
    reuse a stale key. Use of stale keys can also occur
from the subject or subjectAltName fields in the server certificate.
+
    unintentionallyFor example, a poorly implemented backend
Validating the EAP server identity can help the EAP peer to decide
+
    authentication server can provide stale keying material to an
whether a specific EAP server is authorizedIn some cases, such as
+
    authenticator, or a poorly implemented authenticator can reuse
where the certificate extensions defined in [RFC4334] are included in
+
    nonces.
the server certificate, it can even be possible for the peer to
 
verify some channel binding parameters from the server certificate.
 
  
It is possible for problems to arise in situations where the EAP
+
(gAn authenticated attacker can attempt to obtain elevated
server identifies itself differently to the EAP peer and
+
    privilege in order to access information that it does not have
authenticator.  For example, it is possible that the Server-Id
+
    rights to.
exported by EAP methods will not be identical to the Fully Qualified
 
Domain Name (FQDN) of the backend authentication server. Where
 
certificate-based authentication is used within RADIUS or Diameter,
 
it is possible that the subjectAltName used in the backend
 
authentication server certificate will not be identical to the
 
Server-Id or backend authentication server FQDN.  This is not
 
normally an issue in EAP, as the authenticator will be unaware of the
 
identities used between the EAP peer and server.  However, this can
 
be an issue for key caching, if the authenticator is expected to
 
locate a backend authentication server corresponding to a Server-Id
 
provided by an EAP peer.
 
  
Where the backend authentication server FQDN differs from the
+
(h)  An attacker can attempt a man-in-the-middle attack in order to
subjectAltName in the backend authentication server certificate, it
+
    gain access to the network.
is possible that the AAA client will not be able to determine whether
 
it is talking to the correct backend authentication server. Where
 
  
 +
(i)  An attacker can compromise an EAP authenticator in an effort to
 +
    commit fraud.  For example, a compromised authenticator can
 +
    provide incorrect information to the EAP peer and/or server via
 +
    out-of-band mechanisms (such as via a AAA or lower-layer
 +
    protocol).  This includes impersonating another authenticator,
 +
    or providing inconsistent information to the peer and EAP
 +
    server.
  
 +
(j)  An attacker can launch a denial-of-service attack against the
 +
    EAP peer, authenticator, or backend authentication server.
  
 +
In order to address these threats, [[RFC4962]] Section 3 describes
 +
required and recommended security properties.  The sections that
 +
follow analyze the compliance of EAP methods, AAA protocols, and
 +
Secure Association Protocols with those guidelines.
  
 +
=== Peer and Authenticator Compromise ===
  
the Server-Id and backend authentication server FQDN differ, it is
+
Requirement: In the event that an authenticator is compromised or
possible that the combination of the key scope (Peer-Id(s), Server-
+
stolen, an attacker can gain access to the network through that
Id(s)) and EAP conversation identifier (Session-Id) will not be
+
authenticator, or can obtain the credentials needed for the
sufficient to determine where the key resides.  For example, the
+
authenticator/AAA client to communicate with one or more backend
authenticator can identify backend authentication servers by their IP
+
authentication servers.  Similarly, if a peer is compromised or
address (as occurs in RADIUS), or using a Fully Qualified Domain Name
+
stolen, an attacker can obtain credentials needed to communicate with
(as in Diameter).  If the Server-Id does not correspond to the IP
+
one or more authenticators. A mandatory requirement from [[RFC4962]]
address or FQDN of a known backend authentication server, then it may
+
Section 3:
not be possible to locate which backend authentication server
 
possesses the key.
 
  
== Security Association Management ==
+
  Prevent the Domino effect
  
EAP, as defined in [RFC3748], supports key derivation, but does not
+
  Compromise of a single peer MUST NOT compromise keying material
provide for the management of lower-layer security associations.
+
  held by any other peer within the system, including session keys
Missing functionality includes:
+
  and long-term keys.  Likewise, compromise of a single
 +
  authenticator MUST NOT compromise keying material held by any
 +
  other authenticator within the system.  In the context of a key
  
(a)  Security Association negotiationEAP does not negotiate
+
  hierarchy, this means that the compromise of one node in the key
    lower-layer unicast or multicast security associations,
+
  hierarchy must not disclose the information necessary to
    including cryptographic algorithms or traffic profilesEAP
+
  compromise other branches in the key hierarchyObviously, the
    methods only negotiate cryptographic algorithms for their own
+
  compromise of the root of the key hierarchy will compromise all of
    use, not for the underlying lower layersEAP also does not
+
  the keys; however, a compromise in one branch MUST NOT result in
    negotiate the traffic profiles to be protected with the
+
  the compromise of other branchesThere are many implications of
    negotiated ciphersuites; in some cases the traffic to be
+
  this requirement; however, two implications deserve highlighting.
    protected can have lower-layer source and destination addresses
+
  First, the scope of the keying material must be defined and
    different from the lower-layer peer or authenticator addresses.
+
  understood by all parties that communicate with a party that holds
 +
  that keying materialSecond, a party that holds keying material
 +
  in a key hierarchy must not share that keying material with
 +
  parties that are associated with other branches in the key
 +
  hierarchy.
  
(b)  Re-keyEAP does not support the re-keying of exported EAP
+
  Group keys are an obvious exceptionSince all members of the
    keying material without EAP re-authentication, although EAP
+
  group have a copy of the same key, compromise of any one of the
    methods can support "fast reconnect" as defined in [RFC3748]
+
  group members will result in the disclosure of the group key.
    Section 7.2.1.
 
  
(c)  Key delete/install semantics.  EAP does not synchronize
+
Some of the implications of the requirement are as follows:
    installation or deletion of keying material on the EAP peer and
 
    authenticator.
 
 
 
(d)  Lifetime negotiation.  EAP does not support lifetime negotiation
 
    for exported EAP keying material, and existing EAP methods also
 
    do not support key lifetime negotiation.
 
 
 
(e)  Guaranteed TSK freshness.  Without a post-EAP handshake, TSKs
 
    can be reused if EAP keying material is cached.
 
 
 
These deficiencies are typically addressed via a post-EAP handshake
 
known as the Secure Association Protocol.
 
  
 +
Key Sharing
 +
    In order to be able to determine whether keying material has
 +
    been shared, it is necessary for the identity of the EAP
 +
    authenticator (NAS-Identifier) to be defined and understood by
 +
    all parties that communicate with it.  EAP lower-layer
 +
    specifications such as [IEEE-802.11], [IEEE-802.16e],
 +
    [IEEE-802.1X], IKEv2 [[RFC4306]], and PPP [[RFC1661]] do not involve
 +
    key sharing.
  
 +
AAA Credential Sharing
 +
    AAA credentials (such as RADIUS shared secrets, IPsec pre-shared
 +
    keys or certificates) MUST NOT be shared between AAA clients,
 +
    since if one AAA client were compromised, this would enable an
 +
    attacker to impersonate other AAA clients to the backend
 +
    authentication server, or even to impersonate a backend
 +
    authentication server to other AAA clients.
  
 +
Compromise of Long-Term Credentials
 +
    An attacker obtaining keying material (such as TSKs, TEKs, or
 +
    the MSK) MUST NOT be able to obtain long-term user credentials
 +
    such as pre-shared keys, passwords, or private-keys without
 +
    breaking a fundamental cryptographic assumption.  The mandatory
 +
    requirements of [[RFC4017]] Section 2.2 include generation of EAP
 +
    keying material, capability to generate EAP keying material with
 +
    128 bits of effective strength, resistance to dictionary
 +
    attacks, shared state equivalence, and protection against
 +
    man-in-the-middle attacks.
  
 +
=== Cryptographic Negotiation ===
  
 +
Mandatory requirements from [[RFC4962]] Section 3:
  
 +
  Cryptographic algorithm independent
  
 +
  The AAA key management protocol MUST be cryptographic algorithm
 +
  independent.  However, an EAP method MAY depend on a specific
 +
  cryptographic algorithm.  The ability to negotiate the use of a
 +
  particular cryptographic algorithm provides resilience against
 +
  compromise of a particular cryptographic algorithm.  Algorithm
 +
  independence is also REQUIRED with a Secure Association Protocol
 +
  if one is defined.  This is usually accomplished by including an
 +
  algorithm identifier and parameters in the protocol, and by
 +
  specifying the algorithm requirements in the protocol
 +
  specification.  While highly desirable, the ability to negotiate
 +
  key derivation functions (KDFs) is not required.  For
 +
  interoperability, at least one suite of mandatory-to-implement
 +
  algorithms MUST be selected.  Note that without protection by
 +
  IPsec as described in [[RFC3579]] Section 4.2, RADIUS [[RFC2865]] does
 +
  not meet this requirement, since the integrity protection
 +
  algorithm cannot be negotiated.
  
=== Secure Association Protocol ===
+
  This requirement does not mean that a protocol must support both
 +
  public-key and symmetric-key cryptographic algorithms.  It means
 +
  that the protocol needs to be structured in such a way that
 +
  multiple public-key algorithms can be used whenever a public-key
 +
  algorithm is employed.  Likewise, it means that the protocol needs
 +
  to be structured in such a way that multiple symmetric-key
 +
  algorithms can be used whenever a symmetric-key algorithm is
 +
  employed.
  
Since neither EAP nor EAP methods provide for establishment of
+
  Confirm ciphersuite selection
lower-layer security associations, it is RECOMMENDED that these
 
facilities be provided within the Secure Association Protocol,
 
including:
 
  
(a)  Entity Naming.  A basic feature of a Secure Association Protocol
+
  The selection of the "best" ciphersuite SHOULD be securely
    is the explicit naming of the parties engaged in the exchange.
+
  confirmed. The mechanism SHOULD detect attempted roll-back
    Without explicit identification, the parties engaged in the
+
  attacks.
    exchange are not identified and the scope of the EAP keying
 
    parameters negotiated during the EAP exchange is undefined.
 
  
(b)  Mutual proof of possession of EAP keying materialDuring the
+
EAP methods satisfying [[RFC4017]] Section 2.2 mandatory requirements
    Secure Association Protocol, the EAP peer and authenticator MUST
+
and AAA protocols utilizing transmission-layer security are capable
    demonstrate possession of the keying material transported
+
of addressing downgrade attacks[[RFC3748]] Section 7.2.1 describes
    between the backend authentication server and authenticator
+
the "protected ciphersuite negotiation" security claim that refers to
    (e.g., MSK), in order to demonstrate that the peer and
+
the ability of an EAP method to negotiate the ciphersuite used to
    authenticator have been authorized.  Since mutual proof of
+
protect the EAP method conversation, as well as to integrity protect
    possession is not the same as mutual authentication, the peer
+
the ciphersuite negotiation. [[RFC4017]] Section 2.2 requires EAP
    cannot verify authenticator assertions (including the
+
methods satisfying this security claim.  Since TLS v1.2 [[RFC5246]] and
    authenticator identity) as a result of this exchange.
+
IKEv2 [[RFC4306]] support negotiation of Key Derivation Functions
    Authenticator identity verification is discussed in Section 2.3.
+
(KDFs), EAP methods based on TLS or IKEv2 will, if properly designed,
  
(c)  Secure capabilities negotiationIn order to protect against
+
inherit this capabilityHowever, negotiation of KDFs is not
    spoofing during the discovery phase, ensure selection of the
+
required by [[RFC4962|RFC 4962]] [[RFC4962]], and EAP methods based on neither TLS
    "best" ciphersuite, and protect against forging of negotiated
+
nor IKEv2 typically do not support KDF negotiation.
    security parameters, the Secure Association Protocol MUST
 
    support secure capabilities negotiation.  This includes the
 
    secure negotiation of usage modes, session parameters (such as
 
    security association identifiers (SAIDs) and key lifetimes),
 
    ciphersuites and required filters, including confirmation of
 
    security-relevant capabilities discovered during phase 0.  The
 
    Secure Association Protocol MUST support integrity and replay
 
    protection of all capability negotiation messages.
 
  
(d) Key naming and selection.  Where key caching is supported, it is
+
When AAA protocols utilize TLS [[RFC5246]] or IPsec [[RFC4301]] for
    possible for the EAP peer and authenticator to share more than
+
transmission layer security, they can leverage the cryptographic
    one key of a given typeAs a result, the Secure Association
+
algorithm negotiation support provided by IKEv2 [[RFC4306]] or TLS
    Protocol MUST explicitly name the keys used in the proof of
+
[[RFC5246]]. RADIUS [[RFC3579]] by itself does not support cryptographic
    possession exchange, so as to prevent confusion when more than
+
algorithm negotiation and relies on MD5 for integrity protection,
    one set of keying material could potentially be used as the
+
authentication, and confidentialityGiven the known weaknesses in
    basis for the exchange.  Use of the key naming mechanism
+
MD5 [MD5Collision], this is undesirable, and can be addressed via use
    described in Section 1.4.1 is RECOMMENDED.
+
of RADIUS over IPsec, as described in [[RFC3579]] Section 4.2.
  
    In order to support the correct processing of phase 2 security
+
To ensure against downgrade attacks within lower-layer protocols,
    associations, the Secure Association (phase 2) protocol MUST
+
algorithm independence is REQUIRED with lower layers using EAP for
    support the naming of phase 2 security associations and
+
key derivation.  For interoperability, at least one suite of
 +
mandatory-to-implement algorithms MUST be selected.  Lower-layer
 +
protocols supporting EAP for key derivation SHOULD also support
 +
secure ciphersuite negotiation as well as KDF negotiation.
  
 +
As described in [[RFC1968]], PPP ECP does not support secure
 +
ciphersuite negotiation.  While [IEEE-802.16e] and [IEEE-802.11]
 +
support ciphersuite negotiation for protection of data, they do not
 +
support negotiation of the cryptographic primitives used within the
 +
Secure Association Protocol, such as message integrity checks (MICs)
 +
and KDFs.
  
 +
=== Confidentiality and Authentication ===
  
 +
Mandatory requirements from [[RFC4962]] Section 3:
  
 +
  Authenticate all parties
  
    associated transient session keys so that the correct set of
+
  Each party in the AAA key management protocol MUST be
    transient session keys can be identified for processing a given
+
  authenticated to the other parties with whom they communicate.
    packet. The phase 2 Secure Association Protocol also MUST
+
  Authentication mechanisms MUST maintain the confidentiality of any
    support transient session key activation and SHOULD support
+
  secret values used in the authentication process.  When a secure
    deletion so that establishment and re-establishment of transient
+
  association protocol is used to establish session keys, the
    session keys can be synchronized between the parties.
+
  parties involved in the secure association protocol MUST identify
 
+
  themselves using identities that are meaningful in the lower-layer
(e)  Generation of fresh transient session keys (TSKs)Where the
+
  protocol environment that will employ the session keys.  In this
    lower layer supports caching of keying material, the EAP peer
+
  situation, the authenticator and peer may be known by different
    lower layer can initiate a new session using keying material
+
  identifiers in the AAA protocol environment and the lower-layer
    that was derived in a previous sessionWere the TSKs to be
+
  protocol environment, making authorization decisions difficult
    derived solely from a portion of the exported EAP keying
+
  without a clear key scopeIf the lower-layer identifier of the
    material, this would result in reuse of the session keys that
+
 
    could expose the underlying ciphersuite to attack.
+
  peer will be used to make authorization decisions, then the pair
 +
  of identifiers associated with the peer MUST be authorized by the
 +
  authenticator and/or the AAA server.
  
    In lower layers where caching of keying material is supported,
+
  AAA protocols, such as RADIUS [[RFC2865]] and Diameter [[RFC3588]],
    the Secure Association Protocol phase is REQUIRED, and MUST
+
  provide a mechanism for the identification of AAA clients; since
    support the derivation of fresh unicast and multicast TSKs, even
+
  the EAP authenticator and AAA client are always co-resident, this
    when the transported keying material provided by the backend
+
  mechanism is applicable to the identification of EAP
    authentication server is not fresh.  This is typically supported
+
  authenticators.
    via the exchange of nonces or counters, which are then mixed
 
    with the keying material in order to generate fresh unicast
 
    (phase 2a) and possibly multicast (phase 2b) session keys.  By
 
    not using exported EAP keying material directly to protect data,
 
    the Secure Association Protocol protects it against compromise.
 
  
(f) Key lifetime management.  This includes explicit key lifetime
+
  When multiple base stations and a "controller" (such as a WLAN
    negotiation or seamless re-key.  EAP does not support the
+
  switch) comprise a single EAP authenticator, the "base station
    re-keying of EAP keying material without re-authentication, and
+
  identity" is not relevant; the EAP method conversation takes place
    existing EAP methods do not support key lifetime negotiation.
+
  between the EAP peer and the EAP serverAlso, many base stations
    As a result, the Secure Association Protocol MAY handle the
+
  can share the same authenticator identityThe authenticator
    re-key and determination of the key lifetimeWhere key caching
+
  identity is important in the AAA protocol exchange and the secure
    is supported, secure negotiation of key lifetimes is
+
  association protocol conversation.
    RECOMMENDED.  Lower layers that support re-key, but not key
 
    caching, may not require key lifetime negotiationFor example,
 
    a difference between IKEv1 [RFC2409] and IKEv2 [RFC4306] is that
 
    in IKEv1 SA lifetimes were negotiated; in IKEv2, each end of the
 
    SA is responsible for enforcing its own lifetime policy on the
 
    SA and re-keying the SA when necessary.
 
  
(g)  Key state resynchronization. It is possible for the peer or
+
  Authentication mechanisms MUST NOT employ plaintext passwords.
    authenticator to reboot or reclaim resources, clearing portions
+
  Passwords may be used provided that they are not sent to another
    or all of the key cache.  Therefore, key lifetime negotiation
+
  party without confidentiality protection.
    cannot guarantee that the key cache will remain synchronized,
 
    and it may not be possible for the peer to determine before
 
    attempting to use a key whether it exists within the
 
    authenticator cache. It is therefore RECOMMENDED for the EAP
 
    lower layer to provide a mechanism for key state
 
  
 +
  Keying material confidentiality and integrity
  
 +
  While preserving algorithm independence, confidentiality and
 +
  integrity of all keying material MUST be maintained.
  
 +
Conformance to these requirements is analyzed in the sections that
 +
follow.
  
 +
==== Spoofing ====
  
    resynchronization, either via the SAP or using a lower layer
+
Per-packet authentication and integrity protection provides
    indication (see [RFC3748] Section 3.4).  Where the peer and
+
protection against spoofing attacks.
    authenticator do not jointly possess a key with which to protect
 
    the resynchronization exchange, secure resynchronization is not
 
    possible, and alternatives (such as an initiation of EAP
 
    re-authentication after expiration of a timer) are needed to
 
    ensure timely resynchronization.
 
  
(h)  Key scope synchronization.  To support key scope determination,
+
Diameter [[RFC3588]] provides support for per-packet authentication and
    the Secure Association Protocol SHOULD provide a mechanism by
+
integrity protection via use of IPsec or TLS.  RADIUS/EAP [[RFC3579]]
    which the peer can determine the scope of the key cache on each
+
provides for per-packet authentication and integrity protection via
    authenticator and by which the authenticator can determine the
+
use of the Message-Authenticator Attribute.
    scope of the key cache on a peer.  This includes negotiation of
 
    restrictions on key usage.
 
  
(i)  Traffic profile negotiation. The traffic to be protected by a
+
[[RFC3748]] Section 7.2.1 describes the "integrity protection" security
    lower-layer security association will not necessarily have the
+
claim and [[RFC4017]] Section 2.2 requires EAP methods supporting this
    same lower-layer source or destination address as the EAP peer
+
claim.
    and authenticator, and it is possible for the peer and
 
    authenticator to negotiate multiple security associations, each
 
    with a different traffic profile. Where this is the case, the
 
    profile of protected traffic SHOULD be explicitly negotiated.
 
    For example, in IKEv2 it is possible for an Initiator and
 
    Responder to utilize EAP for authentication, then negotiate a
 
    Tunnel Mode Security Association (SA), which permits passing of
 
    traffic originating from hosts other than the Initiator and
 
    Responder.  Similarly, in IEEE 802.16e, a Subscriber Station
 
    (SS) can forward traffic to the Base Station (BS), which
 
    originates from the Local Area Network (LAN) to which it is
 
    attached.  To enable this, Security Associations within IEEE
 
    802.16e are identified by the Connection Identifier (CID), not
 
    by the EAP peer and authenticator MAC addresses.  In both IKEv2
 
    and IEEE 802.16e, multiple security associations can exist
 
    between the EAP peer and authenticator, each with their own
 
    traffic profile and quality of service parameters.
 
  
(j)  Direct operation.  Since the phase 2 Secure Association Protocol
+
In order to prevent forgery of Secure Association Protocol frames,
    is concerned with the establishment of security associations
+
per-frame authentication and integrity protection is RECOMMENDED on
    between the EAP peer and authenticator, including the derivation
+
all messagesIKEv2 [[RFC4306]] supports per-frame integrity
    of transient session keys, only those parties have "a need to
 
    know" the transient session keysThe Secure Association
 
    Protocol MUST operate directly between the peer and
 
    authenticator and MUST NOT be passed-through to the backend
 
    authentication server or include additional parties.
 
  
(k) Bi-directional operationWhile some ciphersuites only require
+
protection and authentication, as does the Secure Association
    a single set of transient session keys to protect traffic in
+
Protocol defined in [IEEE-802.16e]. [IEEE-802.11] supports per-frame
    both directions, other ciphersuites require a unique set of
+
integrity protection and authentication on all messages within the
 +
4-way handshake except the first messageAn attack leveraging this
 +
omission is described in [Analysis].
  
 +
==== Impersonation ====
  
 +
Both RADIUS [[RFC2865]] and Diameter [[RFC3588]] implementations are
 +
potentially vulnerable to a rogue authenticator impersonating another
 +
authenticator.  While both protocols support mutual authentication
 +
between the AAA client/authenticator and the backend authentication
 +
server, the security mechanisms vary.
  
 +
In RADIUS, the shared secret used for authentication is determined by
 +
the source address of the RADIUS packet.  However, when RADIUS
 +
Access-Requests are forwarded by a proxy, the NAS-IP-Address,
 +
NAS-Identifier, or NAS-IPv6-Address attributes received by the RADIUS
 +
server will not correspond to the source address.  As noted in
 +
[[RFC3579]] Section 4.3.7, if the first-hop proxy does not check the
 +
NAS identification attributes against the source address in the
 +
Access-Request packet, it is possible for a rogue authenticator to
 +
forge NAS-IP-Address [[RFC2865]], NAS-IPv6-Address [[RFC3162]], or
 +
NAS-Identifier [[RFC2865]] attributes in order to impersonate another
 +
authenticator; attributes such as the Called-Station-Id [[RFC2865]] and
 +
Calling-Station-Id [[RFC2865]] can be forged as well.  Among other
 +
things, this can result in messages (and transported keying material)
 +
being sent to the wrong authenticator.
  
 +
While [[RFC3588]] requires use of the Route-Record AVP, this utilizes
 +
Fully Qualified Domain Names (FQDNs), so that impersonation detection
 +
requires DNS A, AAAA, and PTR Resource Records (RRs) to be properly
 +
configured.  As a result, Diameter is as vulnerable to this attack as
 +
RADIUS, if not more so.  [[RFC3579]] Section 4.3.7 recommends
 +
mechanisms for impersonation detection; to prevent access to keying
 +
material by proxies without a "need to know", it is necessary to
 +
allow the backend authentication server to communicate with the
 +
authenticator directly, such as via the redirect functionality
 +
supported in [[RFC3588]].
  
    transient session keys in each direction.  The phase 2 Secure
+
==== Channel Binding ====
    Association Protocol SHOULD provide for the derivation of
 
    unicast and multicast keys in each direction, so as not to
 
    require two separate phase 2 exchanges in order to create a
 
    bi-directional phase 2 security association.  See [RFC3748]
 
    Section 2.4 for more discussion.
 
  
=== Key Scope ===
+
It is possible for a compromised or poorly implemented EAP
 
+
authenticator to communicate incorrect information to the EAP peer
Absent explicit specification within the lower layer, after the
+
and/or server.  This can enable an authenticator to impersonate
completion of phase 1b, transported keying material, and parameters
+
another authenticator or communicate incorrect information via
are bound to the EAP peer and authenticator, but are not bound to a
+
out-of-band mechanisms (such as via AAA or the lower layer).
specific peer or authenticator port.
 
  
While EAP keying material passed down to the lower layer is not
+
Where EAP is used in pass-through mode, the EAP peer does not verify
intrinsically bound to particular authenticator and peer ports, TSKs
+
the identity of the pass-through authenticator within the EAP
MAY be bound to particular authenticator and peer ports by the Secure
+
conversation.  Within the Secure Association Protocol, the EAP peer
Association Protocol.  However, a lower layer MAY also permit TSKs to
+
and authenticator only demonstrate mutual possession of the
be used on multiple peer and/or authenticator ports, provided that
+
transported keying material; they do not mutually authenticate.  This
TSK freshness is guaranteed (such as by keeping replay counter state
+
creates a potential security vulnerability, described in [[RFC3748]]
within the authenticator).
+
Section 7.15.
  
In order to further limit the key scope, the following measures are
+
As described in [[RFC3579]] Section 4.3.7, it is possible for a
suggested:
+
first-hop AAA proxy to detect a AAA client attempting to impersonate
 +
another authenticator.  However, it is possible for a pass-through
 +
authenticator acting as a AAA client to provide correct information
 +
to the backend authentication server while communicating misleading
 +
information to the EAP peer via the lower layer.
  
(a)  The lower layer MAY specify additional restrictions on key
+
For example, a compromised authenticator can utilize another
    usage, such as limiting the use of EAP keying material and
+
authenticator's Called-Station-Id or NAS-Identifier in communicating
    parameters on the EAP peer to the port over which the EAP
+
with the EAP peer via the lower layer.  Also, a pass-through
    conversation was conducted.
+
authenticator acting as a AAA client can provide an incorrect peer
 +
Calling-Station-Id [[RFC2865]] [[RFC3580]] to the backend authentication
 +
server via the AAA protocol.
  
(b)  The backend authentication server and authenticator MAY
+
As noted in [[RFC3748]] Section 7.15, this vulnerability can be
    implement additional attributes in order to further restrict the
+
addressed by EAP methods that support a protected exchange of channel
    scope of keying material.  For example, in IEEE 802.11, the
+
properties such as endpoint identifiers, including (but not limited
    backend authentication server can provide the authenticator with
+
to): Called-Station-Id [[RFC2865]] [[RFC3580]], Calling-Station-Id
    a list of authorized Called or Calling-Station-Ids and/or SSIDs
+
[[RFC2865]] [[RFC3580]], NAS-Identifier [[RFC2865]], NAS-IP-Address
    for which keying material is valid.
+
[[RFC2865]], and NAS-IPv6-Address [[RFC3162]].
  
(c) Where the backend authentication server provides attributes
+
Using such a protected exchange, it is possible to match the channel
    restricting the key scope, it is RECOMMENDED that restrictions
+
properties provided by the authenticator via out-of-band mechanisms
    be securely communicated by the authenticator to the peerThis
+
against those exchanged within the EAP method. Typically, the EAP
    can be accomplished using the Secure Association Protocol, but
+
method imports channel binding parameters from the lower layer on the
    also can be accomplished via the EAP method or the lower layer.
+
peer, and transmits them securely to the EAP server, which exports
 +
them to the lower layer or AAA layerHowever, transport can occur
 +
from EAP server to peer, or can be bi-directional.  On the side of
 +
the exchange (peer or server) where channel binding is verified, the
 +
lower layer or AAA layer passes the result of the verification (TRUE
 +
or FALSE) up to the EAP method.  While the verification can be done
 +
either by the peer or the server, typically only the server has the
 +
knowledge to determine the correctness of the values, as opposed to
 +
merely verifying their equality.  For further discussion, see
 +
[EAP-SERVICE].
  
=== Parent-Child Relationships ===
+
It is also possible to perform channel binding without transporting
 +
data over EAP, as described in [EAP-CHANNEL].  In this approach the
 +
EAP method includes channel binding parameters in the calculation of
 +
exported EAP keying material, making it impossible for the peer and
  
When an EAP re-authentication takes place, new EAP keying material is
+
authenticator to complete the Secure Association Protocol if there is
exported by the EAP methodIn EAP lower layers where EAP
+
a mismatch in the channel binding parametersHowever, this approach
re-authentication eventually results in TSK replacement, the maximum
+
can only be applied where methods generating EAP keying material are
 +
used along with lower layers that utilize EAP keying material.  For
 +
example, this mechanism would not enable verification of channel
 +
binding on wired IEEE 802 networks using [IEEE-802.1X].
  
 +
==== Mutual Authentication ====
  
 +
[[RFC3748]] Section 7.2.1 describes the "mutual authentication" and
 +
"dictionary attack resistance" claims, and [[RFC4017]] requires EAP
 +
methods satisfying these claims.  EAP methods complying with
 +
[[RFC4017]] therefore provide for mutual authentication between the EAP
 +
peer and server.
  
 +
[[RFC3748]] Section 7.2.1 also describes the "Cryptographic binding"
 +
security claim, and [[RFC4017]] Section 2.2 requires support for this
 +
claim.  As described in [EAP-BINDING], EAP method sequences and
 +
compound authentication mechanisms can be subject to
 +
man-in-the-middle attacks.  When such attacks are successfully
 +
carried out, the attacker acts as an intermediary between a victim
 +
and a legitimate authenticator.  This allows the attacker to
 +
authenticate successfully to the authenticator, as well as to obtain
 +
access to the network.
  
 +
In order to prevent these attacks, [EAP-BINDING] recommends
 +
derivation of a compound key by which the EAP peer and server can
 +
prove that they have participated in the entire EAP exchange.  Since
 +
the compound key MUST NOT be known to an attacker posing as an
 +
authenticator, and yet must be derived from EAP keying material, it
 +
MAY be desirable to derive the compound key from a portion of the
 +
EMSK.  Where this is done, in order to provide proper key hygiene, it
 +
is RECOMMENDED that the compound key used for man-in-the-middle
 +
protection be cryptographically separate from other keys derived from
 +
the EMSK.
  
lifetime of derived keying material (including TSKs) can be less than
+
Diameter [[RFC3588]] provides for per-packet authentication and
or equal to that of EAP keying material (MSK/EMSK), but it cannot be
+
integrity protection via IPsec or TLS, and RADIUS/EAP [[RFC3579]] also
greater.
+
provides for per-packet authentication and integrity protection.
 +
Where the authenticator/AAA client and backend authentication server
 +
communicate directly and credible key wrap is used (see Section 3.8),
 +
this ensures that the AAA Key Transport (phase 1b) achieves its
 +
security objectives: mutually authenticating the AAA
 +
client/authenticator and backend authentication server and providing
 +
transported keying material to the EAP authenticator and to no other
 +
party.
  
Where TSKs are derived from or are wrapped by exported EAP keying
+
[[RFC2607]] Section 7 describes the security issues occurring when the
material, compromise of that exported EAP keying material implies
+
authenticator/AAA client and backend authentication server do not
compromise of TSKsTherefore, if EAP keying material is considered
+
communicate directly.  Where a AAA intermediary is present (such as a
stale, not only SHOULD EAP re-authentication be initiated, but also
+
RADIUS proxy or a Diameter agent), and data object security is not
replacement of child keys, including TSKs.
+
used, transported keying material can be recovered by an attacker in
 +
control of the intermediary.  As discussed in Section 2.1, unless the
 +
TSKs are derived independently from EAP keying material (as in
 +
IKEv2), possession of transported keying material enables decryption
 +
of data traffic sent between the peer and the authenticator to whom
 +
the keying material was transported.  It also allows the AAA
 +
intermediary to impersonate the authenticator or the peerSince the
 +
peer does not authenticate to a AAA intermediary, it has no ability
 +
to determine whether it is authentic or authorized to obtain keying
 +
material.
  
Where EAP keying material is used only for entity authentication but
+
However, as long as transported keying material or keys derived from
not for TSK derivation (as in IKEv2), compromise of exported EAP
+
it are only utilized by a single authenticator, compromise of the
keying material does not imply compromise of the TSKsNevertheless,
+
transported keying material does not enable an attacker to
the compromise of EAP keying material could enable an attacker to
+
impersonate the peer to another authenticatorVulnerability to
impersonate an authenticator, so that EAP re-authentication and TSK
+
compromise of a AAA intermediary can be mitigated by implementation
re-key are RECOMMENDED.
+
of redirect functionality, as described in [[RFC3588]] and [[RFC4072]].
  
With respect to IKEv2, Section 5.2 of [RFC4718], "IKEv2
+
The Secure Association Protocol does not provide for mutual
Clarifications and Implementation Guidelines", states:
+
authentication between the EAP peer and authenticator, only mutual
 +
proof of possession of transported keying material.  In order for the
 +
peer to verify the identity of the authenticator, mutual proof of
 +
possession needs to be combined with impersonation prevention and
 +
channel binding.  Impersonation prevention (described in Section
 +
5.3.2) enables the backend authentication server to determine that
 +
the transported keying material has been provided to the correct
 +
authenticator.  When utilized along with impersonation prevention,
 +
channel binding (described in Section 5.3.3) enables the EAP peer to
 +
verify that the EAP server has authorized the authenticator to
 +
possess the transported keying material.  Completion of the Secure
 +
Association Protocol exchange demonstrates that the EAP peer and the
 +
authenticator possess the transported keying material.
  
  Rekeying the IKE_SA and reauthentication are different concepts in
+
=== Key Binding ===
  IKEv2.  Rekeying the IKE_SA establishes new keys for the IKE_SA
 
  and resets the Message ID counters, but it does not authenticate
 
  the parties again (no AUTH or EAP payloads are involved)...  This
 
  means that reauthentication also establishes new keys for the
 
  IKE_SA and CHILD_SAs.  Therefore while rekeying can be performed
 
  more often than reauthentication, the situation where
 
  "authentication lifetime" is shorter than "key lifetime" does not
 
  make sense.
 
  
Child keys that are used frequently (such as TSKs that are used for
+
Mandatory requirement from [[RFC4962]] Section 3:
traffic protection) can expire sooner than the exported EAP keying
 
material on which they are dependent, so that it is advantageous to
 
support re-key of child keys prior to EAP re-authentication.  Note
 
that deletion of the MSK/EMSK does not necessarily imply deletion of
 
TSKs or child keys.
 
 
 
Failure to mutually prove possession of exported EAP keying material
 
during the Secure Association Protocol exchange need not be grounds
 
for deletion of keying material by both parties; rate-limiting Secure
 
Association Protocol exchanges could be used to prevent a brute force
 
attack.
 
  
 +
  Bind key to its context
  
 +
  Keying material MUST be bound to the appropriate context.  The
 +
  context includes the following:
  
 +
  o  The manner in which the keying material is expected to be used.
  
 +
  o  The other parties that are expected to have access to the
 +
      keying material.
  
 +
  o  The expected lifetime of the keying material.  Lifetime of a
 +
      child key SHOULD NOT be greater than the lifetime of its parent
 +
      in the key hierarchy.
  
 +
  Any party with legitimate access to keying material can determine
 +
  its context.  In addition, the protocol MUST ensure that all
 +
  parties with legitimate access to keying material have the same
 +
  context for the keying material.  This requires that the parties
 +
  are properly identified and authenticated, so that all of the
 +
  parties that have access to the keying material can be determined.
  
 +
  The context will include the peer and NAS identities in more than
 +
  one form.  One (or more) name form is needed to identify these
 +
  parties in the authentication exchange and the AAA protocol.
 +
  Another name form may be needed to identify these parties within
 +
  the lower layer that will employ the session key.
  
 +
Within EAP, exported keying material (MSK, EMSK,IV) is bound to the
 +
Peer-Id(s) and Server-Id(s), which are exported along with the keying
 +
material.  However, not all EAP methods support authenticated server
 +
identities (see Appendix A).
  
 +
Within the AAA protocol, transported keying material is destined for
 +
the EAP authenticator identified by the NAS-Identifier Attribute
 +
within the request, and is for use by the EAP peer identified by the
 +
Peer-Id(s), User-Name [[RFC2865]], or Chargeable User Identity (CUI)
 +
[[RFC4372]] attributes.  The maximum lifetime of the transported keying
 +
material can be provided, as discussed in Section 3.5.1.  Key usage
 +
restrictions can also be included as described in Section 3.2.  Key
 +
lifetime issues are discussed in Sections 3.3, 3.4, and 3.5.
  
 +
=== Authorization ===
  
=== Local Key Lifetimes ===
+
Requirement: The Secure Association Protocol (phase 2) conversation
 +
may utilize different identifiers from the EAP conversation (phase
 +
1a), so that binding between the EAP and Secure Association Protocol
 +
identities is REQUIRED.
  
The Transient EAP Keys (TEKs) are session keys used to protect the
+
Mandatory requirement from [[RFC4962]] Section 3:
EAP conversation.  The TEKs are internal to the EAP method and are
 
not exported.  TEKs are typically created during an EAP conversation,
 
used until the end of the conversation and then discarded.  However,
 
methods can re-key TEKs during an EAP conversation.
 
  
When using TEKs within an EAP conversation or across conversations,
+
  Peer and authenticator authorization
it is necessary to ensure that replay protection and key separation
 
requirements are fulfilled.  For instance, if a replay counter is
 
used, TEK re-key MUST occur prior to wrapping of the counter.
 
Similarly, TSKs MUST remain cryptographically separate from TEKs
 
despite TEK re-keying or caching.  This prevents TEK compromise from
 
leading directly to compromise of the TSKs and vice versa.
 
  
EAP methods MAY cache local EAP keying material (TEKs) that can
+
  Peer and authenticator authorization MUST be performedThese
persist for multiple EAP conversations when fast reconnect is used
+
  entities MUST demonstrate possession of the appropriate keying
[RFC3748]For example, EAP methods based on TLS (such as EAP-TLS
+
  material, without disclosing itAuthorization is REQUIRED
[RFC5216]) derive and cache the TLS Master Secret, typically for
 
substantial time periods.  The lifetime of other local EAP keying
 
material calculated within the EAP method is defined by the method.
 
Note that in general, when using fast reconnect, there is no
 
guarantee that the original long-term credentials are still in the
 
possession of the peerFor instance, a smart-card holding the
 
private key for EAP-TLS may have been removed.  EAP servers SHOULD
 
also verify that the long-term credentials are still valid, such as
 
by checking that certificate used in the original authentication has
 
not yet expired.
 
  
=== Exported and Calculated Key Lifetimes ===
+
  whenever a peer associates with a new authenticator.  The
 +
  authorization checking prevents an elevation of privilege attack,
 +
  and it ensures that an unauthorized authenticator is detected.
  
The following mechanisms are available for communicating the lifetime
+
  Authorizations SHOULD be synchronized between the peer, NAS, and
of keying material between the EAP peer, server, and authenticator:
+
  backend authentication server.  Once the AAA key management
 +
  protocol exchanges are complete, all of these parties should hold
 +
  a common view of the authorizations associated with the other
 +
  parties.
  
   AAA protocols  (backend authentication server and authenticator)
+
   In addition to authenticating all parties, key management
   Lower-layer mechanisms (authenticator and peer)
+
  protocols need to demonstrate that the parties are authorized to
   EAP method-specific negotiation (peer and server)
+
  possess keying material.  Note that proof of possession of keying
 +
  material does not necessarily prove authorization to hold that
 +
  keying material.  For example, within an IEEE 802.11, the 4-way
 +
  handshake demonstrates that both the peer and authenticator
 +
  possess the same EAP keying material. However, by itself, this
 +
  possession proof does not demonstrate that the authenticator was
 +
  authorized by the backend authentication server to possess that
 +
  keying material.  As noted in [[RFC3579]] in Section 4.3.7, where
 +
  AAA proxies are present, it is possible for one authenticator to
 +
  impersonate another, unless each link in the AAA chain implements
 +
  checks against impersonation.  Even with these checks in place, an
 +
   authenticator may still claim different identities to the peer and
 +
  the backend authentication server.  As described in [[RFC3748]]
 +
  Section 7.15, channel binding is required to enable the peer to
 +
  verify that the authenticator claim of identity is both consistent
 +
   and correct.
  
Where the EAP method does not support the negotiation of the lifetime
+
Recommendation from [[RFC4962]] Section 3:
of exported EAP keying material, and a key lifetime negotiation
 
mechanism is not provided by the lower layer, it is possible that
 
there will not be a way for the peer to learn the lifetime of keying
 
material.  This can leave the peer uncertain of how long the
 
authenticator will maintain keying material within the key cache.  In
 
this case the lifetime of keying material can be managed as a system
 
parameter on the peer and authenticator; a default lifetime of 8
 
hours is RECOMMENDED.
 
  
 +
  Authorization restriction
  
 +
  If peer authorization is restricted, then the peer SHOULD be made
 +
  aware of the restriction.  Otherwise, the peer may inadvertently
 +
  attempt to circumvent the restriction.  For example, authorization
 +
  restrictions in an IEEE 802.11 environment include:
  
 +
  o  Key lifetimes, where the keying material can only be used for a
 +
      certain period of time;
  
 +
  o  SSID restrictions, where the keying material can only be used
 +
      with a specific IEEE 802.11 SSID;
  
==== AAA Protocols ====
+
  o  Called-Station-ID restrictions, where the keying material can
 +
      only be used with a single IEEE 802.11 BSSID; and
  
AAA protocols such as RADIUS [RFC2865] and Diameter [RFC4072] can be
+
  o  Calling-Station-ID restrictions, where the keying material can
used to communicate the maximum key lifetime from the backend
+
      only be used with a single peer IEEE 802 MAC address.
authentication server to the authenticator.
 
  
The Session-Timeout Attribute is defined for RADIUS in [RFC2865] and
+
As described in Section 2.3, consistent identification of the EAP
for Diameter in [RFC4005]. Where EAP is used for authentication,
+
authenticator enables the EAP peer to determine the scope of keying
[RFC3580] Section 3.17, indicates that a Session-Timeout Attribute
+
material provided to an authenticator, as well as to confirm with the
sent in an Access-Accept along with a Termination-Action value of
+
backend authentication server that an EAP authenticator proving
RADIUS-Request specifies the maximum number of seconds of service
+
possession of EAP keying material during the Secure Association
provided prior to EAP re-authentication.
+
Protocol was authorized to obtain it.
  
However, there is also a need to be able to specify the maximum
+
Within the AAA protocol, the authorization attributes are bound to
lifetime of cached keying material.  Where EAP pre-authentication is
+
the transported keying material.  While the AAA exchange provides the
supported, cached keying material can be pre-established on the
+
AAA client/authenticator with authorizations relating to the EAP
authenticator prior to session start and will remain there until
+
peer, neither the EAP nor AAA exchanges provide authorizations to the
expiration.  EAP lower layers supporting caching of keying material
+
EAP peer.  In order to ensure that all parties hold the same view of
MAY also persist that material after the end of a session, enabling
+
the authorizations, it is RECOMMENDED that the Secure Association
the peer to subsequently resume communication utilizing the cached
+
Protocol enable communication of authorizations between the EAP
keying material.  In these situations it can be desirable for the
+
authenticator and peer.
backend authentication server to specify the maximum lifetime of
 
cached keying material.
 
  
To accomplish this, [IEEE-802.11] overloads the Session-Timeout
+
In lower layers where the authenticator consistently identifies
Attribute, assuming that it represents the maximum time after which
+
itself to the peer and backend authentication server and the EAP peer
transported keying material will expire on the authenticator,
+
completes the Secure Association Protocol exchange with the same
regardless of whether transported keying material is cached.
+
authenticator through which it completed the EAP conversation,
 +
authorization of the authenticator is demonstrated to the peer by
 +
mutual authentication between the peer and authenticator as discussed
 +
in the previous section.  Identification issues are discussed in
 +
Sections 2.3, 2.4, and 2.5 and key scope issues are discussed in
 +
Section 3.2.
  
An IEEE 802.11 authenticator receiving transported keying material is
+
Where the EAP peer utilizes different identifiers within the EAP
expected to initialize a timer to the Session-Timeout value, and once
+
method and Secure Association Protocol conversations, peer
the timer expires, the transported keying material expires.  Whether
+
authorization can be difficult to demonstrate to the authenticator
this results in session termination or EAP re-authentication is
+
without additional restrictions.  This problem does not exist in
controlled by the value of the Termination-Action AttributeWhere
+
IKEv2 where the Identity Payload is used for peer identification both
EAP re-authentication occurs, the transported keying material is
+
within IKEv2 and EAP, and where the EAP conversation is
replaced, and with it, new calculated keys are put in place.  Where
+
cryptographically protected within IKEv2 binding the EAP and IKEv2
session termination occurs, transported and derived keying material
+
exchangesHowever, within [IEEE-802.11], the EAP peer identity is
is deleted.
+
not used within the 4-way handshake, so that it is necessary for the
 +
authenticator to require that the EAP peer utilize the same MAC
 +
address for EAP authentication as for the 4-way handshake.
  
Overloading the Session-Timeout Attribute is problematic in
+
=== Replay Protection ===
situations where it is necessary to control the maximum session time
 
and key lifetime independently.  For example, it might be desirable
 
to limit the lifetime of cached keying material to 5 minutes while
 
permitting a user once authenticated to remain connected for up to an
 
hour without re-authenticating.  As a result, in the future,
 
additional attributes can be specified to control the lifetime of
 
cached keys; these attributes MAY modify the meaning of the
 
Session-Timeout Attribute in specific circumstances.
 
  
 +
Mandatory requirement from [[RFC4962]] Section 3:
  
 +
  Replay detection mechanism
  
 +
  The AAA key management protocol exchanges MUST be replay
 +
  protected, including AAA, EAP and Secure Association Protocol
 +
  exchanges.  Replay protection allows a protocol message recipient
 +
  to discard any message that was recorded during a previous
 +
  legitimate dialogue and presented as though it belonged to the
 +
  current dialogue.
  
 +
[[RFC3748]] Section 7.2.1 describes the "replay protection" security
 +
claim, and [[RFC4017]] Section 2.2 requires use of EAP methods
 +
supporting this claim.
  
Since the TSK lifetime is often determined by authenticator
+
Diameter [[RFC3588]] provides support for replay protection via use of
resources, and the backend authentication server has no insight into
+
IPsec or TLS.  "RADIUS Support for EAP" [[RFC3579]] protects against
the TSK derivation process by the principle of ciphersuite
+
replay of keying material via the Request Authenticator.  According
independence, it is not appropriate for the backend authentication
+
to [[RFC2865]] Section 3:
server to manage any aspect of the TSK derivation process, including
 
the TSK lifetime.
 
  
==== Lower-Layer Mechanisms ====
+
  In Access-Request Packets, the Authenticator value is a 16 octet
 +
  random number, called the Request Authenticator.
  
Lower-layer mechanisms can be used to enable the lifetime of keying
+
However, some RADIUS packets are not replay protected.  In
material to be negotiated between the peer and authenticatorThis
+
Accounting, Disconnect, and Care-of Address (CoA)-Request packets,
can be accomplished either using the Secure Association Protocol or
+
the Request Authenticator contains a keyed Message Integrity Code
within the lower-layer transport.
+
(MIC) rather than a nonceThe Response Authenticator in Accounting,
 +
Disconnect, and CoA-Response packets also contains a keyed MIC whose
 +
calculation does not depend on a nonce in either the Request or
 +
Response packets.  Therefore, unless an Event-Timestamp attribute is
 +
included or IPsec is used, it is possible that the recipient will not
 +
be able to determine whether these packets have been replayed.  This
 +
issue is discussed further in [[RFC5176]] Section 6.3.
  
Where TSKs are established as the result of a Secure Association
+
In order to prevent replay of Secure Association Protocol frames,
Protocol exchange, it is RECOMMENDED that the Secure Association
+
replay protection is REQUIRED on all messages.  [IEEE-802.11]
Protocol include support for TSK re-key. Where the TSK is taken
+
supports replay protection on all messages within the 4-way
directly from the MSK, there is no need to manage the TSK lifetime as
+
handshake; IKEv2 [[RFC4306]] also supports this.
a separate parameter, since the TSK lifetime and MSK lifetime are
 
identical.
 
  
==== EAP Method-Specific Negotiation ====
+
=== Key Freshness ===
  
As noted in [RFC3748] Section 7.10:
+
Requirement: A session key SHOULD be considered compromised if it
 +
remains in use beyond its authorized lifetime.  Mandatory requirement
 +
from [[RFC4962]] Section 3:
  
   In order to provide keying material for use in a subsequently
+
   Strong, fresh session keys
  negotiated ciphersuite, an EAP method supporting key derivation
 
  MUST export a Master Session Key (MSK) of at least 64 octets, and
 
  an Extended Master Session Key (EMSK) of at least 64 octets.  EAP
 
  Methods deriving keys MUST provide for mutual authentication
 
  between the EAP peer and the EAP Server.
 
 
 
However, EAP does not itself support the negotiation of lifetimes for
 
exported EAP keying material such as the MSK, EMSK, and IV.
 
 
 
While EAP itself does not support lifetime negotiation, it would be
 
possible to specify methods that do.  However, systems that rely on
 
key lifetime negotiation within EAP methods would only function with
 
these methods.  Also, there is no guarantee that the key lifetime
 
negotiated within the EAP method would be compatible with backend
 
authentication server policy.  In the interest of method independence
 
and compatibility with backend authentication server implementations,
 
management of the lifetime of keying material SHOULD NOT be provided
 
within EAP methods.
 
  
 +
  While preserving algorithm independence, session keys MUST be
 +
  strong and fresh.  Each session deserves an independent session
 +
  key.  Fresh keys are required even when a long replay counter
 +
  (that is, one that "will never wrap") is used to ensure that loss
 +
  of state does not cause the same counter value to be used more
 +
  than once with the same session key.
  
 +
  Some EAP methods are capable of deriving keys of varying strength,
 +
  and these EAP methods MUST permit the generation of keys meeting a
 +
  minimum equivalent key strength.  [[BCP86|BCP 86]] [[RFC3766]] offers advice
 +
  on appropriate key sizes.  The National Institute for Standards
 +
  and Technology (NIST) also offers advice on appropriate key sizes
 +
  in [SP800-57].
  
 +
  A fresh cryptographic key is one that is generated specifically
 +
  for the intended use.  In this situation, a secure association
 +
  protocol is used to establish session keys.  The AAA protocol and
 +
  EAP method MUST ensure that the keying material supplied as an
 +
  input to session key derivation is fresh, and the secure
 +
  association protocol MUST generate a separate session key for each
 +
  session, even if the keying material provided by EAP is cached.  A
 +
  cached key persists after the authentication exchange has
 +
  completed.  For the AAA/EAP server, key caching can happen when
 +
  state is kept on the server.  For the NAS or client, key caching
 +
  can happen when the NAS or client does not destroy keying material
 +
  immediately following the derivation of session keys.
  
 +
  Session keys MUST NOT be dependent on one another.  Multiple
 +
  session keys may be derived from a higher-level shared secret as
 +
  long as a one-time value, usually called a nonce, is used to
 +
  ensure that each session key is fresh.  The mechanism used to
 +
  generate session keys MUST ensure that the disclosure of one
 +
  session key does not aid the attacker in discovering any other
 +
  session keys.
  
 +
EAP, AAA, and the lower layer each bear responsibility for ensuring
 +
the use of fresh, strong session keys.  EAP methods need to ensure
 +
the freshness and strength of EAP keying material provided as an
 +
input to session key derivation.  [[RFC3748]] Section 7.10 states:
  
 +
  EAP methods SHOULD ensure the freshness of the MSK and EMSK, even
 +
  in cases where one party may not have a high quality random number
 +
  generator.  A RECOMMENDED method is for each party to provide a
 +
  nonce of at least 128 bits, used in the derivation of the MSK and
 +
  EMSK.
  
 +
The contribution of nonces enables the EAP peer and server to ensure
 +
that exported EAP keying material is fresh.
  
 +
[[RFC3748]] Section 7.2.1 describes the "key strength" and "session
 +
independence" security claims, and [[RFC4017]] requires EAP methods
 +
supporting these claims as well as methods capable of providing
 +
equivalent key strength of 128 bits or greater.  See Section 3.7 for
 +
more information on key strength.
  
=== Key Cache Synchronization ===
+
The AAA protocol needs to ensure that transported keying material is
 +
fresh and is not utilized outside its recommended lifetime.  Replay
 +
protection is necessary for key freshness, but an attacker can
 +
deliver a stale (and therefore potentially compromised) key in a
 +
replay-protected message, so replay protection is not sufficient.  As
 +
discussed in Section 3.5, the Session-Timeout Attribute enables the
 +
backend authentication server to limit the exposure of transported
 +
keying material.
  
Key lifetime negotiation alone cannot guarantee key cache
+
The EAP Session-Id, described in Section 1.4, enables the EAP peer,
synchronizationEven where a lower-layer exchange is run
+
authenticator, and server to distinguish EAP conversationsHowever,
immediately after EAP in order to determine the lifetime of keying
+
unless the authenticator keeps track of EAP Session-Ids, the
material, it is still possible for the authenticator to purge all or
+
authenticator cannot use the Session-Id to guarantee the freshness of
part of the key cache prematurely (e.g., due to reboot or need to
+
keying material.
reclaim memory).
 
  
The lower layer can utilize the Discovery phase 0 to improve key
+
The Secure Association Protocol, described in Section 3.1, MUST
cache synchronization.  For example, if the authenticator manages the
+
generate a fresh session key for each session, even if the EAP keying
key cache by deleting the oldest key first, the relative creation
+
material and parameters provided by methods are cached, or either the
time of the last key to be deleted could be advertised within the
+
peer or authenticator lack a high entropy random number generator.  A
Discovery phase, enabling the peer to determine whether keying
+
RECOMMENDED method is for the peer and authenticator to each provide
material had been prematurely expired from the authenticator key
+
a nonce or counter used in session key derivation.  If a nonce is
cache.
+
used, it is RECOMMENDED that it be at least 128 bits.  While
 +
[IEEE-802.11] and IKEv2 [[RFC4306]] satisfy this requirement,
 +
[IEEE-802.16e] does not, since randomness is only contributed from
 +
the Base Station.
  
=== Key Strength ===
+
=== Key Scope Limitation ===
  
As noted in Section 2.1, EAP lower layers determine TSKs in different
+
Mandatory requirement from [[RFC4962]] Section 3:
ways.  Where exported EAP keying material is utilized in the
 
derivation, encryption or authentication of TSKs, it is possible for
 
EAP key generation to represent the weakest link.
 
  
In order to ensure that methods produce EAP keying material of an
+
  Limit key scope
appropriate symmetric key strength, it is RECOMMENDED that EAP
 
methods utilizing public key cryptography choose a public key that
 
has a cryptographic strength providing the required level of attack
 
resistance.  This is typically provided by configuring EAP methods,
 
since there is no coordination between the lower layer and EAP method
 
with respect to minimum required symmetric key strength.
 
 
 
Section 5 of [[BCP86|BCP 86]] [RFC3766] offers advice on the required RSA or DH
 
module and DSA subgroup size in bits, for a given level of attack
 
resistance in bits.  The National Institute for Standards and
 
Technology (NIST) also offers advice on appropriate key sizes in
 
[SP800-57].
 
  
 +
  Following the principle of least privilege, parties MUST NOT have
 +
  access to keying material that is not needed to perform their
 +
  role.  A party has access to a particular key if it has access to
 +
  all of the secret information needed to derive it.
  
 +
  Any protocol that is used to establish session keys MUST specify
 +
  the scope for session keys, clearly identifying the parties to
 +
  whom the session key is available.
  
 +
Transported keying material is permitted to be accessed by the EAP
 +
peer, authenticator and server.  The EAP peer and server derive EAP
 +
keying material during the process of mutually authenticating each
 +
other using the selected EAP method.  During the Secure Association
 +
Protocol exchange, the EAP peer utilizes keying material to
 +
demonstrate to the authenticator that it is the same party that
 +
authenticated to the EAP server and was authorized by it.  The EAP
 +
authenticator utilizes the transported keying material to prove to
 +
the peer not only that the EAP conversation was transported through
 +
it (this could be demonstrated by a man-in-the-middle), but that it
 +
was uniquely authorized by the EAP server to provide the peer with
 +
access to the network.  Unique authorization can only be demonstrated
 +
if the EAP authenticator does not share the transported keying
 +
material with a party other than the EAP peer and server.  TSKs are
 +
permitted to be accessed only by the EAP peer and authenticator (see
 +
Section 1.5); TSK derivation is discussed in Section 2.1.  Since
 +
demonstration of authorization within the Secure Association Protocol
 +
exchange depends on possession of transported keying material, the
 +
backend authentication server can obtain TSKs unless it deletes the
 +
transported keying material after sending it.
  
 +
=== Key Naming ===
  
 +
Mandatory requirement from [[RFC4962]] Section 3:
  
 +
  Uniquely named keys
  
 +
  AAA key management proposals require a robust key naming scheme,
 +
  particularly where key caching is supported.  The key name
 +
  provides a way to refer to a key in a protocol so that it is clear
 +
  to all parties which key is being referenced.  Objects that cannot
 +
  be named cannot be managed.  All keys MUST be uniquely named, and
 +
  the key name MUST NOT directly or indirectly disclose the keying
  
 +
  material.  If the key name is not based on the keying material,
 +
  then one can be sure that it cannot be used to assist in a search
 +
  for the key value.
  
 +
EAP key names (defined in Section 1.4.1), along with the Peer-Id(s)
 +
and Server-Id(s), uniquely identify EAP keying material, and do not
 +
directly or indirectly expose EAP keying material.
  
 +
Existing AAA server implementations do not distribute key names along
 +
with the transported keying material.  However, Diameter EAP
 +
[[RFC4072]] Section 4.1.4 defines the EAP-Key-Name AVP for the purpose
 +
of transporting the EAP Session-Id.  Since the EAP-Key-Name AVP is
 +
defined within the RADIUS attribute space, it can be used either with
 +
RADIUS or Diameter.
  
 +
Since the authenticator is not provided with the name of the
 +
transported keying material by existing backend authentication server
 +
implementations, existing Secure Association Protocols do not utilize
 +
EAP key names.  For example, [IEEE-802.11] supports PMK caching; to
 +
enable the peer and authenticator to determine the cached PMK to
 +
utilize within the 4-way handshake, the PMK needs to be named.  For
 +
this purpose, [IEEE-802.11] utilizes a PMK naming scheme that is
 +
based on the key.  Since IKEv2 [[RFC4306]] does not cache transported
 +
keying material, it does not need to refer to transported keying
 +
material.
  
 +
5.10.  Denial-of-Service Attacks
  
 +
Key caching can result in vulnerability to denial-of-service attacks.
 +
For example, EAP methods that create persistent state can be
 +
vulnerable to denial-of-service attacks on the EAP server by a rogue
 +
EAP peer.
  
 +
To address this vulnerability, EAP methods creating persistent state
 +
can limit the persistent state created by an EAP peer.  For example,
 +
for each peer an EAP server can choose to limit persistent state to a
 +
few EAP conversations, distinguished by the EAP Session-Id.  This
 +
prevents a rogue peer from denying access to other peers.
 +
 +
Similarly, to conserve resources an authenticator can choose to limit
 +
the persistent state corresponding to each peer.  This can be
 +
accomplished by limiting each peer to persistent state corresponding
 +
to a few EAP conversations, distinguished by the EAP Session-Id.
  
 +
Whether creation of new TSKs implies deletion of previously derived
 +
TSKs depends on the EAP lower layer.  Where there is no implied
 +
deletion, the authenticator can choose to limit the number of TSKs
 +
and associated state that can be stored for each peer.
  
=== Key Wrap ===
+
== References ==
  
The key wrap specified in [RFC2548], which is based on an MD5-based
+
=== Normative References ===
stream cipher, has known problems, as described in [RFC3579] Section
 
4.3.  RADIUS uses the shared secret for multiple purposes, including
 
per-packet authentication and attribute hiding, considerable
 
information is exposed about the shared secret with each packet.
 
This exposes the shared secret to dictionary attacks.  MD5 is used
 
both to compute the RADIUS Response Authenticator and the
 
Message-Authenticator Attribute, and concerns exist relating to the
 
security of this hash [MD5Collision].
 
  
As discussed in [RFC3579] Section 4.3, the security vulnerabilities
+
[[RFC2119]]      Bradner, S., "Key words for use in RFCs to Indicate
of RADIUS are extensive, and therefore development of an alternative
+
              Requirement Levels", [[BCP14|BCP 14]], [[RFC2119|RFC 2119]], March 1997.
key wrap technique based on the RADIUS shared secret would not
+
 
substantially improve security.  As a result, [RFC3579] Section 4.2
+
[[RFC3748]]      Aboba, B., Blunk, L., Vollbrecht, J., Carlson, J., and
recommends running RADIUS over IPsec.  The same approach is taken in
+
              H. Levkowetz, Ed., "Extensible Authentication Protocol
Diameter EAP [RFC4072], which in Section 4.1.3 defines the
+
              (EAP)", [[RFC3748|RFC 3748]], June 2004.
EAP-Master-Session-Key Attribute-Value Pair (AVP) in clear-text, to
+
 
be protected by IPsec or TLS.
+
[[RFC4962]]      Housley, R. and B. Aboba, "Guidance for
 +
              Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA)
 +
              Key Management", [[BCP132|BCP 132]], [[RFC4962|RFC 4962]], July 2007.
  
== Handoff Vulnerabilities ==
+
=== Informative References ===
  
A handoff occurs when an EAP peer moves to a new authenticator.
+
[8021XPreAuth] Pack, S. and Y. Choi, "Pre-Authenticated Fast Handoff
Several mechanisms have been proposed for reducing handoff latency
+
              in a Public Wireless LAN Based on IEEE 802.1x Model",
within networks utilizing EAP. These include:
+
              Proceedings of the IFIP TC6/WG6.8 Working Conference
 +
              on Personal Wireless Communications, p.175-182,
 +
              October 23-25, 2002.
  
EAP pre-authentication
+
[Analysis]    He, C. and J. Mitchell, "Analysis of the 802.11i 4-Way
  In EAP pre-authentication, an EAP peer pre-establishes EAP keying
+
              Handshake", Proceedings of the 2004 ACM Workshop on
  material with an authenticator prior to arrival. EAP
+
              Wireless Security, pp. 43-50, ISBN: 1-58113-925-X.
  pre-authentication only affects the timing of EAP authentication,
 
  but does not shorten or eliminate EAP (phase 1a) or AAA (phase 1b)
 
  exchanges;  Discovery (phase 0) and Secure Association Protocol
 
  (phase 2) exchanges occur as described in Section 1.3. As a
 
  result, the primary benefit is to enable EAP authentication to be
 
  removed from the handoff critical path, thereby reducing latency.
 
  Use of EAP pre-authentication within IEEE 802.11 is described in
 
  [IEEE-802.11] and [8021XPreAuth].
 
  
 +
[Bargh]        Bargh, M., Hulsebosch, R., Eertink, E., Prasad, A.,
 +
              Wang, H. and P. Schoo, "Fast Authentication Methods
 +
              for Handovers between IEEE 802.11 Wireless LANs",
 +
              Proceedings of the 2nd ACM international workshop on
 +
              Wireless mobile applications and services on WLAN
 +
              hotspots, October, 2004.
  
 +
[GKDP]        Dondeti, L., Xiang, J., and S. Rowles, "GKDP: Group
 +
              Key Distribution Protocol", Work in Progress, March
 +
              2006.
  
 +
[He]          He, C., Sundararajan, M., Datta, A. Derek, A. and J.
 +
              C.  Mitchell, "A Modular Correctness Proof of TLS and
 +
              IEEE 802.11i", ACM Conference on Computer and
 +
              Communications Security (CCS '05), November, 2005.
  
 +
[IEEE-802.11]  Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,
 +
              "Information technology - Telecommunications and
 +
              information exchange between systems - Local and
 +
              metropolitan area networks - Specific Requirements
 +
              Part 11:  Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and
 +
              Physical Layer (PHY) Specifications", IEEE Standard
 +
              802.11-2007, 2007.
  
 +
[IEEE-802.1X]  Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,
 +
              "Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Port-Based
 +
              Network Access Control", IEEE Standard 802.1X-2004,
 +
              December 2004.
  
 +
[IEEE-802.1Q]  IEEE Standards for Local and Metropolitan Area
 +
              Networks:  Draft Standard for Virtual Bridged Local
 +
              Area Networks, P802.1Q-2003, January 2003.
  
 +
[IEEE-802.11i] Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,
 +
              "Supplement to Standard for Telecommunications and
 +
              Information Exchange Between Systems - LAN/MAN
 +
              Specific Requirements - Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium
 +
              Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)
 +
              Specifications:  Specification for Enhanced Security",
 +
              IEEE 802.11i/D1, 2001.
  
 +
[IEEE-802.11F] Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,
 +
              "Recommended Practice for Multi-Vendor Access Point
 +
              Interoperability via an Inter-Access Point Protocol
 +
              Across Distribution Systems Supporting IEEE 802.11
 +
              Operation", IEEE 802.11F, July 2003 (now deprecated).
  
 +
[IEEE-802.16e] Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,
 +
              "IEEE Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area
 +
              Networks: Part 16: Air Interface for Fixed and Mobile
 +
              Broadband Wireless Access Systems: Amendment for
 +
              Physical and Medium Access Control Layers for Combined
 +
              Fixed and Mobile Operations in Licensed Bands" IEEE
 +
              802.16e, August 2005.
  
 +
[IEEE-03-084]  Mishra, A., Shin, M., Arbaugh, W., Lee, I. and K.
 +
              Jang, "Proactive Key Distribution to support fast and
 +
              secure roaming", IEEE 802.11 Working Group, IEEE-03-
 +
              084r1-I, http://www.ieee802.org/11/Documents/
 +
              DocumentHolder/3-084.zip, January 2003.
  
 +
[EAP-SERVICE]  Arkko, J. and P. Eronen, "Authenticated Service
 +
              Information for the Extensible Authentication Protocol
 +
              (EAP)", Work in Progress, October 2005.
  
 +
[SHORT-TERM]  Friedman, A., Sheffer, Y., and A. Shaqed, "Short-Term
 +
              Certificates", Work in Progress, June 2007.
  
 +
[HANDOFF]      Arbaugh, W. and B. Aboba, "Handoff Extension to
 +
              RADIUS", Work in Progress, October 2003.
  
 +
[EAP-CHANNEL]  Ohba, Y., Parthasrathy, M., and M. Yanagiya, "Channel
 +
              Binding Mechanism Based on Parameter Binding in Key
 +
              Derivation", Work in Progress, June 2007.
  
Proactive key distribution
+
[EAP-BINDING]  Puthenkulam, J., Lortz, V., Palekar, A., and D. Simon,
  In proactive key distribution, keying material and authorizations
+
              "The Compound Authentication Binding Problem", Work in
  are transported from the backend authentication server to a
+
              Progress, October 2003.
  candidate authenticator in advance of a handoff. As a result, EAP
 
  (phase 1a) is not needed, but the Discovery (phase 0), and Secure
 
  Association Protocol exchanges (phase 2) are still necessary.
 
  Within the AAA exchange (phase 1b), authorization and key
 
  distribution functions are typically supported, but not
 
  authentication.  Proactive key distribution is described in
 
  [MishraPro], [IEEE-03-084], and [HANDOFF].
 
  
Key caching
+
[MD5Collision] Klima, V., "Tunnels in Hash Functions: MD5 Collisions
  Caching of EAP keying material enables an EAP peer to re-attach to
+
              Within a Minute", Cryptology ePrint Archive, March
  an authenticator without requiring EAP (phase 1a) or AAA (phase
+
              2006, http://eprint.iacr.org/2006/105.pdf
  1b) exchanges. However, Discovery (phase 0) and Secure
 
  Association Protocol (phase 2) exchanges are still needed.  Use of
 
  key caching within IEEE 802.11 is described in [IEEE-802.11].
 
  
Context transfer
+
[MishraPro]   Mishra, A., Shin, M. and W. Arbaugh, "Pro-active Key
   In context transfer schemes, keying material and authorizations
+
              Distribution using Neighbor Graphs", IEEE Wireless
  are transferred between a previous authenticator and a new
+
              Communications, vol. 11, February 2004.
  authenticator. This can occur in response to a handoff request by
 
  the EAP peer, or in advance, as in proactive key distribution. As
 
  a result, EAP (phase 1a) is eliminated, but not the Discovery
 
  (phase 0) or Secure Association Protocol exchanges (phase 2). If
 
  a secure channel can be established between the new and previous
 
  authenticator without assistance from the backend authentication
 
  server, then the AAA exchange (phase 1b) can be eliminated;
 
  otherwise, it is still needed, although it can be shortened.
 
  Context transfer protocols are described in [IEEE-802.11F] (now
 
  deprecated) and "Context Transfer Protocol (CXTP)" [RFC4067].
 
  "Fast Authentication Methods for Handovers between IEEE 802.11
 
  Wireless LANs" [Bargh] analyzes fast handoff techniques, including
 
  context transfer mechanisms.
 
  
 +
[[RFC1661]]      Simpson, W., Ed., "The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)",
 +
              [[STD51|STD 51]], [[RFC1661|RFC 1661]], July 1994.
  
 +
[[RFC1968]]      Meyer, G., "The PPP Encryption Control Protocol
 +
              (ECP)", [[RFC1968|RFC 1968]], June 1996.
  
 +
[[RFC2230]]      Atkinson, R., "Key Exchange Delegation Record for the
 +
              DNS", [[RFC2230|RFC 2230]], November 1997.
  
 +
[[RFC2409]]      Harkins, D. and D. Carrel, "The Internet Key Exchange
 +
              (IKE)", [[RFC2409|RFC 2409]], November 1998.
  
 +
[[RFC2516]]      Mamakos, L., Lidl, K., Evarts, J., Carrel, D., Simone,
 +
              D., and R. Wheeler, "A Method for Transmitting PPP
 +
              Over Ethernet (PPPoE)", [[RFC2516|RFC 2516]], February 1999.
  
 +
[[RFC2548]]      Zorn, G., "Microsoft Vendor-specific RADIUS
 +
              Attributes", [[RFC2548|RFC 2548]], March 1999.
  
 +
[[RFC2607]]      Aboba, B. and J. Vollbrecht, "Proxy Chaining and
 +
              Policy Implementation in Roaming", [[RFC2607|RFC 2607]], June
 +
              1999.
  
 +
[[RFC2716]]      Aboba, B. and D. Simon, "PPP EAP TLS Authentication
 +
              Protocol", [[RFC2716|RFC 2716]], October 1999.
  
 +
[[RFC2782]]      Gulbrandsen, A., Vixie, P., and L. Esibov, "A DNS RR
 +
              for specifying the location of services (DNS SRV)",
 +
              [[RFC2782|RFC 2782]], February 2000.
  
 +
[[RFC2845]]      Vixie, P., Gudmundsson, O., Eastlake 3rd, D., and B.
 +
              Wellington, "Secret Key Transaction Authentication for
 +
              DNS (TSIG)", [[RFC2845|RFC 2845]], May 2000.
  
 +
[[RFC2865]]      Rigney, C., Willens, S., Rubens, A., and W. Simpson,
 +
              "Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS)",
 +
              [[RFC2865|RFC 2865]], June 2000.
  
 +
[[RFC3007]]      Wellington, B., "Secure Domain Name System (DNS)
 +
              Dynamic Update", [[RFC3007|RFC 3007]], November 2000.
  
 +
[[RFC3162]]      Aboba, B., Zorn, G., and D. Mitton, "RADIUS and IPv6",
 +
              [[RFC3162|RFC 3162]], August 2001.
  
 +
[[RFC3547]]      Baugher, M., Weis, B., Hardjono, T., and H. Harney,
 +
              "The Group Domain of Interpretation", [[RFC3547|RFC 3547]], July
 +
              2003.
  
 +
[[RFC3579]]      Aboba, B. and P. Calhoun, "RADIUS (Remote
 +
              Authentication Dial In User Service) Support For
 +
              Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)", [[RFC3579|RFC 3579]],
 +
              September 2003.
  
 +
[[RFC3580]]      Congdon, P., Aboba, B., Smith, A., Zorn, G., and J.
 +
              Roese, "IEEE 802.1X Remote Authentication Dial In User
 +
              Service (RADIUS) Usage Guidelines", [[RFC3580|RFC 3580]],
 +
              September 2003.
  
 +
[[RFC3588]]      Calhoun, P., Loughney, J., Guttman, E., Zorn, G., and
 +
              J. Arkko, "Diameter Base Protocol", [[RFC3588|RFC 3588]],
 +
              September 2003.
  
 +
[[RFC3766]]      Orman, H. and P. Hoffman, "Determining Strengths For
 +
              Public Keys Used For Exchanging Symmetric Keys", BCP
 +
              86, [[RFC3766|RFC 3766]], April 2004.
  
Token distribution
+
[[RFC3830]]      Arkko, J., Carrara, E., Lindholm, F., Naslund, M., and
  In token distribution schemes, the EAP peer is provided with a
+
              K. Norrman, "MIKEY: Multimedia Internet KEYing", RFC
  credential, subsequently enabling it to authenticate with one or
+
              3830, August 2004.
  more additional authenticators. During the subsequent
 
  authentications, EAP (phase 1a) is eliminated or shortened; the
 
  Discovery (phase 0) and Secure Association Protocol exchanges
 
  (phase 2) still occur, although the latter can be shortened. If
 
  the token includes authorizations and can be validated by an
 
  authenticator without assistance from the backend authentication
 
  server, then the AAA exchange (phase 1b) can be eliminated;
 
  otherwise, it is still needed, although it can be shortened.
 
  Token-based schemes, initially proposed in early versions of IEEE
 
  802.11i [IEEE-802.11i], are described in [Token], [Tokenk], and
 
  [SHORT-TERM].
 
  
The sections that follow discuss the security vulnerabilities
+
[[RFC4005]]      Calhoun, P., Zorn, G., Spence, D., and D. Mitton,
introduced by the above schemes.
+
              "Diameter Network Access Server Application", RFC
 +
              4005, August 2005.
  
=== EAP Pre-Authentication ===
+
[[RFC4017]]      Stanley, D., Walker, J., and B. Aboba, "Extensible
 +
              Authentication Protocol (EAP) Method Requirements for
 +
              Wireless LANs", [[RFC4017|RFC 4017]], March 2005.
  
EAP pre-authentication differs from a normal EAP conversation
+
[[RFC4033]]      Arends, R., Austein, R., Larson, M., Massey, D., and
primarily with respect to the lower-layer encapsulation. For
+
              S. Rose, "DNS Security Introduction and Requirements",
example, in [IEEE-802.11], EAP pre-authentication frames utilize a
+
              [[RFC4033|RFC 4033]], March 2005.
distinct Ethertype, but otherwise conforms to the encapsulation
 
described in [IEEE-802.1X]. As a result, an EAP pre-authentication
 
conversation differs little from the model described in Section 1.3,
 
other than the introduction of a delay between phase 1 and phase 2.
 
  
EAP pre-authentication relies on lower-layer mechanisms for discovery
+
[[RFC4035]]      Arends, R., Austein, R., Larson, M., Massey, D., and
of candidate authenticators. Where discovery can provide information
+
              S. Rose, "Protocol Modifications for the DNS Security
on candidate authenticators outside the immediate listening range,
+
              Extensions", [[RFC4035|RFC 4035]], March 2005.
and the peer can determine whether it already possesses valid EAP
+
 
keying material with candidate authenticators, the peer can avoid
+
[[RFC4067]]      Loughney, J., Ed., Nakhjiri, M., Perkins, C., and R.
unnecessary EAP pre-authentications and can establish EAP keying
+
              Koodli, "Context Transfer Protocol (CXTP)", [[RFC4067|RFC 4067]],
material well in advance, regardless of the coverage overlap between
+
              July 2005.
authenticators. However, if the peer can only discover candidate
+
 
authenticators within listening range and cannot determine whether it
+
[[RFC4072]]      Eronen, P., Ed., Hiller, T., and G. Zorn, "Diameter
can reuse existing EAP keying material, then it is possible that the
+
              Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) Application",
peer will not be able to complete EAP pre-authentication prior to
+
              [[RFC4072|RFC 4072]], August 2005.
connectivity loss or that it can pre-authenticate multiple times with
+
 
the same authenticator, increasing backend authentication server
+
[[RFC4118]]      Yang, L., Zerfos, P., and E. Sadot, "Architecture
load.
+
              Taxonomy for Control and Provisioning of Wireless
 +
              Access Points (CAPWAP)", [[RFC4118|RFC 4118]], June 2005.
 +
 
 +
[[RFC4186]]      Haverinen, H., Ed., and J. Salowey, Ed., "Extensible
 +
              Authentication Protocol Method for Global System for
 +
              Mobile Communications (GSM) Subscriber Identity
 +
              Modules (EAP-SIM)", [[RFC4186|RFC 4186]], January 2006.
 +
 
 +
[[RFC4187]]      Arkko, J. and H. Haverinen, "Extensible Authentication
 +
              Protocol Method for 3rd Generation Authentication and
 +
              Key Agreement (EAP-AKA)", [[RFC4187|RFC 4187]], January 2006.
 +
 
 +
[[RFC4282]]      Aboba, B., Beadles, M., Arkko, J., and P. Eronen, "The
 +
              Network Access Identifier", [[RFC4282|RFC 4282]], December 2005.
 +
 
 +
[[RFC4284]]      Adrangi, F., Lortz, V., Bari, F., and P. Eronen,
 +
              "Identity Selection Hints for the Extensible
 +
              Authentication Protocol (EAP)", [[RFC4284|RFC 4284]], January
 +
              2006.
  
Since a peer can complete EAP pre-authentication with an
+
[[RFC4301]]      Kent, S. and K. Seo, "Security Architecture for the
authenticator without eventually attaching to it, it is possible that
+
              Internet Protocol", [[RFC4301|RFC 4301]], December 2005.
phase 2 will not occur. In this case, an Accounting-Request
 
signifying the start of service will not be sent, or will only be
 
sent with a substantial delay after the completion of authentication.
 
  
 +
[[RFC4306]]      Kaufman, C., Ed., "Internet Key Exchange (IKEv2)
 +
              Protocol", [[RFC4306|RFC 4306]], December 2005.
  
 +
[[RFC4372]]      Adrangi, F., Lior, A., Korhonen, J., and J. Loughney,
 +
              "Chargeable User Identity", [[RFC4372|RFC 4372]], January 2006.
  
 +
[[RFC4334]]      Housley, R. and T. Moore, "Certificate Extensions and
 +
              Attributes Supporting Authentication in Point-to-Point
 +
              Protocol (PPP) and Wireless Local Area Networks
 +
              (WLAN)", [[RFC4334|RFC 4334]], February 2006.
  
 +
[[RFC4535]]      Harney, H., Meth, U., Colegrove, A., and G. Gross,
 +
              "GSAKMP: Group Secure Association Key Management
 +
              Protocol", [[RFC4535|RFC 4535]], June 2006.
  
As noted in "IEEE 802.1X RADIUS Usage Guidelines" [RFC3580], the AAA
+
[[RFC4763]]      Vanderveen, M. and H. Soliman, "Extensible
exchange resulting from EAP pre-authentication differs little from an
+
              Authentication Protocol Method for Shared-secret
ordinary exchange described in "RADIUS Support for EAP" [RFC3579].
+
              Authentication and Key Establishment (EAP-SAKE)", RFC
For example, since in IEEE 802.11 [IEEE-802.11] an Association
+
              4763, November 2006.
exchange does not occur prior to EAP pre-authentication, the SSID is
 
not known by the authenticator at authentication time, so that an
 
Access-Request cannot include the SSID within the Called-Station-Id
 
attribute as described in [RFC3580] Section 3.20.
 
  
Since only the absence of an SSID in the Called-Station-Id attribute
+
[[RFC4675]]      Congdon, P., Sanchez, M., and B. Aboba, "RADIUS
distinguishes an EAP pre-authentication attempt, if the authenticator
+
              Attributes for Virtual LAN and Priority Support", RFC
does not always include the SSID for a normal EAP authentication
+
              4675, September 2006.
attempt, it is possible that the backend authentication server will
+
 
not be able to determine whether a session constitutes an EAP
+
[[RFC4718]]      Eronen, P. and P. Hoffman, "IKEv2 Clarifications and
pre-authentication attempt, potentially resulting in authorization or
+
              Implementation Guidelines", [[RFC4718|RFC 4718]], October 2006.
accounting problems. Where the number of simultaneous sessions is
 
limited, the backend authentication server can refuse to authorize a
 
valid EAP pre-authentication attempt or can enable the peer to engage
 
in more simultaneous sessions than they are authorized for.  Where
 
EAP pre-authentication occurs with an authenticator which the peer
 
never attaches to, it is possible that the backend accounting server
 
will not be able to determine whether the absence of an
 
Accounting-Request was due to packet loss or a session that never
 
started.
 
  
In order to enable pre-authentication requests to be handled more
+
[[RFC4764]]      Bersani, F. and H. Tschofenig, "The EAP-PSK Protocol:
reliably, it is RECOMMENDED that AAA protocols explicitly identify
+
              A Pre-Shared Key Extensible Authentication Protocol
EAP pre-authentication.  In order to suppress unnecessary EAP
+
              (EAP) Method", [[RFC4764|RFC 4764]], January 2007.
pre-authentication exchanges, it is RECOMMENDED that authenticators
 
unambiguously identify themselves as described in Section 2.3.
 
  
=== Proactive Key Distribution ===
+
[[RFC5176]]      Chiba, M., Dommety, G., Eklund, M., Mitton, D., and B.
 +
              Aboba, "Dynamic Authorization Extensions to Remote
 +
              Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS)", RFC
 +
              5176, January 2008.
  
In proactive key distribution schemes, the backend authentication
+
[[RFC5216]]      Simon, D., Aboba, B., and R. Hurst, "The EAP-TLS
server transports keying material and authorizations to an
+
              Authentication Protocol", [[RFC5216|RFC 5216]], March 2008.
authenticator in advance of the arrival of the peer. The
 
authenticators selected to receive the transported key material are
 
selected based on past patterns of peer movement between
 
authenticators known as the "neighbor graph". In order to reduce
 
handoff latency, proactive key distribution schemes typically only
 
demonstrate proof of possession of transported keying material
 
between the EAP peer and authenticator. During a handoff, the
 
backend authentication server is not provided with proof that the
 
peer successfully authenticated to an authenticator; instead, the
 
authenticator generates a stream of accounting messages without a
 
corresponding set of authentication exchanges.  As described in
 
[MishraPro], knowledge of the neighbor graph can be established via
 
static configuration or analysis of authentication exchanges. In
 
  
 +
[[RFC5246]]      Dierks, T. and E. Rescorla, "The Transport Layer
 +
              Security (TLS) Protocol Version 1.2", [[RFC5246|RFC 5246]], August
 +
              2008.
  
 +
[SP800-57]    National Institute of Standards and Technology,
 +
              "Recommendation for Key Management", Special
 +
              Publication 800-57, May 2006.
  
 +
[Token]        Fantacci, R., Maccari, L., Pecorella, T., and F.
 +
              Frosali, "A secure and performant token-based
 +
              authentication for infrastructure and mesh 802.1X
 +
              networks", IEEE Conference on Computer Communications,
 +
              June 2006.
  
 +
[Tokenk]      Ohba, Y., Das, S., and A. Duttak, "Kerberized Handover
 +
              Keying: A Media-Independent Handover Key Management
 +
              Architecture", Mobiarch 2007.
  
order to prevent corruption of the neighbor graph, new neighbor graph
+
Acknowledgments
entries can only be created as the result of a successful EAP
 
exchange, and accounting packets with no corresponding authentication
 
exchange need to be verified to correspond to neighbor graph entries
 
(e.g., corresponding to handoffs between neighbors).
 
  
In order to prevent compromise of one authenticator from resulting in
+
Thanks to Ashwin Palekar, Charlie Kaufman, and Tim Moore of
compromise of other authenticators, cryptographic separation needs to
+
Microsoft, Jari Arkko of Ericsson, Dorothy Stanley of Aruba Networks,
be maintained between the keying material transported to each
+
Bob Moskowitz of TruSecure, Jesse Walker of Intel, Joe Salowey of
authenticator.  However, even where cryptographic separation is
+
Cisco, and Russ Housley of Vigil Security for useful feedback.
maintained, an attacker compromising an authenticator can still
+
 
disrupt the operation of other authenticators.  As noted in [RFC3579]
+
Appendix A - Exported Parameters in Existing Methods
Section 4.3.7, in the absence of spoofing detection within the AAA
 
infrastructure, it is possible for EAP authenticators to impersonate
 
each other.  By forging NAS identification attributes within
 
authentication messages, an attacker compromising one authenticator
 
could corrupt the neighbor graph, tricking the backend authentication
 
server into transporting keying material to arbitrary authenticators.
 
While this would not enable recovery of EAP keying material without
 
breaking fundamental cryptographic assumptions, it could enable
 
subsequent fraudulent accounting messages, or allow an attacker to
 
disrupt service by increasing load on the backend authentication
 
server or thrashing the authenticator key cache.
 
 
 
Since proactive key distribution requires the distribution of derived
 
keying material to candidate authenticators, the effectiveness of
 
this scheme depends on the ability of backend authentication server
 
to anticipate the movement of the EAP peer.  Since proactive key
 
distribution relies on backend authentication server knowledge of the
 
neighbor graph, it is most applicable to intra-domain handoff
 
scenarios.  However, in inter-domain handoff, where there can be many
 
authenticators, peers can frequently connect to authenticators that
 
have not been previously encountered, making it difficult for the
 
backend authentication server to derive a complete neighbor graph.
 
 
 
Since proactive key distribution schemes typically require
 
introduction of server-initiated messages as described in [RFC5176]
 
and [HANDOFF], security issues described in [RFC5176] Section 6 are
 
applicable, including authorization (Section 6.1) and replay
 
detection (Section 6.3) problems.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
=== AAA Bypass ===
 
 
 
Fast handoff techniques that enable elimination of the AAA exchange
 
(phase 1b) differ fundamentally from typical network access scenarios
 
(dial-up, wired LAN, etc.) that include user authentication as well
 
as authorization for the offered service.  Where the AAA exchange
 
(phase 1b) is omitted, authorizations and keying material are not
 
provided by the backend authentication server, and as a result, they
 
need to be supplied by other means.  This section describes some of
 
the implications.
 
 
 
==== Key Transport ====
 
 
 
Where transported keying material is not supplied by the backend
 
authentication server, it needs to be provided by another party
 
authorized to access that keying material.  As noted in Section 1.5,
 
only the EAP peer, authenticator, and server are authorized to
 
possess transported keying material.  Since EAP peers do not trust
 
each other, if the backend authentication server does not supply
 
transported keying material to a new authenticator, it can only be
 
provided by a previous authenticator.
 
 
 
As noted in Section 1.5, the goal of the EAP conversation is to
 
derive session keys known only to the peer and the authenticator.  If
 
keying material is replicated between a previous authenticator and a
 
new authenticator, then the previous authenticator can possess
 
session keys used between the peer and new authenticator.  Also, the
 
new authenticator can possess session keys used between the peer and
 
the previous authenticator.
 
 
 
If a one-way function is used to derive the keying material to be
 
transported to the new authenticator, then the new authenticator
 
cannot possess previous session keys without breaking a fundamental
 
cryptographic assumption.
 
 
 
==== Authorization ====
 
 
 
As a part of the authentication process, the backend authentication
 
server determines the user's authorization profile and transmits the
 
authorizations to the authenticator along with the transported keying
 
material.  Typically, the profile is determined based on the user
 
identity, but a certificate presented by the user can also provide
 
authorization information.
 
 
 
The backend authentication server is responsible for making a user
 
authorization decision, which requires answering the following
 
questions:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(a)  Is this a legitimate user of this network?
 
 
 
(b)  Is the user allowed to access this network?
 
 
 
(c)  Is the user permitted to access this network on this day and at
 
    this time?
 
 
 
(d)  Is the user within the concurrent session limit?
 
 
 
(e)  Are there any fraud, credit limit, or other concerns that could
 
    lead to access denial?
 
 
 
(f)  If access is to be granted, what are the service parameters
 
    (mandatory tunneling, bandwidth, filters, and so on) to be
 
    provisioned for the user?
 
 
 
While the authorization decision is, in principle, simple, the
 
distributed decision making process can add complexity.  Where
 
brokers or proxies are involved, all of the AAA entities in the chain
 
from the authenticator to the home backend authentication server are
 
involved in the decision.  For example, a broker can deny access even
 
if the home backend authentication server would allow it, or a proxy
 
can add authorizations (e.g., bandwidth limits).
 
 
 
Decisions can be based on static policy definitions and profiles as
 
well as dynamic state (e.g., time of day or concurrent session
 
limits).  In addition to the Accept/Reject decisions made by AAA
 
entities, service parameters or constraints can be communicated to
 
the authenticator.
 
 
 
The criteria for Accept/Reject decisions or the reasons for choosing
 
particular authorizations are typically not communicated to the
 
authenticator, only the final result is.  As a result, the
 
authenticator has no way to know on what the decision was based.  Was
 
a set of authorization parameters sent because this service is always
 
provided to the user, or was the decision based on the time of day
 
and the capabilities of the authenticator?
 
 
 
==== Correctness ====
 
 
 
When the AAA exchange (phase 1b) is bypassed, several challenges
 
arise in ensuring correct authorization:
 
 
 
Theft of service
 
  Bypassing the AAA exchange (phase 1b) SHOULD NOT enable a user to
 
  extend their network access or gain access to services they are
 
  not entitled to.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consideration of network-wide state
 
  Handoff techniques SHOULD NOT render the backend authentication
 
  server incapable of keeping track of network-wide state.  For
 
  example, a backend authentication server can need to keep track of
 
  simultaneous user sessions.
 
 
 
Elevation of privilege
 
  Backend authentication servers often perform conditional
 
  evaluation, in which the authorizations returned in an
 
  Access-Accept message are contingent on the authenticator or on
 
  dynamic state such as the time of day.  In this situation,
 
  bypassing the AAA exchange could enable unauthorized access unless
 
  the restrictions are explicitly encoded within the authorizations
 
  provided by the backend authentication server.
 
 
 
A handoff mechanism that provides proper authorization is said to be
 
"correct".  One condition for correctness is as follows:
 
 
 
  For a handoff to be "correct" it MUST establish on the new
 
  authenticator the same authorizations as would have been created
 
  had the new authenticator completed a AAA conversation with the
 
  backend authentication server.
 
 
 
A properly designed handoff scheme will only succeed if it is
 
"correct" in this way.  If a successful handoff would establish
 
"incorrect" authorizations, it is preferable for it to fail.  Where
 
the supported services differ between authenticators, a handoff that
 
bypasses the backend authentication server is likely to fail.
 
Section 1.1 of [RFC2865] states:
 
 
 
  A authenticator that does not implement a given service MUST NOT
 
  implement the RADIUS attributes for that service.  For example, a
 
  authenticator that is unable to offer ARAP service MUST NOT
 
  implement the RADIUS attributes for ARAP.  A authenticator MUST
 
  treat a RADIUS access-accept authorizing an unavailable service as
 
  an access-reject instead.
 
 
 
This behavior applies to attributes that are known, but not
 
implemented.  For attributes that are unknown, Section 5 of [RFC2865]
 
states:
 
 
 
  A RADIUS server MAY ignore Attributes with an unknown Type.  A
 
  RADIUS client MAY ignore Attributes with an unknown Type.
 
 
 
In order to perform a correct handoff, if a new authenticator is
 
provided with RADIUS authorizations for a known but unavailable
 
service, then it MUST process these authorizations the same way it
 
would handle a RADIUS Access-Accept requesting an unavailable
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
service;  this MUST cause the handoff to fail.  However, if a new
 
authenticator is provided with authorizations including unknown
 
attributes, then these attributes MAY be ignored.  The definition of
 
a "known but unsupported service" MUST encompass requests for
 
unavailable security services.  This includes vendor-specific
 
attributes related to security, such as those described in [RFC2548].
 
Although it can seem somewhat counter-intuitive, failure is indeed
 
the "correct" result where a known but unsupported service is
 
requested.
 
 
 
Presumably, a correctly configured backend authentication server
 
would not request that an authenticator provide a service that it
 
does not implement.  This implies that if the new authenticator were
 
to complete a AAA conversation, it would be likely to receive
 
different service instructions.  Failure of the handoff is the
 
desired result since it will cause the new authenticator to go back
 
to the backend server in order to receive the appropriate service
 
definition.
 
 
 
Handoff mechanisms that bypass the backend authentication server are
 
most likely to be successful when employed in a homogeneous
 
deployment within a single administrative domain.  In a heterogeneous
 
deployment, the backend authentication server can return different
 
authorizations depending on the authenticator making the request in
 
order to make sure that the requested service is consistent with the
 
authenticator capabilities.  Where a backend authentication server
 
would send different authorizations to the new authenticator than
 
were sent to a previous authenticator, transferring authorizations
 
between the previous authenticator and the new authenticator will
 
result in incorrect authorization.
 
 
 
Virtual LAN (VLAN) support is defined in [IEEE-802.1Q]; RADIUS
 
support for dynamic VLANs is described in [RFC3580] and [RFC4675].
 
If some authenticators support dynamic VLANs while others do not,
 
then attributes present in the Access-Request (such as the
 
NAS-Port-Type, NAS-IP-Address, NAS-IPv6-Address, and NAS-Identifier)
 
could be examined by the backend authentication server to determine
 
when VLAN attributes will be returned, and if so, which ones.
 
However, if the backend authenticator is bypassed, then a handoff
 
occurring between authenticators supporting different VLAN
 
capabilities could result in a user obtaining access to an
 
unauthorized VLAN (e.g., a user with access to a guest VLAN being
 
given unrestricted access to the network).
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Similarly, it is preferable for a handoff between an authenticator
 
providing confidentiality and another that does not to fail, since if
 
the handoff were successful, the user would be moved from a secure to
 
an insecure channel without permission from the backend
 
authentication server.
 
 
 
== Security Considerations ==
 
 
 
The EAP threat model is described in [RFC3748] Section 7.1.  The
 
security properties of EAP methods (known as "security claims") are
 
described in [RFC3748] Section 7.2.1.  EAP method requirements for
 
applications such as Wireless LAN authentication are described in
 
[RFC4017].  The RADIUS threat model is described in [RFC3579] Section
 
4.1, and responses to these threats are described in [RFC3579],
 
Sections 4.2 and 4.3.
 
 
 
However, in addition to threats against EAP and AAA, there are other
 
system level threats.  In developing the threat model, it is assumed
 
that:
 
 
 
  All traffic is visible to the attacker.
 
  The attacker can alter, forge, or replay messages.
 
  The attacker can reroute messages to another principal.
 
  The attacker can be a principal or an outsider.
 
  The attacker can compromise any key that is sufficiently old.
 
 
 
Threats arising from these assumptions include:
 
 
 
(a)  An attacker can compromise or steal an EAP peer or
 
    authenticator, in an attempt to gain access to other EAP peers
 
    or authenticators or to obtain long-term secrets.
 
 
 
(b)  An attacker can attempt a downgrade attack in order to exploit
 
    known weaknesses in an authentication method or cryptographic
 
    algorithm.
 
 
 
(c)  An attacker can try to modify or spoof packets, including
 
    Discovery or Secure Association Protocol frames, EAP or AAA
 
    packets.
 
 
 
(d)  An attacker can attempt to induce an EAP peer, authenticator, or
 
    server to disclose keying material to an unauthorized party, or
 
    utilize keying material outside the context that it was intended
 
    for.
 
 
 
(e)  An attacker can alter, forge, or replay packets.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(f)  An attacker can cause an EAP peer, authenticator, or server to
 
    reuse a stale key.  Use of stale keys can also occur
 
    unintentionally.  For example, a poorly implemented backend
 
    authentication server can provide stale keying material to an
 
    authenticator, or a poorly implemented authenticator can reuse
 
    nonces.
 
 
 
(g)  An authenticated attacker can attempt to obtain elevated
 
    privilege in order to access information that it does not have
 
    rights to.
 
 
 
(h)  An attacker can attempt a man-in-the-middle attack in order to
 
    gain access to the network.
 
 
 
(i)  An attacker can compromise an EAP authenticator in an effort to
 
    commit fraud.  For example, a compromised authenticator can
 
    provide incorrect information to the EAP peer and/or server via
 
    out-of-band mechanisms (such as via a AAA or lower-layer
 
    protocol).  This includes impersonating another authenticator,
 
    or providing inconsistent information to the peer and EAP
 
    server.
 
 
 
(j)  An attacker can launch a denial-of-service attack against the
 
    EAP peer, authenticator, or backend authentication server.
 
 
 
In order to address these threats, [RFC4962] Section 3 describes
 
required and recommended security properties.  The sections that
 
follow analyze the compliance of EAP methods, AAA protocols, and
 
Secure Association Protocols with those guidelines.
 
 
 
=== Peer and Authenticator Compromise ===
 
 
 
Requirement: In the event that an authenticator is compromised or
 
stolen, an attacker can gain access to the network through that
 
authenticator, or can obtain the credentials needed for the
 
authenticator/AAA client to communicate with one or more backend
 
authentication servers.  Similarly, if a peer is compromised or
 
stolen, an attacker can obtain credentials needed to communicate with
 
one or more authenticators.  A mandatory requirement from [RFC4962]
 
Section 3:
 
 
 
  Prevent the Domino effect
 
 
 
  Compromise of a single peer MUST NOT compromise keying material
 
  held by any other peer within the system, including session keys
 
  and long-term keys.  Likewise, compromise of a single
 
  authenticator MUST NOT compromise keying material held by any
 
  other authenticator within the system.  In the context of a key
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  hierarchy, this means that the compromise of one node in the key
 
  hierarchy must not disclose the information necessary to
 
  compromise other branches in the key hierarchy.  Obviously, the
 
  compromise of the root of the key hierarchy will compromise all of
 
  the keys; however, a compromise in one branch MUST NOT result in
 
  the compromise of other branches.  There are many implications of
 
  this requirement; however, two implications deserve highlighting.
 
  First, the scope of the keying material must be defined and
 
  understood by all parties that communicate with a party that holds
 
  that keying material.  Second, a party that holds keying material
 
  in a key hierarchy must not share that keying material with
 
  parties that are associated with other branches in the key
 
  hierarchy.
 
 
 
  Group keys are an obvious exception.  Since all members of the
 
  group have a copy of the same key, compromise of any one of the
 
  group members will result in the disclosure of the group key.
 
 
 
Some of the implications of the requirement are as follows:
 
 
 
Key Sharing
 
    In order to be able to determine whether keying material has
 
    been shared, it is necessary for the identity of the EAP
 
    authenticator (NAS-Identifier) to be defined and understood by
 
    all parties that communicate with it.  EAP lower-layer
 
    specifications such as [IEEE-802.11], [IEEE-802.16e],
 
    [IEEE-802.1X], IKEv2 [RFC4306], and PPP [RFC1661] do not involve
 
    key sharing.
 
 
 
AAA Credential Sharing
 
    AAA credentials (such as RADIUS shared secrets, IPsec pre-shared
 
    keys or certificates) MUST NOT be shared between AAA clients,
 
    since if one AAA client were compromised, this would enable an
 
    attacker to impersonate other AAA clients to the backend
 
    authentication server, or even to impersonate a backend
 
    authentication server to other AAA clients.
 
 
 
Compromise of Long-Term Credentials
 
    An attacker obtaining keying material (such as TSKs, TEKs, or
 
    the MSK) MUST NOT be able to obtain long-term user credentials
 
    such as pre-shared keys, passwords, or private-keys without
 
    breaking a fundamental cryptographic assumption.  The mandatory
 
    requirements of [RFC4017] Section 2.2 include generation of EAP
 
    keying material, capability to generate EAP keying material with
 
    128 bits of effective strength, resistance to dictionary
 
    attacks, shared state equivalence, and protection against
 
    man-in-the-middle attacks.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
=== Cryptographic Negotiation ===
 
 
 
Mandatory requirements from [RFC4962] Section 3:
 
 
 
  Cryptographic algorithm independent
 
 
 
  The AAA key management protocol MUST be cryptographic algorithm
 
  independent.  However, an EAP method MAY depend on a specific
 
  cryptographic algorithm.  The ability to negotiate the use of a
 
  particular cryptographic algorithm provides resilience against
 
  compromise of a particular cryptographic algorithm.  Algorithm
 
  independence is also REQUIRED with a Secure Association Protocol
 
  if one is defined.  This is usually accomplished by including an
 
  algorithm identifier and parameters in the protocol, and by
 
  specifying the algorithm requirements in the protocol
 
  specification.  While highly desirable, the ability to negotiate
 
  key derivation functions (KDFs) is not required.  For
 
  interoperability, at least one suite of mandatory-to-implement
 
  algorithms MUST be selected.  Note that without protection by
 
  IPsec as described in [RFC3579] Section 4.2, RADIUS [RFC2865] does
 
  not meet this requirement, since the integrity protection
 
  algorithm cannot be negotiated.
 
 
 
  This requirement does not mean that a protocol must support both
 
  public-key and symmetric-key cryptographic algorithms.  It means
 
  that the protocol needs to be structured in such a way that
 
  multiple public-key algorithms can be used whenever a public-key
 
  algorithm is employed.  Likewise, it means that the protocol needs
 
  to be structured in such a way that multiple symmetric-key
 
  algorithms can be used whenever a symmetric-key algorithm is
 
  employed.
 
 
 
  Confirm ciphersuite selection
 
 
 
  The selection of the "best" ciphersuite SHOULD be securely
 
  confirmed.  The mechanism SHOULD detect attempted roll-back
 
  attacks.
 
 
 
EAP methods satisfying [RFC4017] Section 2.2 mandatory requirements
 
and AAA protocols utilizing transmission-layer security are capable
 
of addressing downgrade attacks.  [RFC3748] Section 7.2.1 describes
 
the "protected ciphersuite negotiation" security claim that refers to
 
the ability of an EAP method to negotiate the ciphersuite used to
 
protect the EAP method conversation, as well as to integrity protect
 
the ciphersuite negotiation.  [RFC4017] Section 2.2 requires EAP
 
methods satisfying this security claim.  Since TLS v1.2 [RFC5246] and
 
IKEv2 [RFC4306] support negotiation of Key Derivation Functions
 
(KDFs), EAP methods based on TLS or IKEv2 will, if properly designed,
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
inherit this capability.  However, negotiation of KDFs is not
 
required by [[RFC4962|RFC 4962]] [RFC4962], and EAP methods based on neither TLS
 
nor IKEv2 typically do not support KDF negotiation.
 
 
 
When AAA protocols utilize TLS [RFC5246] or IPsec [RFC4301] for
 
transmission layer security, they can leverage the cryptographic
 
algorithm negotiation support provided by IKEv2 [RFC4306] or TLS
 
[RFC5246].  RADIUS [RFC3579] by itself does not support cryptographic
 
algorithm negotiation and relies on MD5 for integrity protection,
 
authentication, and confidentiality.  Given the known weaknesses in
 
MD5 [MD5Collision], this is undesirable, and can be addressed via use
 
of RADIUS over IPsec, as described in [RFC3579] Section 4.2.
 
 
 
To ensure against downgrade attacks within lower-layer protocols,
 
algorithm independence is REQUIRED with lower layers using EAP for
 
key derivation.  For interoperability, at least one suite of
 
mandatory-to-implement algorithms MUST be selected.  Lower-layer
 
protocols supporting EAP for key derivation SHOULD also support
 
secure ciphersuite negotiation as well as KDF negotiation.
 
 
 
As described in [RFC1968], PPP ECP does not support secure
 
ciphersuite negotiation.  While [IEEE-802.16e] and [IEEE-802.11]
 
support ciphersuite negotiation for protection of data, they do not
 
support negotiation of the cryptographic primitives used within the
 
Secure Association Protocol, such as message integrity checks (MICs)
 
and KDFs.
 
 
 
=== Confidentiality and Authentication ===
 
 
 
Mandatory requirements from [RFC4962] Section 3:
 
 
 
  Authenticate all parties
 
 
 
  Each party in the AAA key management protocol MUST be
 
  authenticated to the other parties with whom they communicate.
 
  Authentication mechanisms MUST maintain the confidentiality of any
 
  secret values used in the authentication process.  When a secure
 
  association protocol is used to establish session keys, the
 
  parties involved in the secure association protocol MUST identify
 
  themselves using identities that are meaningful in the lower-layer
 
  protocol environment that will employ the session keys.  In this
 
  situation, the authenticator and peer may be known by different
 
  identifiers in the AAA protocol environment and the lower-layer
 
  protocol environment, making authorization decisions difficult
 
  without a clear key scope.  If the lower-layer identifier of the
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  peer will be used to make authorization decisions, then the pair
 
  of identifiers associated with the peer MUST be authorized by the
 
  authenticator and/or the AAA server.
 
 
 
  AAA protocols, such as RADIUS [RFC2865] and Diameter [RFC3588],
 
  provide a mechanism for the identification of AAA clients; since
 
  the EAP authenticator and AAA client are always co-resident, this
 
  mechanism is applicable to the identification of EAP
 
  authenticators.
 
 
 
  When multiple base stations and a "controller" (such as a WLAN
 
  switch) comprise a single EAP authenticator, the "base station
 
  identity" is not relevant; the EAP method conversation takes place
 
  between the EAP peer and the EAP server.  Also, many base stations
 
  can share the same authenticator identity.  The authenticator
 
  identity is important in the AAA protocol exchange and the secure
 
  association protocol conversation.
 
 
 
  Authentication mechanisms MUST NOT employ plaintext passwords.
 
  Passwords may be used provided that they are not sent to another
 
  party without confidentiality protection.
 
 
 
  Keying material confidentiality and integrity
 
 
 
  While preserving algorithm independence, confidentiality and
 
  integrity of all keying material MUST be maintained.
 
 
 
Conformance to these requirements is analyzed in the sections that
 
follow.
 
 
 
==== Spoofing ====
 
 
 
Per-packet authentication and integrity protection provides
 
protection against spoofing attacks.
 
 
 
Diameter [RFC3588] provides support for per-packet authentication and
 
integrity protection via use of IPsec or TLS.  RADIUS/EAP [RFC3579]
 
provides for per-packet authentication and integrity protection via
 
use of the Message-Authenticator Attribute.
 
 
 
[RFC3748] Section 7.2.1 describes the "integrity protection" security
 
claim and [RFC4017] Section 2.2 requires EAP methods supporting this
 
claim.
 
 
 
In order to prevent forgery of Secure Association Protocol frames,
 
per-frame authentication and integrity protection is RECOMMENDED on
 
all messages.  IKEv2 [RFC4306] supports per-frame integrity
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
protection and authentication, as does the Secure Association
 
Protocol defined in [IEEE-802.16e].  [IEEE-802.11] supports per-frame
 
integrity protection and authentication on all messages within the
 
4-way handshake except the first message.  An attack leveraging this
 
omission is described in [Analysis].
 
 
 
==== Impersonation ====
 
 
 
Both RADIUS [RFC2865] and Diameter [RFC3588] implementations are
 
potentially vulnerable to a rogue authenticator impersonating another
 
authenticator.  While both protocols support mutual authentication
 
between the AAA client/authenticator and the backend authentication
 
server, the security mechanisms vary.
 
 
 
In RADIUS, the shared secret used for authentication is determined by
 
the source address of the RADIUS packet.  However, when RADIUS
 
Access-Requests are forwarded by a proxy, the NAS-IP-Address,
 
NAS-Identifier, or NAS-IPv6-Address attributes received by the RADIUS
 
server will not correspond to the source address.  As noted in
 
[RFC3579] Section 4.3.7, if the first-hop proxy does not check the
 
NAS identification attributes against the source address in the
 
Access-Request packet, it is possible for a rogue authenticator to
 
forge NAS-IP-Address [RFC2865], NAS-IPv6-Address [RFC3162], or
 
NAS-Identifier [RFC2865] attributes in order to impersonate another
 
authenticator; attributes such as the Called-Station-Id [RFC2865] and
 
Calling-Station-Id [RFC2865] can be forged as well.  Among other
 
things, this can result in messages (and transported keying material)
 
being sent to the wrong authenticator.
 
 
 
While [RFC3588] requires use of the Route-Record AVP, this utilizes
 
Fully Qualified Domain Names (FQDNs), so that impersonation detection
 
requires DNS A, AAAA, and PTR Resource Records (RRs) to be properly
 
configured.  As a result, Diameter is as vulnerable to this attack as
 
RADIUS, if not more so.  [RFC3579] Section 4.3.7 recommends
 
mechanisms for impersonation detection; to prevent access to keying
 
material by proxies without a "need to know", it is necessary to
 
allow the backend authentication server to communicate with the
 
authenticator directly, such as via the redirect functionality
 
supported in [RFC3588].
 
 
 
==== Channel Binding ====
 
 
 
It is possible for a compromised or poorly implemented EAP
 
authenticator to communicate incorrect information to the EAP peer
 
and/or server.  This can enable an authenticator to impersonate
 
another authenticator or communicate incorrect information via
 
out-of-band mechanisms (such as via AAA or the lower layer).
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Where EAP is used in pass-through mode, the EAP peer does not verify
 
the identity of the pass-through authenticator within the EAP
 
conversation.  Within the Secure Association Protocol, the EAP peer
 
and authenticator only demonstrate mutual possession of the
 
transported keying material; they do not mutually authenticate.  This
 
creates a potential security vulnerability, described in [RFC3748]
 
Section 7.15.
 
 
 
As described in [RFC3579] Section 4.3.7, it is possible for a
 
first-hop AAA proxy to detect a AAA client attempting to impersonate
 
another authenticator.  However, it is possible for a pass-through
 
authenticator acting as a AAA client to provide correct information
 
to the backend authentication server while communicating misleading
 
information to the EAP peer via the lower layer.
 
 
 
For example, a compromised authenticator can utilize another
 
authenticator's Called-Station-Id or NAS-Identifier in communicating
 
with the EAP peer via the lower layer.  Also, a pass-through
 
authenticator acting as a AAA client can provide an incorrect peer
 
Calling-Station-Id [RFC2865] [RFC3580] to the backend authentication
 
server via the AAA protocol.
 
 
 
As noted in [RFC3748] Section 7.15, this vulnerability can be
 
addressed by EAP methods that support a protected exchange of channel
 
properties such as endpoint identifiers, including (but not limited
 
to): Called-Station-Id [RFC2865] [RFC3580], Calling-Station-Id
 
[RFC2865] [RFC3580], NAS-Identifier [RFC2865], NAS-IP-Address
 
[RFC2865], and NAS-IPv6-Address [RFC3162].
 
 
 
Using such a protected exchange, it is possible to match the channel
 
properties provided by the authenticator via out-of-band mechanisms
 
against those exchanged within the EAP method.  Typically, the EAP
 
method imports channel binding parameters from the lower layer on the
 
peer, and transmits them securely to the EAP server, which exports
 
them to the lower layer or AAA layer.  However, transport can occur
 
from EAP server to peer, or can be bi-directional.  On the side of
 
the exchange (peer or server) where channel binding is verified, the
 
lower layer or AAA layer passes the result of the verification (TRUE
 
or FALSE) up to the EAP method.  While the verification can be done
 
either by the peer or the server, typically only the server has the
 
knowledge to determine the correctness of the values, as opposed to
 
merely verifying their equality.  For further discussion, see
 
[EAP-SERVICE].
 
 
 
It is also possible to perform channel binding without transporting
 
data over EAP, as described in [EAP-CHANNEL].  In this approach the
 
EAP method includes channel binding parameters in the calculation of
 
exported EAP keying material, making it impossible for the peer and
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
authenticator to complete the Secure Association Protocol if there is
 
a mismatch in the channel binding parameters.  However, this approach
 
can only be applied where methods generating EAP keying material are
 
used along with lower layers that utilize EAP keying material.  For
 
example, this mechanism would not enable verification of channel
 
binding on wired IEEE 802 networks using [IEEE-802.1X].
 
 
 
==== Mutual Authentication ====
 
 
 
[RFC3748] Section 7.2.1 describes the "mutual authentication" and
 
"dictionary attack resistance" claims, and [RFC4017] requires EAP
 
methods satisfying these claims.  EAP methods complying with
 
[RFC4017] therefore provide for mutual authentication between the EAP
 
peer and server.
 
 
 
[RFC3748] Section 7.2.1 also describes the "Cryptographic binding"
 
security claim, and [RFC4017] Section 2.2 requires support for this
 
claim.  As described in [EAP-BINDING], EAP method sequences and
 
compound authentication mechanisms can be subject to
 
man-in-the-middle attacks.  When such attacks are successfully
 
carried out, the attacker acts as an intermediary between a victim
 
and a legitimate authenticator.  This allows the attacker to
 
authenticate successfully to the authenticator, as well as to obtain
 
access to the network.
 
 
 
In order to prevent these attacks, [EAP-BINDING] recommends
 
derivation of a compound key by which the EAP peer and server can
 
prove that they have participated in the entire EAP exchange.  Since
 
the compound key MUST NOT be known to an attacker posing as an
 
authenticator, and yet must be derived from EAP keying material, it
 
MAY be desirable to derive the compound key from a portion of the
 
EMSK.  Where this is done, in order to provide proper key hygiene, it
 
is RECOMMENDED that the compound key used for man-in-the-middle
 
protection be cryptographically separate from other keys derived from
 
the EMSK.
 
 
 
Diameter [RFC3588] provides for per-packet authentication and
 
integrity protection via IPsec or TLS, and RADIUS/EAP [RFC3579] also
 
provides for per-packet authentication and integrity protection.
 
Where the authenticator/AAA client and backend authentication server
 
communicate directly and credible key wrap is used (see Section 3.8),
 
this ensures that the AAA Key Transport (phase 1b) achieves its
 
security objectives: mutually authenticating the AAA
 
client/authenticator and backend authentication server and providing
 
transported keying material to the EAP authenticator and to no other
 
party.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
[RFC2607] Section 7 describes the security issues occurring when the
 
authenticator/AAA client and backend authentication server do not
 
communicate directly.  Where a AAA intermediary is present (such as a
 
RADIUS proxy or a Diameter agent), and data object security is not
 
used, transported keying material can be recovered by an attacker in
 
control of the intermediary.  As discussed in Section 2.1, unless the
 
TSKs are derived independently from EAP keying material (as in
 
IKEv2), possession of transported keying material enables decryption
 
of data traffic sent between the peer and the authenticator to whom
 
the keying material was transported.  It also allows the AAA
 
intermediary to impersonate the authenticator or the peer.  Since the
 
peer does not authenticate to a AAA intermediary, it has no ability
 
to determine whether it is authentic or authorized to obtain keying
 
material.
 
 
 
However, as long as transported keying material or keys derived from
 
it are only utilized by a single authenticator, compromise of the
 
transported keying material does not enable an attacker to
 
impersonate the peer to another authenticator.  Vulnerability to
 
compromise of a AAA intermediary can be mitigated by implementation
 
of redirect functionality, as described in [RFC3588] and [RFC4072].
 
 
 
The Secure Association Protocol does not provide for mutual
 
authentication between the EAP peer and authenticator, only mutual
 
proof of possession of transported keying material.  In order for the
 
peer to verify the identity of the authenticator, mutual proof of
 
possession needs to be combined with impersonation prevention and
 
channel binding.  Impersonation prevention (described in Section
 
5.3.2) enables the backend authentication server to determine that
 
the transported keying material has been provided to the correct
 
authenticator.  When utilized along with impersonation prevention,
 
channel binding (described in Section 5.3.3) enables the EAP peer to
 
verify that the EAP server has authorized the authenticator to
 
possess the transported keying material.  Completion of the Secure
 
Association Protocol exchange demonstrates that the EAP peer and the
 
authenticator possess the transported keying material.
 
 
 
=== Key Binding ===
 
 
 
Mandatory requirement from [RFC4962] Section 3:
 
 
 
  Bind key to its context
 
 
 
  Keying material MUST be bound to the appropriate context.  The
 
  context includes the following:
 
 
 
  o  The manner in which the keying material is expected to be used.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  o  The other parties that are expected to have access to the
 
      keying material.
 
 
 
  o  The expected lifetime of the keying material.  Lifetime of a
 
      child key SHOULD NOT be greater than the lifetime of its parent
 
      in the key hierarchy.
 
 
 
  Any party with legitimate access to keying material can determine
 
  its context.  In addition, the protocol MUST ensure that all
 
  parties with legitimate access to keying material have the same
 
  context for the keying material.  This requires that the parties
 
  are properly identified and authenticated, so that all of the
 
  parties that have access to the keying material can be determined.
 
 
 
  The context will include the peer and NAS identities in more than
 
  one form.  One (or more) name form is needed to identify these
 
  parties in the authentication exchange and the AAA protocol.
 
  Another name form may be needed to identify these parties within
 
  the lower layer that will employ the session key.
 
 
 
Within EAP, exported keying material (MSK, EMSK,IV) is bound to the
 
Peer-Id(s) and Server-Id(s), which are exported along with the keying
 
material.  However, not all EAP methods support authenticated server
 
identities (see Appendix A).
 
 
 
Within the AAA protocol, transported keying material is destined for
 
the EAP authenticator identified by the NAS-Identifier Attribute
 
within the request, and is for use by the EAP peer identified by the
 
Peer-Id(s), User-Name [RFC2865], or Chargeable User Identity (CUI)
 
[RFC4372] attributes.  The maximum lifetime of the transported keying
 
material can be provided, as discussed in Section 3.5.1.  Key usage
 
restrictions can also be included as described in Section 3.2.  Key
 
lifetime issues are discussed in Sections 3.3, 3.4, and 3.5.
 
 
 
=== Authorization ===
 
 
 
Requirement: The Secure Association Protocol (phase 2) conversation
 
may utilize different identifiers from the EAP conversation (phase
 
1a), so that binding between the EAP and Secure Association Protocol
 
identities is REQUIRED.
 
 
 
Mandatory requirement from [RFC4962] Section 3:
 
 
 
  Peer and authenticator authorization
 
 
 
  Peer and authenticator authorization MUST be performed.  These
 
  entities MUST demonstrate possession of the appropriate keying
 
  material, without disclosing it.  Authorization is REQUIRED
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  whenever a peer associates with a new authenticator.  The
 
  authorization checking prevents an elevation of privilege attack,
 
  and it ensures that an unauthorized authenticator is detected.
 
 
 
  Authorizations SHOULD be synchronized between the peer, NAS, and
 
  backend authentication server.  Once the AAA key management
 
  protocol exchanges are complete, all of these parties should hold
 
  a common view of the authorizations associated with the other
 
  parties.
 
 
 
  In addition to authenticating all parties, key management
 
  protocols need to demonstrate that the parties are authorized to
 
  possess keying material.  Note that proof of possession of keying
 
  material does not necessarily prove authorization to hold that
 
  keying material.  For example, within an IEEE 802.11, the 4-way
 
  handshake demonstrates that both the peer and authenticator
 
  possess the same EAP keying material.  However, by itself, this
 
  possession proof does not demonstrate that the authenticator was
 
  authorized by the backend authentication server to possess that
 
  keying material.  As noted in [RFC3579] in Section 4.3.7, where
 
  AAA proxies are present, it is possible for one authenticator to
 
  impersonate another, unless each link in the AAA chain implements
 
  checks against impersonation.  Even with these checks in place, an
 
  authenticator may still claim different identities to the peer and
 
  the backend authentication server.  As described in [RFC3748]
 
  Section 7.15, channel binding is required to enable the peer to
 
  verify that the authenticator claim of identity is both consistent
 
  and correct.
 
 
 
Recommendation from [RFC4962] Section 3:
 
 
 
  Authorization restriction
 
 
 
  If peer authorization is restricted, then the peer SHOULD be made
 
  aware of the restriction.  Otherwise, the peer may inadvertently
 
  attempt to circumvent the restriction.  For example, authorization
 
  restrictions in an IEEE 802.11 environment include:
 
 
 
  o  Key lifetimes, where the keying material can only be used for a
 
      certain period of time;
 
 
 
  o  SSID restrictions, where the keying material can only be used
 
      with a specific IEEE 802.11 SSID;
 
 
 
  o  Called-Station-ID restrictions, where the keying material can
 
      only be used with a single IEEE 802.11 BSSID; and
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  o  Calling-Station-ID restrictions, where the keying material can
 
      only be used with a single peer IEEE 802 MAC address.
 
 
 
As described in Section 2.3, consistent identification of the EAP
 
authenticator enables the EAP peer to determine the scope of keying
 
material provided to an authenticator, as well as to confirm with the
 
backend authentication server that an EAP authenticator proving
 
possession of EAP keying material during the Secure Association
 
Protocol was authorized to obtain it.
 
 
 
Within the AAA protocol, the authorization attributes are bound to
 
the transported keying material.  While the AAA exchange provides the
 
AAA client/authenticator with authorizations relating to the EAP
 
peer, neither the EAP nor AAA exchanges provide authorizations to the
 
EAP peer.  In order to ensure that all parties hold the same view of
 
the authorizations, it is RECOMMENDED that the Secure Association
 
Protocol enable communication of authorizations between the EAP
 
authenticator and peer.
 
 
 
In lower layers where the authenticator consistently identifies
 
itself to the peer and backend authentication server and the EAP peer
 
completes the Secure Association Protocol exchange with the same
 
authenticator through which it completed the EAP conversation,
 
authorization of the authenticator is demonstrated to the peer by
 
mutual authentication between the peer and authenticator as discussed
 
in the previous section.  Identification issues are discussed in
 
Sections 2.3, 2.4, and 2.5 and key scope issues are discussed in
 
Section 3.2.
 
 
 
Where the EAP peer utilizes different identifiers within the EAP
 
method and Secure Association Protocol conversations, peer
 
authorization can be difficult to demonstrate to the authenticator
 
without additional restrictions.  This problem does not exist in
 
IKEv2 where the Identity Payload is used for peer identification both
 
within IKEv2 and EAP, and where the EAP conversation is
 
cryptographically protected within IKEv2 binding the EAP and IKEv2
 
exchanges.  However, within [IEEE-802.11], the EAP peer identity is
 
not used within the 4-way handshake, so that it is necessary for the
 
authenticator to require that the EAP peer utilize the same MAC
 
address for EAP authentication as for the 4-way handshake.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
=== Replay Protection ===
 
 
 
Mandatory requirement from [RFC4962] Section 3:
 
 
 
  Replay detection mechanism
 
 
 
  The AAA key management protocol exchanges MUST be replay
 
  protected, including AAA, EAP and Secure Association Protocol
 
  exchanges.  Replay protection allows a protocol message recipient
 
  to discard any message that was recorded during a previous
 
  legitimate dialogue and presented as though it belonged to the
 
  current dialogue.
 
 
 
[RFC3748] Section 7.2.1 describes the "replay protection" security
 
claim, and [RFC4017] Section 2.2 requires use of EAP methods
 
supporting this claim.
 
 
 
Diameter [RFC3588] provides support for replay protection via use of
 
IPsec or TLS.  "RADIUS Support for EAP" [RFC3579] protects against
 
replay of keying material via the Request Authenticator.  According
 
to [RFC2865] Section 3:
 
 
 
  In Access-Request Packets, the Authenticator value is a 16 octet
 
  random number, called the Request Authenticator.
 
 
 
However, some RADIUS packets are not replay protected.  In
 
Accounting, Disconnect, and Care-of Address (CoA)-Request packets,
 
the Request Authenticator contains a keyed Message Integrity Code
 
(MIC) rather than a nonce.  The Response Authenticator in Accounting,
 
Disconnect, and CoA-Response packets also contains a keyed MIC whose
 
calculation does not depend on a nonce in either the Request or
 
Response packets.  Therefore, unless an Event-Timestamp attribute is
 
included or IPsec is used, it is possible that the recipient will not
 
be able to determine whether these packets have been replayed.  This
 
issue is discussed further in [RFC5176] Section 6.3.
 
 
 
In order to prevent replay of Secure Association Protocol frames,
 
replay protection is REQUIRED on all messages.  [IEEE-802.11]
 
supports replay protection on all messages within the 4-way
 
handshake; IKEv2 [RFC4306] also supports this.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
=== Key Freshness ===
 
 
 
Requirement: A session key SHOULD be considered compromised if it
 
remains in use beyond its authorized lifetime.  Mandatory requirement
 
from [RFC4962] Section 3:
 
 
 
  Strong, fresh session keys
 
 
 
  While preserving algorithm independence, session keys MUST be
 
  strong and fresh.  Each session deserves an independent session
 
  key.  Fresh keys are required even when a long replay counter
 
  (that is, one that "will never wrap") is used to ensure that loss
 
  of state does not cause the same counter value to be used more
 
  than once with the same session key.
 
 
 
  Some EAP methods are capable of deriving keys of varying strength,
 
  and these EAP methods MUST permit the generation of keys meeting a
 
  minimum equivalent key strength.  [[BCP86|BCP 86]] [RFC3766] offers advice
 
  on appropriate key sizes.  The National Institute for Standards
 
  and Technology (NIST) also offers advice on appropriate key sizes
 
  in [SP800-57].
 
 
 
  A fresh cryptographic key is one that is generated specifically
 
  for the intended use.  In this situation, a secure association
 
  protocol is used to establish session keys.  The AAA protocol and
 
  EAP method MUST ensure that the keying material supplied as an
 
  input to session key derivation is fresh, and the secure
 
  association protocol MUST generate a separate session key for each
 
  session, even if the keying material provided by EAP is cached.  A
 
  cached key persists after the authentication exchange has
 
  completed.  For the AAA/EAP server, key caching can happen when
 
  state is kept on the server.  For the NAS or client, key caching
 
  can happen when the NAS or client does not destroy keying material
 
  immediately following the derivation of session keys.
 
 
 
  Session keys MUST NOT be dependent on one another.  Multiple
 
  session keys may be derived from a higher-level shared secret as
 
  long as a one-time value, usually called a nonce, is used to
 
  ensure that each session key is fresh.  The mechanism used to
 
  generate session keys MUST ensure that the disclosure of one
 
  session key does not aid the attacker in discovering any other
 
  session keys.
 
 
 
EAP, AAA, and the lower layer each bear responsibility for ensuring
 
the use of fresh, strong session keys.  EAP methods need to ensure
 
the freshness and strength of EAP keying material provided as an
 
input to session key derivation.  [RFC3748] Section 7.10 states:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  EAP methods SHOULD ensure the freshness of the MSK and EMSK, even
 
  in cases where one party may not have a high quality random number
 
  generator.  A RECOMMENDED method is for each party to provide a
 
  nonce of at least 128 bits, used in the derivation of the MSK and
 
  EMSK.
 
 
 
The contribution of nonces enables the EAP peer and server to ensure
 
that exported EAP keying material is fresh.
 
 
 
[RFC3748] Section 7.2.1 describes the "key strength" and "session
 
independence" security claims, and [RFC4017] requires EAP methods
 
supporting these claims as well as methods capable of providing
 
equivalent key strength of 128 bits or greater.  See Section 3.7 for
 
more information on key strength.
 
 
 
The AAA protocol needs to ensure that transported keying material is
 
fresh and is not utilized outside its recommended lifetime.  Replay
 
protection is necessary for key freshness, but an attacker can
 
deliver a stale (and therefore potentially compromised) key in a
 
replay-protected message, so replay protection is not sufficient.  As
 
discussed in Section 3.5, the Session-Timeout Attribute enables the
 
backend authentication server to limit the exposure of transported
 
keying material.
 
 
 
The EAP Session-Id, described in Section 1.4, enables the EAP peer,
 
authenticator, and server to distinguish EAP conversations.  However,
 
unless the authenticator keeps track of EAP Session-Ids, the
 
authenticator cannot use the Session-Id to guarantee the freshness of
 
keying material.
 
 
 
The Secure Association Protocol, described in Section 3.1, MUST
 
generate a fresh session key for each session, even if the EAP keying
 
material and parameters provided by methods are cached, or either the
 
peer or authenticator lack a high entropy random number generator.  A
 
RECOMMENDED method is for the peer and authenticator to each provide
 
a nonce or counter used in session key derivation.  If a nonce is
 
used, it is RECOMMENDED that it be at least 128 bits.  While
 
[IEEE-802.11] and IKEv2 [RFC4306] satisfy this requirement,
 
[IEEE-802.16e] does not, since randomness is only contributed from
 
the Base Station.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
=== Key Scope Limitation ===
 
 
 
Mandatory requirement from [RFC4962] Section 3:
 
 
 
  Limit key scope
 
 
 
  Following the principle of least privilege, parties MUST NOT have
 
  access to keying material that is not needed to perform their
 
  role.  A party has access to a particular key if it has access to
 
  all of the secret information needed to derive it.
 
 
 
  Any protocol that is used to establish session keys MUST specify
 
  the scope for session keys, clearly identifying the parties to
 
  whom the session key is available.
 
 
 
Transported keying material is permitted to be accessed by the EAP
 
peer, authenticator and server.  The EAP peer and server derive EAP
 
keying material during the process of mutually authenticating each
 
other using the selected EAP method.  During the Secure Association
 
Protocol exchange, the EAP peer utilizes keying material to
 
demonstrate to the authenticator that it is the same party that
 
authenticated to the EAP server and was authorized by it.  The EAP
 
authenticator utilizes the transported keying material to prove to
 
the peer not only that the EAP conversation was transported through
 
it (this could be demonstrated by a man-in-the-middle), but that it
 
was uniquely authorized by the EAP server to provide the peer with
 
access to the network.  Unique authorization can only be demonstrated
 
if the EAP authenticator does not share the transported keying
 
material with a party other than the EAP peer and server.  TSKs are
 
permitted to be accessed only by the EAP peer and authenticator (see
 
Section 1.5); TSK derivation is discussed in Section 2.1.  Since
 
demonstration of authorization within the Secure Association Protocol
 
exchange depends on possession of transported keying material, the
 
backend authentication server can obtain TSKs unless it deletes the
 
transported keying material after sending it.
 
 
 
=== Key Naming ===
 
 
 
Mandatory requirement from [RFC4962] Section 3:
 
 
 
  Uniquely named keys
 
 
 
  AAA key management proposals require a robust key naming scheme,
 
  particularly where key caching is supported.  The key name
 
  provides a way to refer to a key in a protocol so that it is clear
 
  to all parties which key is being referenced.  Objects that cannot
 
  be named cannot be managed.  All keys MUST be uniquely named, and
 
  the key name MUST NOT directly or indirectly disclose the keying
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  material.  If the key name is not based on the keying material,
 
  then one can be sure that it cannot be used to assist in a search
 
  for the key value.
 
 
 
EAP key names (defined in Section 1.4.1), along with the Peer-Id(s)
 
and Server-Id(s), uniquely identify EAP keying material, and do not
 
directly or indirectly expose EAP keying material.
 
 
 
Existing AAA server implementations do not distribute key names along
 
with the transported keying material.  However, Diameter EAP
 
[RFC4072] Section 4.1.4 defines the EAP-Key-Name AVP for the purpose
 
of transporting the EAP Session-Id.  Since the EAP-Key-Name AVP is
 
defined within the RADIUS attribute space, it can be used either with
 
RADIUS or Diameter.
 
 
 
Since the authenticator is not provided with the name of the
 
transported keying material by existing backend authentication server
 
implementations, existing Secure Association Protocols do not utilize
 
EAP key names.  For example, [IEEE-802.11] supports PMK caching; to
 
enable the peer and authenticator to determine the cached PMK to
 
utilize within the 4-way handshake, the PMK needs to be named.  For
 
this purpose, [IEEE-802.11] utilizes a PMK naming scheme that is
 
based on the key.  Since IKEv2 [RFC4306] does not cache transported
 
keying material, it does not need to refer to transported keying
 
material.
 
 
 
=== Denial-of-Service Attacks ===
 
 
 
Key caching can result in vulnerability to denial-of-service attacks.
 
For example, EAP methods that create persistent state can be
 
vulnerable to denial-of-service attacks on the EAP server by a rogue
 
EAP peer.
 
 
 
To address this vulnerability, EAP methods creating persistent state
 
can limit the persistent state created by an EAP peer.  For example,
 
for each peer an EAP server can choose to limit persistent state to a
 
few EAP conversations, distinguished by the EAP Session-Id.  This
 
prevents a rogue peer from denying access to other peers.
 
 
 
Similarly, to conserve resources an authenticator can choose to limit
 
the persistent state corresponding to each peer.  This can be
 
accomplished by limiting each peer to persistent state corresponding
 
to a few EAP conversations, distinguished by the EAP Session-Id.
 
 
 
Whether creation of new TSKs implies deletion of previously derived
 
TSKs depends on the EAP lower layer.  Where there is no implied
 
deletion, the authenticator can choose to limit the number of TSKs
 
and associated state that can be stored for each peer.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
== References ==
 
 
 
=== Normative References ===
 
 
 
[RFC2119]      Bradner, S., "Key words for use in RFCs to Indicate              Requirement Levels", [[BCP14|BCP 14]], [[RFC2119|RFC 2119]], March 1997.
 
[RFC3748]      Aboba, B., Blunk, L., Vollbrecht, J., Carlson, J., and              H. Levkowetz, Ed., "Extensible Authentication Protocol              (EAP)", [[RFC3748|RFC 3748]], June 2004.
 
[RFC4962]      Housley, R. and B. Aboba, "Guidance for              Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA)              Key Management", [[BCP132|BCP 132]], [[RFC4962|RFC 4962]], July 2007.
 
=== Informative References ===
 
 
 
[8021XPreAuth] Pack, S. and Y. Choi, "Pre-Authenticated Fast Handoff              in a Public Wireless LAN Based on IEEE 802.1x Model",              Proceedings of the IFIP TC6/WG6.8 Working Conference              on Personal Wireless Communications, p.175-182,              October 23-25, 2002.
 
[Analysis]    He, C. and J. Mitchell, "Analysis of the 802.11i 4-Way              Handshake", Proceedings of the 2004 ACM Workshop on              Wireless Security, pp. 43-50, ISBN: 1-58113-925-X.
 
[Bargh]        Bargh, M., Hulsebosch, R., Eertink, E., Prasad, A.,              Wang, H. and P. Schoo, "Fast Authentication Methods              for Handovers between IEEE 802.11 Wireless LANs",              Proceedings of the 2nd ACM international workshop on              Wireless mobile applications and services on WLAN              hotspots, October, 2004.
 
[GKDP]        Dondeti, L., Xiang, J., and S. Rowles, "GKDP: Group              Key Distribution Protocol", Work in Progress, March              2006.
 
[He]          He, C., Sundararajan, M., Datta, A. Derek, A. and J.              C.  Mitchell, "A Modular Correctness Proof of TLS and              IEEE 802.11i", ACM Conference on Computer and              Communications Security (CCS '05), November, 2005.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
[IEEE-802.11]  Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,              "Information technology - Telecommunications and              information exchange between systems - Local and              metropolitan area networks - Specific Requirements              Part 11:  Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and              Physical Layer (PHY) Specifications", IEEE Standard              802.11-2007, 2007.
 
[IEEE-802.1X]  Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,              "Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Port-Based              Network Access Control", IEEE Standard 802.1X-2004,              December 2004.
 
[IEEE-802.1Q]  IEEE Standards for Local and Metropolitan Area              Networks:  Draft Standard for Virtual Bridged Local              Area Networks, P802.1Q-2003, January 2003.
 
[IEEE-802.11i] Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,              "Supplement to Standard for Telecommunications and              Information Exchange Between Systems - LAN/MAN              Specific Requirements - Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium              Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)              Specifications:  Specification for Enhanced Security",              IEEE 802.11i/D1, 2001.
 
[IEEE-802.11F] Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,              "Recommended Practice for Multi-Vendor Access Point              Interoperability via an Inter-Access Point Protocol              Across Distribution Systems Supporting IEEE 802.11              Operation", IEEE 802.11F, July 2003 (now deprecated).
 
[IEEE-802.16e] Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,              "IEEE Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area              Networks: Part 16: Air Interface for Fixed and Mobile              Broadband Wireless Access Systems: Amendment for              Physical and Medium Access Control Layers for Combined              Fixed and Mobile Operations in Licensed Bands" IEEE              802.16e, August 2005.
 
[IEEE-03-084]  Mishra, A., Shin, M., Arbaugh, W., Lee, I. and K.              Jang, "Proactive Key Distribution to support fast and              secure roaming", IEEE 802.11 Working Group, IEEE-03-              084r1-I, http://www.ieee802.org/11/Documents/              DocumentHolder/3-084.zip, January 2003.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
[EAP-SERVICE]  Arkko, J. and P. Eronen, "Authenticated Service              Information for the Extensible Authentication Protocol              (EAP)", Work in Progress, October 2005.
 
[SHORT-TERM]  Friedman, A., Sheffer, Y., and A. Shaqed, "Short-Term              Certificates", Work in Progress, June 2007.
 
[HANDOFF]      Arbaugh, W. and B. Aboba, "Handoff Extension to              RADIUS", Work in Progress, October 2003.
 
[EAP-CHANNEL]  Ohba, Y., Parthasrathy, M., and M. Yanagiya, "Channel              Binding Mechanism Based on Parameter Binding in Key              Derivation", Work in Progress, June 2007.
 
[EAP-BINDING]  Puthenkulam, J., Lortz, V., Palekar, A., and D. Simon,              "The Compound Authentication Binding Problem", Work in              Progress, October 2003.
 
[MD5Collision] Klima, V., "Tunnels in Hash Functions: MD5 Collisions              Within a Minute", Cryptology ePrint Archive, March              2006, http://eprint.iacr.org/2006/105.pdf
 
[MishraPro]    Mishra, A., Shin, M. and W. Arbaugh, "Pro-active Key              Distribution using Neighbor Graphs", IEEE Wireless              Communications, vol. 11, February 2004.
 
[RFC1661]      Simpson, W., Ed., "The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)",              STD 51, [[RFC1661|RFC 1661]], July 1994.
 
[RFC1968]      Meyer, G., "The PPP Encryption Control Protocol              (ECP)", [[RFC1968|RFC 1968]], June 1996.
 
[RFC2230]      Atkinson, R., "Key Exchange Delegation Record for the              DNS", [[RFC2230|RFC 2230]], November 1997.
 
[RFC2409]      Harkins, D. and D. Carrel, "The Internet Key Exchange              (IKE)", [[RFC2409|RFC 2409]], November 1998.
 
[RFC2516]      Mamakos, L., Lidl, K., Evarts, J., Carrel, D., Simone,              D., and R. Wheeler, "A Method for Transmitting PPP              Over Ethernet (PPPoE)", [[RFC2516|RFC 2516]], February 1999.
 
[RFC2548]      Zorn, G., "Microsoft Vendor-specific RADIUS              Attributes", [[RFC2548|RFC 2548]], March 1999.
 
[RFC2607]      Aboba, B. and J. Vollbrecht, "Proxy Chaining and              Policy Implementation in Roaming", [[RFC2607|RFC 2607]], June              1999.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
[RFC2716]      Aboba, B. and D. Simon, "PPP EAP TLS Authentication              Protocol", [[RFC2716|RFC 2716]], October 1999.
 
[RFC2782]      Gulbrandsen, A., Vixie, P., and L. Esibov, "A DNS RR              for specifying the location of services (DNS SRV)",              [[RFC2782|RFC 2782]], February 2000.
 
[RFC2845]      Vixie, P., Gudmundsson, O., Eastlake 3rd, D., and B.              Wellington, "Secret Key Transaction Authentication for              DNS (TSIG)", [[RFC2845|RFC 2845]], May 2000.
 
[RFC2865]      Rigney, C., Willens, S., Rubens, A., and W. Simpson,              "Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS)",              [[RFC2865|RFC 2865]], June 2000.
 
[RFC3007]      Wellington, B., "Secure Domain Name System (DNS)              Dynamic Update", [[RFC3007|RFC 3007]], November 2000.
 
[RFC3162]      Aboba, B., Zorn, G., and D. Mitton, "RADIUS and IPv6",              [[RFC3162|RFC 3162]], August 2001.
 
[RFC3547]      Baugher, M., Weis, B., Hardjono, T., and H. Harney,              "The Group Domain of Interpretation", [[RFC3547|RFC 3547]], July              2003.
 
[RFC3579]      Aboba, B. and P. Calhoun, "RADIUS (Remote              Authentication Dial In User Service) Support For              Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)", [[RFC3579|RFC 3579]],              September 2003.
 
[RFC3580]      Congdon, P., Aboba, B., Smith, A., Zorn, G., and J.              Roese, "IEEE 802.1X Remote Authentication Dial In User              Service (RADIUS) Usage Guidelines", [[RFC3580|RFC 3580]],              September 2003.
 
[RFC3588]      Calhoun, P., Loughney, J., Guttman, E., Zorn, G., and              J. Arkko, "Diameter Base Protocol", [[RFC3588|RFC 3588]],              September 2003.
 
[RFC3766]      Orman, H. and P. Hoffman, "Determining Strengths For              Public Keys Used For Exchanging Symmetric Keys", BCP              86, [[RFC3766|RFC 3766]], April 2004.
 
[RFC3830]      Arkko, J., Carrara, E., Lindholm, F., Naslund, M., and              K. Norrman, "MIKEY: Multimedia Internet KEYing", RFC              3830, August 2004.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
[RFC4005]      Calhoun, P., Zorn, G., Spence, D., and D. Mitton,              "Diameter Network Access Server Application", RFC              4005, August 2005.
 
[RFC4017]      Stanley, D., Walker, J., and B. Aboba, "Extensible              Authentication Protocol (EAP) Method Requirements for              Wireless LANs", [[RFC4017|RFC 4017]], March 2005.
 
[RFC4033]      Arends, R., Austein, R., Larson, M., Massey, D., and              S. Rose, "DNS Security Introduction and Requirements",              [[RFC4033|RFC 4033]], March 2005.
 
[RFC4035]      Arends, R., Austein, R., Larson, M., Massey, D., and              S. Rose, "Protocol Modifications for the DNS Security              Extensions", [[RFC4035|RFC 4035]], March 2005.
 
[RFC4067]      Loughney, J., Ed., Nakhjiri, M., Perkins, C., and R.              Koodli, "Context Transfer Protocol (CXTP)", [[RFC4067|RFC 4067]],              July 2005.
 
[RFC4072]      Eronen, P., Ed., Hiller, T., and G. Zorn, "Diameter              Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) Application",              [[RFC4072|RFC 4072]], August 2005.
 
[RFC4118]      Yang, L., Zerfos, P., and E. Sadot, "Architecture              Taxonomy for Control and Provisioning of Wireless              Access Points (CAPWAP)", [[RFC4118|RFC 4118]], June 2005.
 
[RFC4186]      Haverinen, H., Ed., and J. Salowey, Ed., "Extensible              Authentication Protocol Method for Global System for              Mobile Communications (GSM) Subscriber Identity              Modules (EAP-SIM)", [[RFC4186|RFC 4186]], January 2006.
 
[RFC4187]      Arkko, J. and H. Haverinen, "Extensible Authentication              Protocol Method for 3rd Generation Authentication and              Key Agreement (EAP-AKA)", [[RFC4187|RFC 4187]], January 2006.
 
[RFC4282]      Aboba, B., Beadles, M., Arkko, J., and P. Eronen, "The              Network Access Identifier", [[RFC4282|RFC 4282]], December 2005.
 
[RFC4284]      Adrangi, F., Lortz, V., Bari, F., and P. Eronen,              "Identity Selection Hints for the Extensible              Authentication Protocol (EAP)", [[RFC4284|RFC 4284]], January              2006.
 
[RFC4301]      Kent, S. and K. Seo, "Security Architecture for the              Internet Protocol", [[RFC4301|RFC 4301]], December 2005.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
[RFC4306]      Kaufman, C., Ed., "Internet Key Exchange (IKEv2)              Protocol", [[RFC4306|RFC 4306]], December 2005.
 
[RFC4372]      Adrangi, F., Lior, A., Korhonen, J., and J. Loughney,              "Chargeable User Identity", [[RFC4372|RFC 4372]], January 2006.
 
[RFC4334]      Housley, R. and T. Moore, "Certificate Extensions and              Attributes Supporting Authentication in Point-to-Point              Protocol (PPP) and Wireless Local Area Networks              (WLAN)", [[RFC4334|RFC 4334]], February 2006.
 
[RFC4535]      Harney, H., Meth, U., Colegrove, A., and G. Gross,              "GSAKMP: Group Secure Association Key Management              Protocol", [[RFC4535|RFC 4535]], June 2006.
 
[RFC4763]      Vanderveen, M. and H. Soliman, "Extensible              Authentication Protocol Method for Shared-secret              Authentication and Key Establishment (EAP-SAKE)", RFC              4763, November 2006.
 
[RFC4675]      Congdon, P., Sanchez, M., and B. Aboba, "RADIUS              Attributes for Virtual LAN and Priority Support", RFC              4675, September 2006.
 
[RFC4718]      Eronen, P. and P. Hoffman, "IKEv2 Clarifications and              Implementation Guidelines", [[RFC4718|RFC 4718]], October 2006.
 
[RFC4764]      Bersani, F. and H. Tschofenig, "The EAP-PSK Protocol:              A Pre-Shared Key Extensible Authentication Protocol              (EAP) Method", [[RFC4764|RFC 4764]], January 2007.
 
[RFC5176]      Chiba, M., Dommety, G., Eklund, M., Mitton, D., and B.              Aboba, "Dynamic Authorization Extensions to Remote              Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS)", RFC              5176, January 2008.
 
[RFC5216]      Simon, D., Aboba, B., and R. Hurst, "The EAP-TLS              Authentication Protocol", [[RFC5216|RFC 5216]], March 2008.
 
[RFC5246]      Dierks, T. and E. Rescorla, "The Transport Layer              Security (TLS) Protocol Version 1.2", [[RFC5246|RFC 5246]], August              2008.
 
[SP800-57]    National Institute of Standards and Technology,              "Recommendation for Key Management", Special              Publication 800-57, May 2006.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
[Token]        Fantacci, R., Maccari, L., Pecorella, T., and F.              Frosali, "A secure and performant token-based              authentication for infrastructure and mesh 802.1X              networks", IEEE Conference on Computer Communications,              June 2006.
 
[Tokenk]      Ohba, Y., Das, S., and A. Duttak, "Kerberized Handover              Keying: A Media-Independent Handover Key Management              Architecture", Mobiarch 2007.
 
Acknowledgments
 
Thanks to Ashwin Palekar, Charlie Kaufman, and Tim Moore ofMicrosoft, Jari Arkko of Ericsson, Dorothy Stanley of Aruba Networks,Bob Moskowitz of TruSecure, Jesse Walker of Intel, Joe Salowey ofCisco, and Russ Housley of Vigil Security for useful feedback.
 
  
 +
This Appendix specifies Session-Id, Peer-Id, Server-Id and
 +
Key-Lifetime for EAP methods that have been published prior to this
 +
specification.  Future EAP method specifications MUST include a
 +
definition of the Session-Id, Peer-Id and Server-Id (could be the
 +
null string).  In the descriptions that follow, all fields comprising
 +
the Session-Id are assumed to be in network byte order.
  
 +
EAP-Identity
  
 +
  The EAP-Identity method is defined in [[RFC3748]].  It does not
 +
  derive keys, and therefore does not define the Session-Id.  The
 +
  Peer-Id and Server-Id are the null string (zero length).
  
 +
EAP-Notification
  
 +
  The EAP-Notification method is defined in [[RFC3748]].  It does not
 +
  derive keys and therefore does not define the Session-Id.  The
 +
  Peer-Id and Server-Id are the null string (zero length).
  
 +
EAP-MD5-Challenge
  
 +
  The EAP-MD5-Challenge method is defined in [[RFC3748]].  It does not
 +
  derive keys and therefore does not define the Session-Id.  The
 +
  Peer-Id and Server-Id are the null string (zero length).
  
 +
EAP-GTC
  
 +
  The EAP-GTC method is defined in [[RFC3748]].  It does not derive
 +
  keys and therefore does not define the Session-Id.  The Peer-Id
 +
  and Server-Id are the null string (zero length).
  
 +
EAP-OTP
  
 +
  The EAP-OTP method is defined in [[RFC3748]].  It does not derive
 +
  keys and therefore does not define the Session-Id.  The Peer-Id
 +
  and Server-Id are the null string (zero length).
  
 +
EAP-AKA
  
 +
  EAP-AKA is defined in [[RFC4187]].  The EAP-AKA Session-Id is the
 +
  concatenation of the EAP Type Code (0x17) with the contents of the
 +
  RAND field from the AT_RAND attribute, followed by the contents of
 +
  the AUTN field in the AT_AUTN attribute:
  
 +
  Session-Id = 0x17 || RAND || AUTN
  
 +
  The Peer-Id is the contents of the Identity field from the
 +
  AT_IDENTITY attribute, using only the Actual Identity Length
 +
  octets from the beginning, however.  Note that the contents are
 +
  used as they are transmitted, regardless of whether the
 +
  transmitted identity was a permanent, pseudonym, or fast EAP
 +
  re-authentication identity.  The Server-Id is the null string
 +
  (zero length).
  
 +
EAP-SIM
  
 +
  EAP-SIM is defined in [[RFC4186]].  The EAP-SIM Session-Id is the
 +
  concatenation of the EAP Type Code (0x12) with the contents of the
 +
  RAND field from the AT_RAND attribute, followed by the contents of
 +
  the NONCE_MT field in the AT_NONCE_MT attribute:
  
 +
  Session-Id = 0x12 || RAND || NONCE_MT
  
 +
  The Peer-Id is the contents of the Identity field from the
 +
  AT_IDENTITY attribute, using only the Actual Identity Length
 +
  octets from the beginning, however.  Note that the contents are
 +
  used as they are transmitted, regardless of whether the
 +
  transmitted identity was a permanent, pseudonym, or fast EAP
 +
  re-authentication identity.  The Server-Id is the null string
 +
  (zero length).
  
 +
EAP-PSK
  
 +
  EAP-PSK is defined in [[RFC4764]].  The EAP-PSK Session-Id is the
 +
  concatenation of the EAP Type Code (0x2F) with the peer (RAND_P)
 +
  and server (RAND_S) nonces:
  
 +
  Session-Id = 0x2F || RAND_P || RAND_S
  
 +
  The Peer-Id is the contents of the ID_P field and the Server-Id is
 +
  the contents of the ID_S field.
  
 +
EAP-SAKE
  
 +
  EAP-SAKE is defined in [[RFC4763]].  The EAP-SAKE Session-Id is the
 +
  concatenation of the EAP Type Code (0x30) with the contents of the
 +
  RAND_S field from the AT_RAND_S attribute, followed by the
 +
  contents of the RAND_P field in the AT_RAND_P attribute:
  
 +
  Session-Id = 0x30 || RAND_S || RAND_P
  
 +
  Note that the EAP-SAKE Session-Id is not the same as the "Session
 +
  ID" parameter chosen by the Server, which is sent in the first
 +
  message, and replicated in subsequent messages.  The Peer-Id is
 +
  contained within the value field of the AT_PEERID attribute and
 +
  the Server-Id, if available, is contained in the value field of
 +
  the AT_SERVERID attribute.
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Appendix A - Exported Parameters in Existing Methods
 
This Appendix specifies Session-Id, Peer-Id, Server-Id andKey-Lifetime for EAP methods that have been published prior to thisspecification.  Future EAP method specifications MUST include adefinition of the Session-Id, Peer-Id and Server-Id (could be thenull string).  In the descriptions that follow, all fields comprisingthe Session-Id are assumed to be in network byte order.
 
EAP-Identity
 
  The EAP-Identity method is defined in [RFC3748].  It does not  derive keys, and therefore does not define the Session-Id.  The  Peer-Id and Server-Id are the null string (zero length).
 
EAP-Notification
 
  The EAP-Notification method is defined in [RFC3748].  It does not  derive keys and therefore does not define the Session-Id.  The  Peer-Id and Server-Id are the null string (zero length).
 
EAP-MD5-Challenge
 
  The EAP-MD5-Challenge method is defined in [RFC3748].  It does not  derive keys and therefore does not define the Session-Id.  The  Peer-Id and Server-Id are the null string (zero length).
 
EAP-GTC
 
  The EAP-GTC method is defined in [RFC3748].  It does not derive  keys and therefore does not define the Session-Id.  The Peer-Id  and Server-Id are the null string (zero length).
 
EAP-OTP
 
  The EAP-OTP method is defined in [RFC3748].  It does not derive  keys and therefore does not define the Session-Id.  The Peer-Id  and Server-Id are the null string (zero length).
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
EAP-AKA
 
  EAP-AKA is defined in [RFC4187].  The EAP-AKA Session-Id is the  concatenation of the EAP Type Code (0x17) with the contents of the  RAND field from the AT_RAND attribute, followed by the contents of  the AUTN field in the AT_AUTN attribute:
 
  Session-Id = 0x17 || RAND || AUTN
 
  The Peer-Id is the contents of the Identity field from the  AT_IDENTITY attribute, using only the Actual Identity Length  octets from the beginning, however.  Note that the contents are  used as they are transmitted, regardless of whether the  transmitted identity was a permanent, pseudonym, or fast EAP  re-authentication identity.  The Server-Id is the null string  (zero length).
 
EAP-SIM
 
  EAP-SIM is defined in [RFC4186].  The EAP-SIM Session-Id is the  concatenation of the EAP Type Code (0x12) with the contents of the  RAND field from the AT_RAND attribute, followed by the contents of  the NONCE_MT field in the AT_NONCE_MT attribute:
 
  Session-Id = 0x12 || RAND || NONCE_MT
 
  The Peer-Id is the contents of the Identity field from the  AT_IDENTITY attribute, using only the Actual Identity Length  octets from the beginning, however.  Note that the contents are  used as they are transmitted, regardless of whether the  transmitted identity was a permanent, pseudonym, or fast EAP  re-authentication identity.  The Server-Id is the null string  (zero length).
 
EAP-PSK
 
  EAP-PSK is defined in [RFC4764].  The EAP-PSK Session-Id is the  concatenation of the EAP Type Code (0x2F) with the peer (RAND_P)  and server (RAND_S) nonces:
 
  Session-Id = 0x2F || RAND_P || RAND_S
 
  The Peer-Id is the contents of the ID_P field and the Server-Id is  the contents of the ID_S field.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
EAP-SAKE
 
  EAP-SAKE is defined in [RFC4763].  The EAP-SAKE Session-Id is the  concatenation of the EAP Type Code (0x30) with the contents of the  RAND_S field from the AT_RAND_S attribute, followed by the  contents of the RAND_P field in the AT_RAND_P attribute:
 
  Session-Id = 0x30 || RAND_S || RAND_P
 
  Note that the EAP-SAKE Session-Id is not the same as the "Session  ID" parameter chosen by the Server, which is sent in the first  message, and replicated in subsequent messages.  The Peer-Id is  contained within the value field of the AT_PEERID attribute and  the Server-Id, if available, is contained in the value field of  the AT_SERVERID attribute.
 
 
EAP-TLS
 
EAP-TLS
  For EAP-TLS, the Peer-Id, Server-Id and Session-Id are defined in  [RFC5216].
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 +
  For EAP-TLS, the Peer-Id, Server-Id and Session-Id are defined in
 +
  [[RFC5216]].
  
 
Authors' Addresses
 
Authors' Addresses
Line 3,758: Line 3,430:
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
Full Copyright Statement
 
Full Copyright Statement
Line 3,822: Line 3,470:
 
this standard.  Please address the information to the IETF at
 
this standard.  Please address the information to the IETF at
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
[[Category:Standards Track]]
 
[[Category:Standards Track]]

Latest revision as of 14:14, 11 October 2020

Network Working Group B. Aboba Request for Comments: 5247 D. Simon Updates: 3748 Microsoft Corporation Category: Standards Track P. Eronen

                                                               Nokia
                                                         August 2008

Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) Key Management Framework

Status of This Memo

This document specifies an Internet standards track protocol for the Internet community, and requests discussion and suggestions for improvements. Please refer to the current edition of the "Internet Official Protocol Standards" (STD 1) for the standardization state and status of this protocol. Distribution of this memo is unlimited.

Abstract

The Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP), defined in RFC 3748, enables extensible network access authentication. This document specifies the EAP key hierarchy and provides a framework for the transport and usage of keying material and parameters generated by EAP authentication algorithms, known as "methods". It also provides a detailed system-level security analysis, describing the conditions under which the key management guidelines described in RFC 4962 can be satisfied.

Introduction

The Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP), defined in RFC3748, was designed to enable extensible authentication for network access in situations in which the Internet Protocol (IP) protocol is not available. Originally developed for use with Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) RFC1661, it has subsequently also been applied to IEEE 802 wired networks [IEEE-802.1X], Internet Key Exchange Protocol version 2 (IKEv2) RFC4306, and wireless networks such as [IEEE-802.11] and [IEEE-802.16e].

EAP is a two-party protocol spoken between the EAP peer and server. Within EAP, keying material is generated by EAP authentication algorithms, known as "methods". Part of this keying material can be used by EAP methods themselves, and part of this material can be exported. In addition to the export of keying material, EAP methods can also export associated parameters such as authenticated peer and server identities and a unique EAP conversation identifier, and can import and export lower-layer parameters known as "channel binding parameters", or simply "channel bindings".

This document specifies the EAP key hierarchy and provides a framework for the transport and usage of keying material and parameters generated by EAP methods. It also provides a detailed security analysis, describing the conditions under which the requirements described in "Guidance for Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) Key Management" RFC4962 can be satisfied.

Requirements Language

The key words "MUST", "MUST NOT", "REQUIRED", "SHALL", "SHALL NOT", "SHOULD", "SHOULD NOT", "RECOMMENDED", "MAY", and "OPTIONAL" in this document are to be interpreted as described in RFC2119.

Terminology

The terms "Cryptographic binding", "Cryptographic separation", "Key strength" and "Mutual authentication" are defined in RFC3748 and are used with the same meaning in this document, which also frequently uses the following terms:

4-Way Handshake

  A pairwise Authentication and Key Management Protocol (AKMP)
  defined in [IEEE-802.11], which confirms mutual possession of a
  Pairwise Master Key by two parties and distributes a Group Key.

AAA Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting

  AAA protocols with EAP support include "RADIUS Support for EAP"
  RFC3579 and "Diameter EAP Application" RFC4072.  In this
  document, the terms "AAA server" and "backend authentication
  server" are used interchangeably.

AAA-Key

  The term AAA-Key is synonymous with Master Session Key (MSK).
  Since multiple keys can be transported by AAA, the term is
  potentially confusing and is not used in this document.

Authenticator

  The entity initiating EAP authentication.

Backend Authentication Server

  A backend authentication server is an entity that provides an
  authentication service to an authenticator.  When used, this
  server typically executes EAP methods for the authenticator.  This
  terminology is also used in [IEEE-802.1X].

Channel Binding

  A secure mechanism for ensuring that a subset of the parameters
  transmitted by the authenticator (such as authenticator
  identifiers and properties) are agreed upon by the EAP peer and
  server.  It is expected that the parameters are also securely
  agreed upon by the EAP peer and authenticator via the lower layer
  if the authenticator advertised the parameters.

Derived Keying Material

  Keys derived from EAP keying material, such as Transient Session
  Keys (TSKs).

EAP Keying Material

  Keys derived by an EAP method; this includes exported keying
  material (MSK, Extended MSK (EMSK), Initialization Vector (IV)) as
  well as local keying material such as Transient EAP Keys (TEKs).

EAP Pre-Authentication

  The use of EAP to pre-establish EAP keying material on an
  authenticator prior to arrival of the peer at the access network
  managed by that authenticator.

EAP Re-Authentication

  EAP authentication between an EAP peer and a server with whom the
  EAP peer shares valid unexpired EAP keying material.

EAP Server

  The entity that terminates the EAP authentication method with the
  peer.  In the case where no backend authentication server is used,
  the EAP server is part of the authenticator.  In the case where
  the authenticator operates in pass-through mode, the EAP server is
  located on the backend authentication server.

Exported Keying Material

  The EAP Master Session Key (MSK), Extended Master Session Key
  (EMSK), and Initialization Vector (IV).

Extended Master Session Key (EMSK)

  Additional keying material derived between the peer and server
  that is exported by the EAP method.  The EMSK is at least 64
  octets in length and is never shared with a third party.  The EMSK
  MUST be at least as long as the MSK in size.

Initialization Vector (IV)

  A quantity of at least 64 octets, suitable for use in an
  initialization vector field, that is derived between the peer and
  EAP server.  Since the IV is a known value in methods such as
  EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) RFC5216, it cannot be used by
  itself for computation of any quantity that needs to remain
  secret.  As a result, its use has been deprecated and it is
  OPTIONAL for EAP methods to generate it.  However, when it is
  generated, it MUST be unpredictable.

Keying Material

  Unless otherwise qualified, the term "keying material" refers to
  EAP keying material as well as derived keying material.

Key Scope

  The parties to whom a key is available.

Key Wrap

  The encryption of one symmetric cryptographic key in another.  The
  algorithm used for the encryption is called a key wrap algorithm
  or a key encryption algorithm.  The key used in the encryption
  process is called a key-encryption key (KEK).

Long-Term Credential

  EAP methods frequently make use of long-term secrets in order to
  enable authentication between the peer and server.  In the case of
  a method based on pre-shared key authentication, the long-term
  credential is the pre-shared key.  In the case of a
  public-key-based method, the long-term credential is the
  corresponding private key.

Lower Layer

  The lower layer is responsible for carrying EAP frames between the
  peer and authenticator.

Lower-Layer Identity

  A name used to identify the EAP peer and authenticator within the
  lower layer.

Master Session Key (MSK)

  Keying material that is derived between the EAP peer and server
  and exported by the EAP method.  The MSK is at least 64 octets in
  length.

Network Access Server (NAS)

  A device that provides an access service for a user to a network.

Pairwise Master Key (PMK)

  Lower layers use the MSK in a lower-layer dependent manner.  For
  instance, in IEEE 802.11 [IEEE-802.11], Octets 0-31 of the MSK are
  known as the Pairwise Master Key (PMK); the Temporal Key Integrity
  Protocol (TKIP) and Advanced Encryption Standard Counter Mode with
  CBC-MAC Protocol (AES CCMP) ciphersuites derive their Transient
  Session Keys (TSKs) solely from the PMK, whereas the Wired
  Equivalent Privacy (WEP) ciphersuite, as noted in "IEEE 802.1X
  RADIUS Usage Guidelines" RFC3580, derives its TSKs from both
  halves of the MSK.  In [IEEE-802.16e], the MSK is truncated to 20
  octets for PMK and 20 octets for PMK2.

Peer

  The entity that responds to the authenticator.  In [IEEE-802.1X],
  this entity is known as the Supplicant.

Security Association

  A set of policies and cryptographic state used to protect
  information.  Elements of a security association include
  cryptographic keys, negotiated ciphersuites and other parameters,
  counters, sequence spaces, authorization attributes, etc.

Secure Association Protocol

  An exchange that occurs between the EAP peer and authenticator in
  order to manage security associations derived from EAP exchanges.
  The protocol establishes unicast and (optionally) multicast
  security associations, which include symmetric keys and a context
  for the use of the keys.  An example of a Secure Association
  Protocol is the 4-way handshake defined within [IEEE-802.11].

Session-Id

  The EAP Session-Id uniquely identifies an EAP authentication
  exchange between an EAP peer (as identified by the Peer-Id(s)) and
  server (as identified by the Server-Id(s)).  For more information,
  see Section 1.4.

Transient EAP Keys (TEKs)

  Session keys that are used to establish a protected channel
  between the EAP peer and server during the EAP authentication
  exchange.  The TEKs are appropriate for use with the ciphersuite
  negotiated between EAP peer and server for use in protecting the
  EAP conversation.  The TEKs are stored locally by the EAP method
  and are not exported.  Note that the ciphersuite used to set up
  the protected channel between the EAP peer and server during EAP
  authentication is unrelated to the ciphersuite used to
  subsequently protect data sent between the EAP peer and
  authenticator.

Transient Session Keys (TSKs)

  Keys used to protect data exchanged after EAP authentication has
  successfully completed using the ciphersuite negotiated between
  the EAP peer and authenticator.

Overview

Where EAP key derivation is supported, the conversation typically takes place in three phases:

  Phase 0: Discovery
  Phase 1: Authentication
           1a: EAP authentication
           1b: AAA Key Transport (optional)
  Phase 2: Secure Association Protocol
           2a: Unicast Secure Association
           2b: Multicast Secure Association (optional)

Of these phases, phase 0, 1b, and 2 are handled external to EAP. phases 0 and 2 are handled by the lower-layer protocol, and phase 1b is typically handled by a AAA protocol.

In the discovery phase (phase 0), peers locate authenticators and discover their capabilities. A peer can locate an authenticator providing access to a particular network, or a peer can locate an authenticator behind a bridge with which it desires to establish a Secure Association. Discovery can occur manually or automatically, depending on the lower layer over which EAP runs.

The authentication phase (phase 1) can begin once the peer and authenticator discover each other. This phase, if it occurs, always includes EAP authentication (phase 1a). Where the chosen EAP method supports key derivation, in phase 1a, EAP keying material is derived on both the peer and the EAP server.

An additional step (phase 1b) is needed in deployments that include a backend authentication server, in order to transport keying material from the backend authentication server to the authenticator. In order to obey the principle of mode independence (see Section 1.6.1), where a backend authentication server is present, all keying material needed by the lower layer is transported from the EAP server to the authenticator. Since existing TSK derivation and transport techniques depend solely on the MSK, in existing implementations, this is the only keying material replicated in the AAA key transport phase 1b.

Successful completion of EAP authentication and key derivation by a peer and EAP server does not necessarily imply that the peer is committed to joining the network associated with an EAP server. Rather, this commitment is implied by the creation of a security association between the EAP peer and authenticator, as part of the Secure Association Protocol (phase 2). The Secure Association Protocol exchange (phase 2) occurs between the peer and authenticator in order to manage the creation and deletion of unicast (phase 2a) and multicast (phase 2b) security associations between the peer and authenticator. The conversation between the parties is shown in Figure 1.

EAP peer Authenticator Auth. Server


------------- ------------

|<----------------------------->|                               |
|     Discovery (phase 0)       |                               |
|<----------------------------->|<----------------------------->|
|   EAP auth (phase 1a)         |  AAA pass-through (optional)  |
|                               |                               |
|                               |<----------------------------->|
|                               |       AAA Key transport       |
|                               |      (optional; phase 1b)     |
|<----------------------------->|                               |
|  Unicast Secure association   |                               |
|          (phase 2a)           |                               |
|                               |                               |
|<----------------------------->|                               |
| Multicast Secure association  |                               |
|     (optional; phase 2b)      |                               |
|                               |                               |
              Figure 1: Conversation Overview

Examples

Existing EAP lower layers implement phase 0, 2a, and 2b in different ways:

PPP

  The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), defined in RFC1661, does not
  support discovery, nor does it include a Secure Association
  Protocol.

PPPoE

  PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE), defined in RFC2516, includes support
  for a Discovery stage (phase 0).  In this step, the EAP peer sends
  a PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation (PADI) packet to the broadcast
  address, indicating the service it is requesting.  The Access
  Concentrator replies with a PPPoE Active Discovery Offer (PADO)
  packet containing its name, the service name, and an indication of
  the services offered by the concentrator.  The discovery phase is
  not secured.  PPPoE, like PPP, does not include a Secure
  Association Protocol.

IKEv2

  Internet Key Exchange v2 (IKEv2), defined in RFC4306, includes
  support for EAP and handles the establishment of unicast security
  associations (phase 2a).  However, the establishment of multicast
  security associations (phase 2b) typically does not involve EAP
  and needs to be handled by a group key management protocol such as
  Group Domain of Interpretation (GDOI) RFC3547, Group Secure
  Association Key Management Protocol (GSAKMP) RFC4535, Multimedia
  Internet KEYing  (MIKEY) RFC3830, or Group Key Distribution
  Protocol (GKDP) [GKDP].  Several mechanisms have been proposed for
  the discovery of IPsec security gateways.  RFC2230 discusses the
  use of Key eXchange (KX) Resource Records (RRs) for IPsec gateway
  discovery; while KX RRs are supported by many Domain Name Service
  (DNS) server implementations, they have not yet been widely
  deployed.  Alternatively, DNS SRV RRs RFC2782 can be used for
  this purpose.  Where DNS is used for gateway location, DNS
  security mechanisms such as DNS Security (DNSSEC) (RFC4033,
  RFC4035), TSIG RFC2845, and Simple Secure Dynamic Update
  RFC3007 are available.

IEEE 802.11

  IEEE 802.11, defined in [IEEE-802.11], handles discovery via the
  Beacon and Probe Request/Response mechanisms.  IEEE 802.11 Access
  Points (APs) periodically announce their Service Set Identifiers
  (SSIDs) as well as capabilities using Beacon frames.  Stations can
  query for APs by sending a Probe Request.  Neither Beacon nor
  Probe Request/Response frames are secured.  The 4-way handshake
  defined in [IEEE-802.11] enables the derivation of unicast (phase
  2a) and multicast/broadcast (phase 2b) secure associations.  Since
  the group key exchange transports a group key from the AP to the
  station, two 4-way handshakes can be needed in order to support
  peer-to-peer communications.  A proof of the security of the IEEE
  802.11 4-way handshake, when used with EAP-TLS, is provided in
  [He].

IEEE 802.1X

  IEEE 802.1X-2004, defined in [IEEE-802.1X], does not support
  discovery (phase 0), nor does it provide for derivation of unicast
  or multicast secure associations.

EAP Key Hierarchy

As illustrated in Figure 2, the EAP method key derivation has, at the root, the long-term credential utilized by the selected EAP method. If authentication is based on a pre-shared key, the parties store the EAP method to be used and the pre-shared key. The EAP server also stores the peer's identity as well as additional information. This information is typically used outside of the EAP method to determine whether to grant access to a service. The peer stores information necessary to choose which secret to use for which service.

If authentication is based on proof of possession of the private key corresponding to the public key contained within a certificate, the parties store the EAP method to be used and the trust anchors used to validate the certificates. The EAP server also stores the peer's identity, and the peer stores information necessary to choose which certificate to use for which service. Based on the long-term credential established between the peer and the server, methods derive two types of EAP keying material:

  (a) Keying material calculated locally by the EAP method but not
      exported, such as the Transient EAP Keys (TEKs).
  (b) Keying material exported by the EAP method: Master Session Key
      (MSK), Extended Master Session Key (EMSK), Initialization
      Vector (IV).

As noted in RFC3748 Section 7.10:

  In order to provide keying material for use in a subsequently
  negotiated ciphersuite, an EAP method supporting key derivation
  MUST export a Master Session Key (MSK) of at least 64 octets, and
  an Extended Master Session Key (EMSK) of at least 64 octets.

EAP methods also MAY export the IV; however, the use of the IV is deprecated. The EMSK MUST NOT be provided to an entity outside the EAP server or peer, nor is it permitted to pass any quantity to an entity outside the EAP server or peer from which the EMSK could be computed without breaking some cryptographic assumption, such as inverting a one-way function.

EAP methods supporting key derivation and mutual authentication SHOULD export a method-specific EAP conversation identifier known as the Session-Id, as well as one or more method-specific peer identifiers (Peer-Id(s)) and MAY export one or more method-specific server identifiers (Server-Id(s)). EAP methods MAY also support the import and export of channel binding parameters. EAP method specifications developed after the publication of this document MUST define the Peer-Id, Server-Id, and Session-Id. The Peer-Id(s) and Server-Id(s), when provided, identify the entities involved in generating EAP keying material. For existing EAP methods, the Peer-Id, Server-Id, and Session-Id are defined in Appendix A.

+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ ---+ | | ^ | EAP Method | | | | | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | | | | | | | | | | EAP Method Key |<->| Long-Term | | | | | Derivation | | Credential | | | | | | | | | | | | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | Local to | | | | | EAP | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | Method | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | | | | TEK | |MSK, EMSK | |IV | | | | | |Derivation | |Derivation | |Derivation | | | | | | | | | |(Deprecated) | | | | | +-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+ +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+ | | | | ^ | | | | | | | | | | V +-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-|-+-+-+-+ ---+

|               |             |               |                    ^
|               |             |               |           Exported |
| Peer-Id(s),   | channel     | MSK (64+B)    | IV (64B)      by   |
| Server-Id(s), | bindings    | EMSK (64+B)   | (Optional)    EAP  |
| Session-Id    | & Result    |               |             Method |
V               V             V               V                    V
 Figure 2:  EAP Method Parameter Import/Export

Peer-Id

  If an EAP method that generates keys authenticates one or more
  method-specific peer identities, those identities are exported by
  the method as the Peer-Id(s).  It is possible for more than one
  Peer-Id to be exported by an EAP method.  Not all EAP methods
  provide a method-specific peer identity; where this is not
  defined, the Peer-Id is the null string.  In EAP methods that do
  not support key generation, the Peer-Id MUST be the null string.
  Where an EAP method that derives keys does not provide a Peer-Id,
  the EAP server will not authenticate the identity of the EAP peer
  with which it derived keying material.

Server-Id

  If an EAP method that generates keys authenticates one or more
  method-specific server identities, those identities are exported
  by the method as the Server-Id(s).  It is possible for more than
  one Server-Id to be exported by an EAP method.  Not all EAP
  methods provide a method-specific server identity; where this is
  not defined, the Server-Id is the null string.  If the EAP method
  does not generate keying material, the Server-Id MUST be the null
  string.  Where an EAP method that derives keys does not provide a
  Server-Id, the EAP peer will not authenticate the identity of the
  EAP server with which it derived EAP keying material.

Session-Id

  The Session-Id uniquely identifies an EAP session between an EAP
  peer (as identified by the Peer-Id) and server (as identified by
  the Server-Id).  Where non-expanded EAP Type Codes are used (EAP
  Type Code not equal to 254), the EAP Session-Id is the
  concatenation of the single octet EAP Type Code and a temporally
  unique identifier obtained from the method (known as the
  Method-Id):
  Session-Id = Type-Code || Method-Id
  Where expanded EAP Type Codes are used, the EAP Session-Id
  consists of the Expanded Type Code (including the Type, Vendor-Id
  (in network byte order) and Vendor-Type fields (in network byte
  order) defined in RFC3748 Section 5.7), concatenated with a
  temporally unique identifier obtained from the method (Method-Id):
  Session-Id = 0xFE || Vendor-Id || Vendor-Type || Method-Id
  The Method-Id is typically constructed from nonces or counters
  used within the EAP method exchange.  The inclusion of the Type
  Code or Expanded Type Code in the EAP Session-Id ensures that each
  EAP method has a distinct Session-Id space.  Since an EAP session
  is not bound to a particular authenticator or specific ports on
  the peer and authenticator, the authenticator port or identity are
  not included in the Session-Id.

Channel Binding

  Channel binding is the process by which lower-layer parameters are
  verified for consistency between the EAP peer and server.  In
  order to avoid introducing media dependencies, EAP methods that
  transport channel binding parameters MUST treat this data as
  opaque octets.  See Section 5.3.3 for further discussion.

Key Naming

Each key created within the EAP key management framework has a name (a unique identifier), as well as a scope (the parties to whom the key is available). The scope of exported keying material and TEKs is defined by the authenticated method-specific peer identities (Peer-Id(s)) and the authenticated server identities (Server-Id(s)), where available.

MSK and EMSK Names

    The MSK and EMSK are exported by the EAP peer and EAP server,
    and MUST be named using the EAP Session-Id and a binary or
    textual indication of the EAP keying material being referred to.

PMK Name

    This document does not specify a naming scheme for the Pairwise
    Master Key (PMK).  The PMK is only identified by the name of the
    key from which it is derived.
    Note: IEEE 802.11 names the PMK for the purposes of being able
    to refer to it in the Secure Association Protocol; the PMK name
    (known as the PMKID) is based on a hash of the PMK itself as
    well as some other parameters (see [IEEE-802.11] Section
    8.5.1.2).

TEK Name

    Transient EAP Keys (TEKs) MAY be named; their naming is
    specified in the EAP method specification.

TSK Name

    Transient Session Keys (TSKs) are typically named.  Their naming
    is specified in the lower layer so that the correct set of TSKs
    can be identified for processing a given packet.

Security Goals

The goal of the EAP conversation is to derive fresh session keys between the EAP peer and authenticator that are known only to those parties, and for both the EAP peer and authenticator to demonstrate that they are authorized to perform their roles either by each other or by a trusted third party (the backend authentication server).

Completion of an EAP method exchange (phase 1a) supporting key derivation results in the derivation of EAP keying material (MSK, EMSK, TEKs) known only to the EAP peer (identified by the Peer-Id(s)) and EAP server (identified by the Server-Id(s)). Both the EAP peer and EAP server know this keying material to be fresh. The Peer-Id and Server-Id are discussed in Sections 1.4, 2.4, and 2.5 as well as in Appendix A. Key freshness is discussed in Sections 3.4, 3.5, and 5.7.

Completion of the AAA exchange (phase 1b) results in the transport of keying material from the EAP server (identified by the Server-Id(s)) to the EAP authenticator (identified by the NAS-Identifier) without disclosure to any other party. Both the EAP server and EAP authenticator know this keying material to be fresh. Disclosure issues are discussed in Sections 3.8 and 5.3; security properties of AAA protocols are discussed in Sections 5.1 - 5.9.

The backend authentication server is trusted to transport keying material only to the authenticator that was established with the peer, and it is trusted to transport that keying material to no other parties. In many systems, EAP keying material established by the EAP peer and EAP server are combined with publicly available data to derive other keys. The backend authentication server is trusted to refrain from deriving these same keys or acting as a man-in-the-middle even though it has access to the keying material that is needed to do so.

The authenticator is also a trusted party. The authenticator is trusted not to distribute keying material provided by the backend authentication server to any other parties. If the authenticator uses a key derivation function to derive additional keying material, the authenticator is trusted to distribute the derived keying material only to the appropriate party that is known to the peer, and no other party. When this approach is used, care must be taken to ensure that the resulting key management system meets all of the principles in RFC4962, confirming that keys used to protect data are to be known only by the peer and authenticator.

Completion of the Secure Association Protocol (phase 2) results in the derivation or transport of Transient Session Keys (TSKs) known only to the EAP peer (identified by the Peer-Id(s)) and authenticator (identified by the NAS-Identifier). Both the EAP peer and authenticator know the TSKs to be fresh. Both the EAP peer and authenticator demonstrate that they are authorized to perform their roles. Authorization issues are discussed in Sections 4.3.2 and 5.5; security properties of Secure Association Protocols are discussed in Section 3.1.

EAP Invariants

Certain basic characteristics, known as "EAP Invariants", hold true for EAP implementations:

  Mode independence
  Media independence
  Method independence
  Ciphersuite independence

Mode Independence

EAP is typically deployed to support extensible network access authentication in situations where a peer desires network access via one or more authenticators. Where authenticators are deployed standalone, the EAP conversation occurs between the peer and authenticator, and the authenticator locally implements one or more EAP methods. However, when utilized in "pass-through" mode, EAP enables the deployment of new authentication methods without requiring the development of new code on the authenticator.

While the authenticator can implement some EAP methods locally and use those methods to authenticate local users, it can at the same time act as a pass-through for other users and methods, forwarding EAP packets back and forth between the backend authentication server and the peer. This is accomplished by encapsulating EAP packets within the Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) protocol spoken between the authenticator and backend authentication server. AAA protocols supporting EAP include RADIUS RFC3579 and Diameter RFC4072.

It is a fundamental property of EAP that at the EAP method layer, the conversation between the EAP peer and server is unaffected by whether the EAP authenticator is operating in "pass-through" mode. EAP methods operate identically in all aspects, including key derivation and parameter import/export, regardless of whether or not the authenticator is operating as a pass-through.

The successful completion of an EAP method that supports key derivation results in the export of EAP keying material and parameters on the EAP peer and server. Even though the EAP peer or server can import channel binding parameters that can include the identity of the EAP authenticator, this information is treated as opaque octets. As a result, within EAP, the only relevant identities are the Peer-Id(s) and Server-Id(s). Channel binding parameters are only interpreted by the lower layer.

Within EAP, the primary function of the AAA protocol is to maintain the principle of mode independence. As far as the EAP peer is concerned, its conversation with the EAP authenticator, and all consequences of that conversation, are identical, regardless of the authenticator mode of operation.

Media Independence

One of the goals of EAP is to allow EAP methods to function on any lower layer meeting the criteria outlined in RFC3748 Section 3.1. For example, as described in RFC3748, EAP authentication can be run over PPP RFC1661, IEEE 802 wired networks [IEEE-802.1X], and wireless networks such as 802.11 [IEEE-802.11] and 802.16 [IEEE-802.16e].

In order to maintain media independence, it is necessary for EAP to avoid consideration of media-specific elements. For example, EAP methods cannot be assumed to have knowledge of the lower layer over which they are transported, and cannot be restricted to identifiers associated with a particular usage environment (e.g., Medium Access Control (MAC) addresses).

Note that media independence can be retained within EAP methods that support channel binding or method-specific identification. An EAP method need not be aware of the content of an identifier in order to use it. This enables an EAP method to use media-specific identifiers such as MAC addresses without compromising media independence. Channel binding parameters are treated as opaque octets by EAP methods so that handling them does not require media-specific knowledge.

Method Independence

By enabling pass-through, authenticators can support any method implemented on the peer and server, not just locally implemented methods. This allows the authenticator to avoid having to implement the EAP methods configured for use by peers. In fact, since a pass-through authenticator need not implement any EAP methods at all, it cannot be assumed to support any EAP method-specific code. As noted in RFC3748 Section 2.3:

  Compliant pass-through authenticator implementations MUST by
  default forward EAP packets of any Type.

This is useful where there is no single EAP method that is both mandatory to implement and offers acceptable security for the media in use. For example, the RFC3748 mandatory-to-implement EAP method (MD5-Challenge) does not provide dictionary attack resistance, mutual authentication, or key derivation, and as a result, is not appropriate for use in Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) authentication RFC4017. However, despite this, it is possible for the peer and authenticator to interoperate as long as a suitable EAP method is supported both on the EAP peer and server.

Ciphersuite Independence

Ciphersuite Independence is a requirement for media independence. Since lower-layer ciphersuites vary between media, media independence requires that exported EAP keying material be large enough (with sufficient entropy) to handle any ciphersuite.

While EAP methods can negotiate the ciphersuite used in protection of the EAP conversation, the ciphersuite used for the protection of the data exchanged after EAP authentication has completed is negotiated between the peer and authenticator within the lower layer, outside of EAP.

For example, within PPP, the ciphersuite is negotiated within the Encryption Control Protocol (ECP) defined in RFC1968, after EAP authentication is completed. Within [IEEE-802.11], the AP ciphersuites are advertised in the Beacon and Probe Responses prior to EAP authentication and are securely verified during a 4-way handshake exchange.

Since the ciphersuites used to protect data depend on the lower layer, requiring that EAP methods have knowledge of lower-layer ciphersuites would compromise the principle of media independence. As a result, methods export EAP keying material that is ciphersuite independent. Since ciphersuite negotiation occurs in the lower layer, there is no need for lower-layer ciphersuite negotiation within EAP.

In order to allow a ciphersuite to be usable within the EAP keying framework, the ciphersuite specification needs to describe how TSKs suitable for use with the ciphersuite are derived from exported EAP keying material. To maintain method independence, algorithms for deriving TSKs MUST NOT depend on the EAP method, although algorithms for TEK derivation MAY be specific to the EAP method.

Advantages of ciphersuite-independence include:

Reduced update requirements

    Ciphersuite independence enables EAP methods to be used with new
    ciphersuites without requiring the methods to be updated.  If
    EAP methods were to specify how to derive transient session keys
    for each ciphersuite, they would need to be updated each time a
    new ciphersuite is developed.  In addition, backend
    authentication servers might not be usable with all EAP-capable
    authenticators, since the backend authentication server would
    also need to be updated each time support for a new ciphersuite
    is added to the authenticator.

Reduced EAP method complexity

    Ciphersuite independence enables EAP methods to avoid having to
    include ciphersuite-specific code.  Requiring each EAP method to
    include ciphersuite-specific code for transient session key
    derivation would increase method complexity and result in
    duplicated effort.

Simplified configuration

    Ciphersuite independence enables EAP method implementations on
    the peer and server to avoid having to configure
    ciphersuite-specific parameters.  The ciphersuite is negotiated
    between the peer and authenticator outside of EAP.  Where the
    authenticator operates in "pass-through" mode, the EAP server is
    not a party to this negotiation, nor is it involved in the data
    flow between the EAP peer and authenticator.  As a result, the
    EAP server does not have knowledge of the ciphersuites and
    negotiation policies implemented by the peer and authenticator,
    nor is it aware of the ciphersuite negotiated between them.  For
    example, since Encryption Control Protocol (ECP) negotiation
    occurs after authentication, when run over PPP, the EAP peer and
    server cannot anticipate the negotiated ciphersuite, and
    therefore, this information cannot be provided to the EAP
    method.

Lower-Layer Operation

On completion of EAP authentication, EAP keying material and parameters exported by the EAP method are provided to the lower layer and AAA layer (if present). These include the Master Session Key (MSK), Extended Master Session Key (EMSK), Peer-Id(s), Server-Id(s), and Session-Id. The Initialization Vector (IV) is deprecated, but might be provided.

In order to preserve the security of EAP keying material derived within methods, lower layers MUST NOT export keys passed down by EAP methods. This implies that EAP keying material passed down to a lower layer is for the exclusive use of that lower layer and MUST NOT be used within another lower layer. This prevents compromise of one lower layer from compromising other applications using EAP keying material.

EAP keying material provided to a lower layer MUST NOT be transported to another entity. For example, EAP keying material passed down to the EAP peer lower layer MUST NOT leave the peer; EAP keying material passed down or transported to the EAP authenticator lower layer MUST NOT leave the authenticator.

On the EAP server, keying material and parameters requested by and passed down to the AAA layer MAY be replicated to the AAA layer on the authenticator (with the exception of the EMSK). On the authenticator, the AAA layer provides the replicated keying material and parameters to the lower layer over which the EAP authentication conversation took place. This enables mode independence to be maintained.

The EAP layer, as well as the peer and authenticator layers, MUST NOT modify or cache keying material or parameters (including channel bindings) passing in either direction between the EAP method layer and the lower layer or AAA layer.

Transient Session Keys

Where explicitly supported by the lower layer, lower layers MAY cache keying material, including exported EAP keying material and/or TSKs; the structure of this key cache is defined by the lower layer. So as to enable interoperability, new lower-layer specifications MUST describe key caching behavior. Unless explicitly specified by the lower layer, the EAP peer, server, and authenticator MUST assume that

peers and authenticators do not cache keying material. Existing EAP lower layers and AAA layers handle the generation of transient session keys and caching of EAP keying material in different ways:

IEEE 802.1X-2004

    When used with wired networks, IEEE 802.1X-2004 [IEEE-802.1X]
    does not support link-layer ciphersuites, and as a result, it
    does not provide for the generation of TSKs or caching of EAP
    keying material and parameters.  Once EAP authentication
    completes, it is assumed that EAP keying material and parameters
    are discarded; on IEEE 802 wired networks, there is no
    subsequent Secure Association Protocol exchange.  Perfect
    Forward Secrecy (PFS) is only possible if the negotiated EAP
    method supports this.

PPP

    PPP, defined in RFC1661, does not include support for a Secure
    Association Protocol, nor does it support caching of EAP keying
    material or parameters.  PPP ciphersuites derive their TSKs
    directly from the MSK, as described in RFC2716 Section 3.5.
    This is NOT RECOMMENDED, since if PPP were to support caching of
    EAP keying material, this could result in TSK reuse.  As a
    result, once the PPP session is terminated, EAP keying material
    and parameters MUST be discarded.  Since caching of EAP keying
    material is not permitted within PPP, there is no way to handle
    TSK re-key without EAP re-authentication.  Perfect Forward
    Secrecy (PFS) is only possible if the negotiated EAP method
    supports this.

IKEv2

    IKEv2, defined in RFC4306, only uses the MSK for
    authentication purposes and not key derivation.  The EMSK, IV,
    Peer-Id, Server-Id or Session-Id are not used.  As a result, the
    TSKs derived by IKEv2 are cryptographically independent of the
    EAP keying material and re-key of IPsec SAs can be handled
    without requiring EAP re-authentication.  Within IKEv2, it is
    possible to negotiate PFS, regardless of which EAP method is
    negotiated.  IKEv2 as specified in RFC4306 does not cache EAP
    keying material or parameters; once IKEv2 authentication
    completes, it is assumed that EAP keying material and parameters
    are discarded.  The Session-Timeout Attribute is therefore
    interpreted as a limit on the VPN session time, rather than an
    indication of the MSK key lifetime.

IEEE 802.11

    IEEE 802.11 enables caching of the MSK, but not the EMSK, IV,
    Peer-Id, Server-Id, or Session-Id.  More details about the
    structure of the cache are available in [IEEE-802.11].  In IEEE
    802.11, TSKs are derived from the MSK using a Secure Association
    Protocol known as the 4-way handshake, which includes a nonce
    exchange.  This guarantees TSK freshness even if the MSK is
    reused.  The 4-way handshake also enables TSK re-key without EAP
    re-authentication.  PFS is only possible within IEEE 802.11 if
    caching is not enabled and the negotiated EAP method supports
    PFS.

IEEE 802.16e

    IEEE 802.16e, defined in [IEEE-802.16e], supports caching of the
    MSK, but not the EMSK, IV, Peer-Id, Server-Id, or Session-Id.
    IEEE 802.16e supports a Secure Association Protocol in which
    TSKs are chosen by the authenticator without any contribution by
    the peer.  The TSKs are encrypted, authenticated, and integrity
    protected using the MSK and are transported from the
    authenticator to the peer.  TSK re-key is possible without EAP
    re-authentication.  PFS is not possible even if the negotiated
    EAP method supports it.

AAA

    Existing implementations and specifications for RADIUS/EAP
    RFC3579 or Diameter EAP RFC4072 do not support caching of
    keying material or parameters.  In existing AAA clients, proxy
    and server implementations, exported EAP keying material (MSK,
    EMSK, and IV), as well as parameters and derived keys are not
    cached and MUST be presumed lost after the AAA exchange
    completes.
    In order to avoid key reuse, the AAA layer MUST delete
    transported keys once they are sent.  The AAA layer MUST NOT
    retain keys that it has previously sent.  For example, a AAA
    layer that has transported the MSK MUST delete it, and keys MUST
    NOT be derived from the MSK from that point forward.

Authenticator and Peer Architecture

This specification does not impose constraints on the architecture of the EAP authenticator or peer. For example, any of the authenticator architectures described in RFC4118 can be used. As a result, lower layers need to identify EAP peers and authenticators unambiguously, without incorporating implicit assumptions about peer and authenticator architectures.

For example, it is possible for multiple base stations and a "controller" (e.g., WLAN switch) to comprise a single EAP authenticator. In such a situation, the "base station identity" is irrelevant to the EAP method conversation, except perhaps as an opaque blob to be used in channel binding. Many base stations can share the same authenticator identity. An EAP authenticator or peer:

  (a) can contain one or more physical or logical ports;
  (b) can advertise itself as one or more "virtual" authenticators
      or peers;
  (c) can utilize multiple CPUs;
  (d) can support clustering services for load balancing or
      failover.

Both the EAP peer and authenticator can have more than one physical or logical port. A peer can simultaneously access the network via multiple authenticators, or via multiple physical or logical ports on a given authenticator. Similarly, an authenticator can offer network access to multiple peers, each via a separate physical or logical port. When a single physical authenticator advertises itself as multiple virtual authenticators, it is possible for a single physical port to belong to multiple virtual authenticators.

An authenticator can be configured to communicate with more than one EAP server, each of which is configured to communicate with a subset of the authenticators. The situation is illustrated in Figure 3.

Authenticator Identification

The EAP method conversation is between the EAP peer and server. The authenticator identity, if considered at all by the EAP method, is treated as an opaque blob for the purpose of channel binding (see Section 5.3.3). However, the authenticator identity is important in two other exchanges - the AAA protocol exchange and the Secure Association Protocol conversation.

The AAA conversation is between the EAP authenticator and the backend authentication server. From the point of view of the backend authentication server, keying material and parameters are transported to the EAP authenticator identified by the NAS-Identifier Attribute. Since an EAP authenticator MUST NOT share EAP keying material or parameters with another party, if the EAP peer or backend authentication server detects use of EAP keying material and parameters outside the scope defined by the NAS-Identifier, the keying material MUST be considered compromised.

The Secure Association Protocol conversation is between the peer and the authenticator. For lower layers that support key caching, it is particularly important for the EAP peer, authenticator, and backend server to have a consistent view of the usage scope of the transported keying material. In order to enable this, it is RECOMMENDED that the Secure Association Protocol explicitly communicate the usage scope of the EAP keying material passed down to the lower layer, rather than implicitly assuming that this is defined by the authenticator and peer endpoint addresses.

                 +-+-+-+-+
                 | EAP   |
                 | Peer  |
                 +-+-+-+-+
                   | | |  Peer Ports
                  /  |  \
                 /   |   \
                /    |    \
               /     |     \
              /      |      \
             /       |       \
            /        |        \
           /         |         \     Authenticator
        | | |      | | |      | | |   Ports
      +-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+
      |       |  |       |  |       |
      | Auth1 |  | Auth2 |  | Auth3 |
      |       |  |       |  |       |
      +-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+
           \        | \         |
            \       |  \        |
             \      |   \       |

EAP over AAA \ | \ |

 (optional)    \    |     \     |
                \   |      \    |
                 \  |       \   |
                  \ |        \  |
               +-+-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+-+  Backend
               |  EAP    |  |  EAP    |  Authentication
               | Server1 |  | Server2 |  Servers
               +-+-+-+-+-+  +-+-+-+-+-+

Figure 3: Relationship between EAP Peer, Authenticator, and Server

Since an authenticator can have multiple ports, the scope of the authenticator key cache cannot be described by a single endpoint address. Similarly, where a peer can have multiple ports and sharing of EAP keying material and parameters between peer ports of the same

link type is allowed, the extent of the peer key cache cannot be communicated by using a single endpoint address. Instead, it is RECOMMENDED that the EAP peer and authenticator consistently identify themselves utilizing explicit identifiers, rather than endpoint addresses or port identifiers.

AAA protocols such as RADIUS RFC3579 and Diameter RFC4072 provide a mechanism for the identification of AAA clients; since the EAP authenticator and AAA client MUST be co-resident, this mechanism is applicable to the identification of EAP authenticators.

RADIUS RFC2865 requires that an Access-Request packet contain one or more of the NAS-Identifier, NAS-IP-Address, and NAS-IPv6-Address attributes. Since a NAS can have more than one IP address, the NAS-Identifier Attribute is RECOMMENDED for explicit identification of the authenticator, both within the AAA protocol exchange and the Secure Association Protocol conversation.

Problems that can arise where the peer and authenticator implicitly identify themselves using endpoint addresses include the following:

(a) It is possible that the peer will not be able to determine which

    authenticator ports are associated with which authenticators.
    As a result, the EAP peer will be unable to utilize the
    authenticator key cache in an efficient way, and will also be
    unable to determine whether EAP keying material has been shared
    outside its authorized scope, and therefore needs to be
    considered compromised.

(b) It is possible that the authenticator will not be able to

    determine which peer ports are associated with which peers,
    preventing the peer from communicating with it utilizing
    multiple peer ports.

(c) It is possible that the peer will not be able to determine with

    which virtual authenticator it is communicating.  For example,
    multiple virtual authenticators can share a MAC address, but
    utilize different NAS-Identifiers.

(d) It is possible that the authenticator will not be able to

    determine with which virtual peer it is communicating.  Multiple
    virtual peers can share a MAC address, but utilize different
    Peer-Ids.

(e) It is possible that the EAP peer and server will not be able to

    verify the authenticator identity via channel binding.

For example, problems (a), (c), and (e) occur in [IEEE-802.11], which utilizes peer and authenticator MAC addresses within the 4-way handshake. Problems (b) and (d) do not occur since [IEEE-802.11] only allows a virtual peer to utilize a single port.

The following steps enable lower-layer identities to be securely verified by all parties:

(f) Specify the lower-layer parameters used to identify the

    authenticator and peer.  As noted earlier, endpoint or port
    identifiers are not recommended for identification of the
    authenticator or peer when it is possible for them to have
    multiple ports.

(g) Communicate the lower-layer identities between the peer and

    authenticator within phase 0.  This allows the peer and
    authenticator to determine the key scope if a key cache is
    utilized.

(h) Communicate the lower-layer authenticator identity between the

    authenticator and backend authentication server within the NAS-
    Identifier Attribute.

(i) Include the lower-layer identities within channel bindings (if

    supported) in phase 1a, ensuring that they are communicated
    between the EAP peer and server.

(j) Support the integrity-protected exchange of identities within

    phase 2a.

(k) Utilize the advertised lower-layer identities to enable the peer

    and authenticator to verify that keys are maintained within the
    advertised scope.

Virtual Authenticators

When a single physical authenticator advertises itself as multiple virtual authenticators, if the virtual authenticators do not maintain logically separate key caches, then by authenticating to one virtual authenticator, the peer can gain access to the other virtual authenticators sharing a key cache.

For example, where a physical authenticator implements "Guest" and "Corporate Intranet" virtual authenticators, an attacker acting as a peer could authenticate with the "Guest" virtual authenticator and derive EAP keying material. If the "Guest" and "Corporate Intranet" virtual authenticators share a key cache, then the peer can utilize the EAP keying material derived for the "Guest" network to obtain access to the "Corporate Intranet" network.

The following steps can be taken to mitigate this vulnerability:

(a) Authenticators are REQUIRED to cache associated authorizations

    along with EAP keying material and parameters and to apply
    authorizations to the peer on each network access, regardless of
    which virtual authenticator is being accessed.  This ensures
    that an attacker cannot obtain elevated privileges even where
    the key cache is shared between virtual authenticators, and a
    peer obtains access to one virtual authenticator utilizing a key
    cache entry created for use with another virtual authenticator.

(b) It is RECOMMENDED that physical authenticators maintain separate

    key caches for each virtual authenticator.  This ensures that a
    cache entry created for use with one virtual authenticator
    cannot be used for access to another virtual authenticator.
    Since a key cache entry can no longer be shared between virtual
    authentications, this step provides protection beyond that
    offered in (a).  This is valuable in situations where
    authorizations are not used to enforce access limitations.  For
    example, where access is limited using a filter installed on a
    router rather than using authorizations provided to the
    authenticator, a peer can gain unauthorized access to resources
    by exploiting a shared key cache entry.

(c) It is RECOMMENDED that each virtual authenticator identify

    itself consistently to the peer and to the backend
    authentication server, so as to enable the peer to verify the
    authenticator identity via channel binding (see Section 5.3.3).

(d) It is RECOMMENDED that each virtual authenticator identify

    itself distinctly, in order to enable the peer and backend
    authentication server to tell them apart.  For example, this can
    be accomplished by utilizing a distinct value of the NAS-
    Identifier Attribute.

Peer Identification

As described in RFC3748 Section 7.3, the peer identity provided in the EAP-Response/Identity can be different from the peer identities authenticated by the EAP method. For example, the identity provided

in the EAP-Response/Identity can be a privacy identifier as described in "The Network Access Identifier" RFC4282 Section 2. As noted in RFC4284, it is also possible to utilize a Network Access Identifier (NAI) for the purposes of source routing; an NAI utilized for source routing is said to be "decorated" as described in RFC4282 Section 2.7.

When the EAP peer provides the Network Access Identity (NAI) within the EAP-Response/Identity, as described in RFC3579, the authenticator copies the NAI included in the EAP-Response/Identity into the User-Name Attribute included within the Access-Request. As the Access-Request is forwarded toward the backend authentication server, AAA proxies remove decoration from the NAI included in the User-Name Attribute; the NAI included within the EAP-Response/Identity encapsulated in the Access-Request remains unchanged. As a result, when the Access-Request arrives at the backend authentication server, the EAP-Response/Identity can differ from the User-Name Attribute (which can have some or all of the decoration removed). In the absence of a Peer-Id, the backend authentication server SHOULD use the contents of the User-Name Attribute, rather than the EAP-Response/Identity, as the peer identity.

It is possible for more than one Peer-Id to be exported by an EAP method. For example, a peer certificate can contain more than one peer identity; in a tunnel method, peer identities can be authenticated within both an outer and inner exchange, and these identities could be different in type and contents. For example, an outer exchange could provide a Peer-Id in the form of a Relative Distinguished Name (RDN), whereas an inner exchange could identify the peer via its NAI or MAC address. Where EAP keying material is determined solely from the outer exchange, only the outer Peer-Id(s) are exported; where the EAP keying material is determined from both the inner and outer exchanges, then both the inner and outer Peer-Id(s) are exported by the tunnel method.

Server Identification

It is possible for more than one Server-Id to be exported by an EAP method. For example, a server certificate can contain more than one server identity; in a tunnel method, server identities could be authenticated within both an outer and inner exchange, and these identities could be different in type and contents. For example, an outer exchange could provide a Server-Id in the form of an IP address, whereas an inner exchange could identify the server via its Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) or hostname. Where EAP keying material is determined solely from the outer exchange, only the outer Server-Id(s) are exported by the EAP method; where the EAP keying material is determined from both the inner and outer exchanges, then both the inner and outer Server-Id(s) are exported by the EAP method.

As shown in Figure 3, an authenticator can be configured to communicate with multiple EAP servers; the EAP server that an authenticator communicates with can vary according to configuration and network and server availability. While the EAP peer can assume that all EAP servers within a realm have access to the credentials necessary to validate an authentication attempt, it cannot assume that all EAP servers share persistent state.

Authenticators can be configured with different primary or secondary EAP servers, in order to balance the load. Also, the authenticator can dynamically determine the EAP server to which requests will be sent; in the event of a communication failure, the authenticator can fail over to another EAP server. For example, in Figure 3, Authenticator2 can be initially configured with EAP server1 as its primary backend authentication server, and EAP server2 as the backup, but if EAP server1 becomes unavailable, EAP server2 can become the primary server.

In general, the EAP peer cannot direct an authentication attempt to a particular EAP server within a realm, this decision is made by AAA clients, nor can the peer determine with which EAP server it will be communicating, prior to the start of the EAP method conversation. The Server-Id is not included in the EAP-Request/Identity, and since the EAP server may be determined dynamically, it typically is not possible for the authenticator to advertise the Server-Id during the discovery phase. Some EAP methods do not export the Server-Id so that it is possible that the EAP peer will not learn with which server it was conversing after the EAP conversation completes successfully.

As a result, an EAP peer, on connecting to a new authenticator or reconnecting to the same authenticator, can find itself communicating with a different EAP server. Fast reconnect, defined in RFC3748

Section 7.2, can fail if the EAP server with which the peer communicates is not the same one with which it initially established a security association. For example, an EAP peer attempting an EAP-TLS session resume can find that the new EAP-TLS server will not have access to the TLS Master Key identified by the TLS Session-Id, and therefore the session resumption attempt will fail, requiring completion of a full EAP-TLS exchange.

EAP methods that export the Server-Id MUST authenticate the server. However, not all EAP methods supporting mutual authentication provide a non-null Server-Id; some methods only enable the EAP peer to verify that the EAP server possesses a long-term secret, but do not provide the identity of the EAP server. In this case, the EAP peer will know that an authenticator has been authorized by an EAP server, but will not confirm the identity of the EAP server. Where the EAP method does not provide a Server-Id, the peer cannot identify the EAP server with which it generated keying material. This can make it difficult for the EAP peer to identify the location of a key possessed by that EAP server.

As noted in RFC5216 Section 5.2, EAP methods supporting authentication using server certificates can determine the Server-Id from the subject or subjectAltName fields in the server certificate. Validating the EAP server identity can help the EAP peer to decide whether a specific EAP server is authorized. In some cases, such as where the certificate extensions defined in RFC4334 are included in the server certificate, it can even be possible for the peer to verify some channel binding parameters from the server certificate.

It is possible for problems to arise in situations where the EAP server identifies itself differently to the EAP peer and authenticator. For example, it is possible that the Server-Id exported by EAP methods will not be identical to the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of the backend authentication server. Where certificate-based authentication is used within RADIUS or Diameter, it is possible that the subjectAltName used in the backend authentication server certificate will not be identical to the Server-Id or backend authentication server FQDN. This is not normally an issue in EAP, as the authenticator will be unaware of the identities used between the EAP peer and server. However, this can be an issue for key caching, if the authenticator is expected to locate a backend authentication server corresponding to a Server-Id provided by an EAP peer.

Where the backend authentication server FQDN differs from the subjectAltName in the backend authentication server certificate, it is possible that the AAA client will not be able to determine whether it is talking to the correct backend authentication server. Where

the Server-Id and backend authentication server FQDN differ, it is possible that the combination of the key scope (Peer-Id(s), Server- Id(s)) and EAP conversation identifier (Session-Id) will not be sufficient to determine where the key resides. For example, the authenticator can identify backend authentication servers by their IP address (as occurs in RADIUS), or using a Fully Qualified Domain Name (as in Diameter). If the Server-Id does not correspond to the IP address or FQDN of a known backend authentication server, then it may not be possible to locate which backend authentication server possesses the key.

Security Association Management

EAP, as defined in RFC3748, supports key derivation, but does not provide for the management of lower-layer security associations. Missing functionality includes:

(a) Security Association negotiation. EAP does not negotiate

    lower-layer unicast or multicast security associations,
    including cryptographic algorithms or traffic profiles.  EAP
    methods only negotiate cryptographic algorithms for their own
    use, not for the underlying lower layers.  EAP also does not
    negotiate the traffic profiles to be protected with the
    negotiated ciphersuites; in some cases the traffic to be
    protected can have lower-layer source and destination addresses
    different from the lower-layer peer or authenticator addresses.

(b) Re-key. EAP does not support the re-keying of exported EAP

    keying material without EAP re-authentication, although EAP
    methods can support "fast reconnect" as defined in RFC3748
    Section 7.2.1.

(c) Key delete/install semantics. EAP does not synchronize

    installation or deletion of keying material on the EAP peer and
    authenticator.

(d) Lifetime negotiation. EAP does not support lifetime negotiation

    for exported EAP keying material, and existing EAP methods also
    do not support key lifetime negotiation.

(e) Guaranteed TSK freshness. Without a post-EAP handshake, TSKs

    can be reused if EAP keying material is cached.

These deficiencies are typically addressed via a post-EAP handshake known as the Secure Association Protocol.

Secure Association Protocol

Since neither EAP nor EAP methods provide for establishment of lower-layer security associations, it is RECOMMENDED that these facilities be provided within the Secure Association Protocol, including:

(a) Entity Naming. A basic feature of a Secure Association Protocol

    is the explicit naming of the parties engaged in the exchange.
    Without explicit identification, the parties engaged in the
    exchange are not identified and the scope of the EAP keying
    parameters negotiated during the EAP exchange is undefined.

(b) Mutual proof of possession of EAP keying material. During the

    Secure Association Protocol, the EAP peer and authenticator MUST
    demonstrate possession of the keying material transported
    between the backend authentication server and authenticator
    (e.g., MSK), in order to demonstrate that the peer and
    authenticator have been authorized.  Since mutual proof of
    possession is not the same as mutual authentication, the peer
    cannot verify authenticator assertions (including the
    authenticator identity) as a result of this exchange.
    Authenticator identity verification is discussed in Section 2.3.

(c) Secure capabilities negotiation. In order to protect against

    spoofing during the discovery phase, ensure selection of the
    "best" ciphersuite, and protect against forging of negotiated
    security parameters, the Secure Association Protocol MUST
    support secure capabilities negotiation.  This includes the
    secure negotiation of usage modes, session parameters (such as
    security association identifiers (SAIDs) and key lifetimes),
    ciphersuites and required filters, including confirmation of
    security-relevant capabilities discovered during phase 0.  The
    Secure Association Protocol MUST support integrity and replay
    protection of all capability negotiation messages.

(d) Key naming and selection. Where key caching is supported, it is

    possible for the EAP peer and authenticator to share more than
    one key of a given type.  As a result, the Secure Association
    Protocol MUST explicitly name the keys used in the proof of
    possession exchange, so as to prevent confusion when more than
    one set of keying material could potentially be used as the
    basis for the exchange.  Use of the key naming mechanism
    described in Section 1.4.1 is RECOMMENDED.
    In order to support the correct processing of phase 2 security
    associations, the Secure Association (phase 2) protocol MUST
    support the naming of phase 2 security associations and
    associated transient session keys so that the correct set of
    transient session keys can be identified for processing a given
    packet.  The phase 2 Secure Association Protocol also MUST
    support transient session key activation and SHOULD support
    deletion so that establishment and re-establishment of transient
    session keys can be synchronized between the parties.

(e) Generation of fresh transient session keys (TSKs). Where the

    lower layer supports caching of keying material, the EAP peer
    lower layer can initiate a new session using keying material
    that was derived in a previous session.  Were the TSKs to be
    derived solely from a portion of the exported EAP keying
    material, this would result in reuse of the session keys that
    could expose the underlying ciphersuite to attack.
    In lower layers where caching of keying material is supported,
    the Secure Association Protocol phase is REQUIRED, and MUST
    support the derivation of fresh unicast and multicast TSKs, even
    when the transported keying material provided by the backend
    authentication server is not fresh.  This is typically supported
    via the exchange of nonces or counters, which are then mixed
    with the keying material in order to generate fresh unicast
    (phase 2a) and possibly multicast (phase 2b) session keys.  By
    not using exported EAP keying material directly to protect data,
    the Secure Association Protocol protects it against compromise.

(f) Key lifetime management. This includes explicit key lifetime

    negotiation or seamless re-key.  EAP does not support the
    re-keying of EAP keying material without re-authentication, and
    existing EAP methods do not support key lifetime negotiation.
    As a result, the Secure Association Protocol MAY handle the
    re-key and determination of the key lifetime.  Where key caching
    is supported, secure negotiation of key lifetimes is
    RECOMMENDED.  Lower layers that support re-key, but not key
    caching, may not require key lifetime negotiation.  For example,
    a difference between IKEv1 RFC2409 and IKEv2 RFC4306 is that
    in IKEv1 SA lifetimes were negotiated; in IKEv2, each end of the
    SA is responsible for enforcing its own lifetime policy on the
    SA and re-keying the SA when necessary.

(g) Key state resynchronization. It is possible for the peer or

    authenticator to reboot or reclaim resources, clearing portions
    or all of the key cache.  Therefore, key lifetime negotiation
    cannot guarantee that the key cache will remain synchronized,
    and it may not be possible for the peer to determine before
    attempting to use a key whether it exists within the
    authenticator cache.  It is therefore RECOMMENDED for the EAP
    lower layer to provide a mechanism for key state
    resynchronization, either via the SAP or using a lower layer
    indication (see RFC3748 Section 3.4).  Where the peer and
    authenticator do not jointly possess a key with which to protect
    the resynchronization exchange, secure resynchronization is not
    possible, and alternatives (such as an initiation of EAP
    re-authentication after expiration of a timer) are needed to
    ensure timely resynchronization.

(h) Key scope synchronization. To support key scope determination,

    the Secure Association Protocol SHOULD provide a mechanism by
    which the peer can determine the scope of the key cache on each
    authenticator and by which the authenticator can determine the
    scope of the key cache on a peer.  This includes negotiation of
    restrictions on key usage.

(i) Traffic profile negotiation. The traffic to be protected by a

    lower-layer security association will not necessarily have the
    same lower-layer source or destination address as the EAP peer
    and authenticator, and it is possible for the peer and
    authenticator to negotiate multiple security associations, each
    with a different traffic profile.  Where this is the case, the
    profile of protected traffic SHOULD be explicitly negotiated.
    For example, in IKEv2 it is possible for an Initiator and
    Responder to utilize EAP for authentication, then negotiate a
    Tunnel Mode Security Association (SA), which permits passing of
    traffic originating from hosts other than the Initiator and
    Responder.  Similarly, in IEEE 802.16e, a Subscriber Station
    (SS) can forward traffic to the Base Station (BS), which
    originates from the Local Area Network (LAN) to which it is
    attached.  To enable this, Security Associations within IEEE
    802.16e are identified by the Connection Identifier (CID), not
    by the EAP peer and authenticator MAC addresses.  In both IKEv2
    and IEEE 802.16e, multiple security associations can exist
    between the EAP peer and authenticator, each with their own
    traffic profile and quality of service parameters.

(j) Direct operation. Since the phase 2 Secure Association Protocol

    is concerned with the establishment of security associations
    between the EAP peer and authenticator, including the derivation
    of transient session keys, only those parties have "a need to
    know" the transient session keys.  The Secure Association
    Protocol MUST operate directly between the peer and
    authenticator and MUST NOT be passed-through to the backend
    authentication server or include additional parties.

(k) Bi-directional operation. While some ciphersuites only require

    a single set of transient session keys to protect traffic in
    both directions, other ciphersuites require a unique set of
    transient session keys in each direction.  The phase 2 Secure
    Association Protocol SHOULD provide for the derivation of
    unicast and multicast keys in each direction, so as not to
    require two separate phase 2 exchanges in order to create a
    bi-directional phase 2 security association.  See RFC3748
    Section 2.4 for more discussion.

Key Scope

Absent explicit specification within the lower layer, after the completion of phase 1b, transported keying material, and parameters are bound to the EAP peer and authenticator, but are not bound to a specific peer or authenticator port.

While EAP keying material passed down to the lower layer is not intrinsically bound to particular authenticator and peer ports, TSKs MAY be bound to particular authenticator and peer ports by the Secure Association Protocol. However, a lower layer MAY also permit TSKs to be used on multiple peer and/or authenticator ports, provided that TSK freshness is guaranteed (such as by keeping replay counter state within the authenticator).

In order to further limit the key scope, the following measures are suggested:

(a) The lower layer MAY specify additional restrictions on key

    usage, such as limiting the use of EAP keying material and
    parameters on the EAP peer to the port over which the EAP
    conversation was conducted.

(b) The backend authentication server and authenticator MAY

    implement additional attributes in order to further restrict the
    scope of keying material.  For example, in IEEE 802.11, the
    backend authentication server can provide the authenticator with
    a list of authorized Called or Calling-Station-Ids and/or SSIDs
    for which keying material is valid.

(c) Where the backend authentication server provides attributes

    restricting the key scope, it is RECOMMENDED that restrictions
    be securely communicated by the authenticator to the peer.  This
    can be accomplished using the Secure Association Protocol, but
    also can be accomplished via the EAP method or the lower layer.

Parent-Child Relationships

When an EAP re-authentication takes place, new EAP keying material is exported by the EAP method. In EAP lower layers where EAP re-authentication eventually results in TSK replacement, the maximum

lifetime of derived keying material (including TSKs) can be less than or equal to that of EAP keying material (MSK/EMSK), but it cannot be greater.

Where TSKs are derived from or are wrapped by exported EAP keying material, compromise of that exported EAP keying material implies compromise of TSKs. Therefore, if EAP keying material is considered stale, not only SHOULD EAP re-authentication be initiated, but also replacement of child keys, including TSKs.

Where EAP keying material is used only for entity authentication but not for TSK derivation (as in IKEv2), compromise of exported EAP keying material does not imply compromise of the TSKs. Nevertheless, the compromise of EAP keying material could enable an attacker to impersonate an authenticator, so that EAP re-authentication and TSK re-key are RECOMMENDED.

With respect to IKEv2, Section 5.2 of RFC4718, "IKEv2 Clarifications and Implementation Guidelines", states:

  Rekeying the IKE_SA and reauthentication are different concepts in
  IKEv2.  Rekeying the IKE_SA establishes new keys for the IKE_SA
  and resets the Message ID counters, but it does not authenticate
  the parties again (no AUTH or EAP payloads are involved)...  This
  means that reauthentication also establishes new keys for the
  IKE_SA and CHILD_SAs.  Therefore while rekeying can be performed
  more often than reauthentication, the situation where
  "authentication lifetime" is shorter than "key lifetime" does not
  make sense.

Child keys that are used frequently (such as TSKs that are used for traffic protection) can expire sooner than the exported EAP keying material on which they are dependent, so that it is advantageous to support re-key of child keys prior to EAP re-authentication. Note that deletion of the MSK/EMSK does not necessarily imply deletion of TSKs or child keys.

Failure to mutually prove possession of exported EAP keying material during the Secure Association Protocol exchange need not be grounds for deletion of keying material by both parties; rate-limiting Secure Association Protocol exchanges could be used to prevent a brute force attack.

Local Key Lifetimes

The Transient EAP Keys (TEKs) are session keys used to protect the EAP conversation. The TEKs are internal to the EAP method and are not exported. TEKs are typically created during an EAP conversation, used until the end of the conversation and then discarded. However, methods can re-key TEKs during an EAP conversation.

When using TEKs within an EAP conversation or across conversations, it is necessary to ensure that replay protection and key separation requirements are fulfilled. For instance, if a replay counter is used, TEK re-key MUST occur prior to wrapping of the counter. Similarly, TSKs MUST remain cryptographically separate from TEKs despite TEK re-keying or caching. This prevents TEK compromise from leading directly to compromise of the TSKs and vice versa.

EAP methods MAY cache local EAP keying material (TEKs) that can persist for multiple EAP conversations when fast reconnect is used RFC3748. For example, EAP methods based on TLS (such as EAP-TLS RFC5216) derive and cache the TLS Master Secret, typically for substantial time periods. The lifetime of other local EAP keying material calculated within the EAP method is defined by the method. Note that in general, when using fast reconnect, there is no guarantee that the original long-term credentials are still in the possession of the peer. For instance, a smart-card holding the private key for EAP-TLS may have been removed. EAP servers SHOULD also verify that the long-term credentials are still valid, such as by checking that certificate used in the original authentication has not yet expired.

Exported and Calculated Key Lifetimes

The following mechanisms are available for communicating the lifetime of keying material between the EAP peer, server, and authenticator:

  AAA protocols  (backend authentication server and authenticator)
  Lower-layer mechanisms (authenticator and peer)
  EAP method-specific negotiation (peer and server)

Where the EAP method does not support the negotiation of the lifetime of exported EAP keying material, and a key lifetime negotiation mechanism is not provided by the lower layer, it is possible that there will not be a way for the peer to learn the lifetime of keying material. This can leave the peer uncertain of how long the authenticator will maintain keying material within the key cache. In this case the lifetime of keying material can be managed as a system parameter on the peer and authenticator; a default lifetime of 8 hours is RECOMMENDED.

AAA Protocols

AAA protocols such as RADIUS RFC2865 and Diameter RFC4072 can be used to communicate the maximum key lifetime from the backend authentication server to the authenticator.

The Session-Timeout Attribute is defined for RADIUS in RFC2865 and for Diameter in RFC4005. Where EAP is used for authentication, RFC3580 Section 3.17, indicates that a Session-Timeout Attribute sent in an Access-Accept along with a Termination-Action value of RADIUS-Request specifies the maximum number of seconds of service provided prior to EAP re-authentication.

However, there is also a need to be able to specify the maximum lifetime of cached keying material. Where EAP pre-authentication is supported, cached keying material can be pre-established on the authenticator prior to session start and will remain there until expiration. EAP lower layers supporting caching of keying material MAY also persist that material after the end of a session, enabling the peer to subsequently resume communication utilizing the cached keying material. In these situations it can be desirable for the backend authentication server to specify the maximum lifetime of cached keying material.

To accomplish this, [IEEE-802.11] overloads the Session-Timeout Attribute, assuming that it represents the maximum time after which transported keying material will expire on the authenticator, regardless of whether transported keying material is cached.

An IEEE 802.11 authenticator receiving transported keying material is expected to initialize a timer to the Session-Timeout value, and once the timer expires, the transported keying material expires. Whether this results in session termination or EAP re-authentication is controlled by the value of the Termination-Action Attribute. Where EAP re-authentication occurs, the transported keying material is replaced, and with it, new calculated keys are put in place. Where session termination occurs, transported and derived keying material is deleted.

Overloading the Session-Timeout Attribute is problematic in situations where it is necessary to control the maximum session time and key lifetime independently. For example, it might be desirable to limit the lifetime of cached keying material to 5 minutes while permitting a user once authenticated to remain connected for up to an hour without re-authenticating. As a result, in the future, additional attributes can be specified to control the lifetime of cached keys; these attributes MAY modify the meaning of the Session-Timeout Attribute in specific circumstances.

Since the TSK lifetime is often determined by authenticator resources, and the backend authentication server has no insight into the TSK derivation process by the principle of ciphersuite independence, it is not appropriate for the backend authentication server to manage any aspect of the TSK derivation process, including the TSK lifetime.

Lower-Layer Mechanisms

Lower-layer mechanisms can be used to enable the lifetime of keying material to be negotiated between the peer and authenticator. This can be accomplished either using the Secure Association Protocol or within the lower-layer transport.

Where TSKs are established as the result of a Secure Association Protocol exchange, it is RECOMMENDED that the Secure Association Protocol include support for TSK re-key. Where the TSK is taken directly from the MSK, there is no need to manage the TSK lifetime as a separate parameter, since the TSK lifetime and MSK lifetime are identical.

EAP Method-Specific Negotiation

As noted in RFC3748 Section 7.10:

  In order to provide keying material for use in a subsequently
  negotiated ciphersuite, an EAP method supporting key derivation
  MUST export a Master Session Key (MSK) of at least 64 octets, and
  an Extended Master Session Key (EMSK) of at least 64 octets.  EAP
  Methods deriving keys MUST provide for mutual authentication
  between the EAP peer and the EAP Server.

However, EAP does not itself support the negotiation of lifetimes for exported EAP keying material such as the MSK, EMSK, and IV.

While EAP itself does not support lifetime negotiation, it would be possible to specify methods that do. However, systems that rely on key lifetime negotiation within EAP methods would only function with these methods. Also, there is no guarantee that the key lifetime negotiated within the EAP method would be compatible with backend authentication server policy. In the interest of method independence and compatibility with backend authentication server implementations, management of the lifetime of keying material SHOULD NOT be provided within EAP methods.

Key Cache Synchronization

Key lifetime negotiation alone cannot guarantee key cache synchronization. Even where a lower-layer exchange is run immediately after EAP in order to determine the lifetime of keying material, it is still possible for the authenticator to purge all or part of the key cache prematurely (e.g., due to reboot or need to reclaim memory).

The lower layer can utilize the Discovery phase 0 to improve key cache synchronization. For example, if the authenticator manages the key cache by deleting the oldest key first, the relative creation time of the last key to be deleted could be advertised within the Discovery phase, enabling the peer to determine whether keying material had been prematurely expired from the authenticator key cache.

Key Strength

As noted in Section 2.1, EAP lower layers determine TSKs in different ways. Where exported EAP keying material is utilized in the derivation, encryption or authentication of TSKs, it is possible for EAP key generation to represent the weakest link.

In order to ensure that methods produce EAP keying material of an appropriate symmetric key strength, it is RECOMMENDED that EAP methods utilizing public key cryptography choose a public key that has a cryptographic strength providing the required level of attack resistance. This is typically provided by configuring EAP methods, since there is no coordination between the lower layer and EAP method with respect to minimum required symmetric key strength.

Section 5 of BCP 86 RFC3766 offers advice on the required RSA or DH module and DSA subgroup size in bits, for a given level of attack resistance in bits. The National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) also offers advice on appropriate key sizes in [SP800-57].

Key Wrap

The key wrap specified in RFC2548, which is based on an MD5-based stream cipher, has known problems, as described in RFC3579 Section 4.3. RADIUS uses the shared secret for multiple purposes, including per-packet authentication and attribute hiding, considerable information is exposed about the shared secret with each packet. This exposes the shared secret to dictionary attacks. MD5 is used both to compute the RADIUS Response Authenticator and the Message-Authenticator Attribute, and concerns exist relating to the security of this hash [MD5Collision].

As discussed in RFC3579 Section 4.3, the security vulnerabilities of RADIUS are extensive, and therefore development of an alternative key wrap technique based on the RADIUS shared secret would not substantially improve security. As a result, RFC3579 Section 4.2 recommends running RADIUS over IPsec. The same approach is taken in Diameter EAP RFC4072, which in Section 4.1.3 defines the EAP-Master-Session-Key Attribute-Value Pair (AVP) in clear-text, to be protected by IPsec or TLS.

Handoff Vulnerabilities

A handoff occurs when an EAP peer moves to a new authenticator. Several mechanisms have been proposed for reducing handoff latency within networks utilizing EAP. These include:

EAP pre-authentication

  In EAP pre-authentication, an EAP peer pre-establishes EAP keying
  material with an authenticator prior to arrival.  EAP
  pre-authentication only affects the timing of EAP authentication,
  but does not shorten or eliminate EAP (phase 1a) or AAA (phase 1b)
  exchanges;  Discovery (phase 0) and Secure Association Protocol
  (phase 2) exchanges occur as described in Section 1.3.  As a
  result, the primary benefit is to enable EAP authentication to be
  removed from the handoff critical path, thereby reducing latency.
  Use of EAP pre-authentication within IEEE 802.11 is described in
  [IEEE-802.11] and [8021XPreAuth].

Proactive key distribution

  In proactive key distribution, keying material and authorizations
  are transported from the backend authentication server to a
  candidate authenticator in advance of a handoff.  As a result, EAP
  (phase 1a) is not needed, but the Discovery (phase 0), and Secure
  Association Protocol exchanges (phase 2) are still necessary.
  Within the AAA exchange (phase 1b), authorization and key
  distribution functions are typically supported, but not
  authentication.  Proactive key distribution is described in
  [MishraPro], [IEEE-03-084], and [HANDOFF].

Key caching

  Caching of EAP keying material enables an EAP peer to re-attach to
  an authenticator without requiring EAP (phase 1a) or AAA (phase
  1b) exchanges.  However, Discovery (phase 0) and Secure
  Association Protocol (phase 2) exchanges are still needed.  Use of
  key caching within IEEE 802.11 is described in [IEEE-802.11].

Context transfer

  In context transfer schemes, keying material and authorizations
  are transferred between a previous authenticator and a new
  authenticator.  This can occur in response to a handoff request by
  the EAP peer, or in advance, as in proactive key distribution.  As
  a result, EAP (phase 1a) is eliminated, but not the Discovery
  (phase 0) or Secure Association Protocol exchanges (phase 2).  If
  a secure channel can be established between the new and previous
  authenticator without assistance from the backend authentication
  server, then the AAA exchange (phase 1b) can be eliminated;
  otherwise, it is still needed, although it can be shortened.
  Context transfer protocols are described in [IEEE-802.11F] (now
  deprecated) and "Context Transfer Protocol (CXTP)" RFC4067.
  "Fast Authentication Methods for Handovers between IEEE 802.11
  Wireless LANs" [Bargh] analyzes fast handoff techniques, including
  context transfer mechanisms.

Token distribution

  In token distribution schemes, the EAP peer is provided with a
  credential, subsequently enabling it to authenticate with one or
  more additional authenticators.  During the subsequent
  authentications, EAP (phase 1a) is eliminated or shortened; the
  Discovery (phase 0) and Secure Association Protocol exchanges
  (phase 2) still occur, although the latter can be shortened.  If
  the token includes authorizations and can be validated by an
  authenticator without assistance from the backend authentication
  server, then the AAA exchange (phase 1b) can be eliminated;
  otherwise, it is still needed, although it can be shortened.
  Token-based schemes, initially proposed in early versions of IEEE
  802.11i [IEEE-802.11i], are described in [Token], [Tokenk], and
  [SHORT-TERM].

The sections that follow discuss the security vulnerabilities introduced by the above schemes.

EAP Pre-Authentication

EAP pre-authentication differs from a normal EAP conversation primarily with respect to the lower-layer encapsulation. For example, in [IEEE-802.11], EAP pre-authentication frames utilize a distinct Ethertype, but otherwise conforms to the encapsulation described in [IEEE-802.1X]. As a result, an EAP pre-authentication conversation differs little from the model described in Section 1.3, other than the introduction of a delay between phase 1 and phase 2.

EAP pre-authentication relies on lower-layer mechanisms for discovery of candidate authenticators. Where discovery can provide information on candidate authenticators outside the immediate listening range, and the peer can determine whether it already possesses valid EAP keying material with candidate authenticators, the peer can avoid unnecessary EAP pre-authentications and can establish EAP keying material well in advance, regardless of the coverage overlap between authenticators. However, if the peer can only discover candidate authenticators within listening range and cannot determine whether it can reuse existing EAP keying material, then it is possible that the peer will not be able to complete EAP pre-authentication prior to connectivity loss or that it can pre-authenticate multiple times with the same authenticator, increasing backend authentication server load.

Since a peer can complete EAP pre-authentication with an authenticator without eventually attaching to it, it is possible that phase 2 will not occur. In this case, an Accounting-Request signifying the start of service will not be sent, or will only be sent with a substantial delay after the completion of authentication.

As noted in "IEEE 802.1X RADIUS Usage Guidelines" RFC3580, the AAA exchange resulting from EAP pre-authentication differs little from an ordinary exchange described in "RADIUS Support for EAP" RFC3579. For example, since in IEEE 802.11 [IEEE-802.11] an Association exchange does not occur prior to EAP pre-authentication, the SSID is not known by the authenticator at authentication time, so that an Access-Request cannot include the SSID within the Called-Station-Id attribute as described in RFC3580 Section 3.20.

Since only the absence of an SSID in the Called-Station-Id attribute distinguishes an EAP pre-authentication attempt, if the authenticator does not always include the SSID for a normal EAP authentication attempt, it is possible that the backend authentication server will not be able to determine whether a session constitutes an EAP pre-authentication attempt, potentially resulting in authorization or accounting problems. Where the number of simultaneous sessions is limited, the backend authentication server can refuse to authorize a valid EAP pre-authentication attempt or can enable the peer to engage in more simultaneous sessions than they are authorized for. Where EAP pre-authentication occurs with an authenticator which the peer never attaches to, it is possible that the backend accounting server will not be able to determine whether the absence of an Accounting-Request was due to packet loss or a session that never started.

In order to enable pre-authentication requests to be handled more reliably, it is RECOMMENDED that AAA protocols explicitly identify EAP pre-authentication. In order to suppress unnecessary EAP pre-authentication exchanges, it is RECOMMENDED that authenticators unambiguously identify themselves as described in Section 2.3.

Proactive Key Distribution

In proactive key distribution schemes, the backend authentication server transports keying material and authorizations to an authenticator in advance of the arrival of the peer. The authenticators selected to receive the transported key material are selected based on past patterns of peer movement between authenticators known as the "neighbor graph". In order to reduce handoff latency, proactive key distribution schemes typically only demonstrate proof of possession of transported keying material between the EAP peer and authenticator. During a handoff, the backend authentication server is not provided with proof that the peer successfully authenticated to an authenticator; instead, the authenticator generates a stream of accounting messages without a corresponding set of authentication exchanges. As described in [MishraPro], knowledge of the neighbor graph can be established via static configuration or analysis of authentication exchanges. In

order to prevent corruption of the neighbor graph, new neighbor graph entries can only be created as the result of a successful EAP exchange, and accounting packets with no corresponding authentication exchange need to be verified to correspond to neighbor graph entries (e.g., corresponding to handoffs between neighbors).

In order to prevent compromise of one authenticator from resulting in compromise of other authenticators, cryptographic separation needs to be maintained between the keying material transported to each authenticator. However, even where cryptographic separation is maintained, an attacker compromising an authenticator can still disrupt the operation of other authenticators. As noted in RFC3579 Section 4.3.7, in the absence of spoofing detection within the AAA infrastructure, it is possible for EAP authenticators to impersonate each other. By forging NAS identification attributes within authentication messages, an attacker compromising one authenticator could corrupt the neighbor graph, tricking the backend authentication server into transporting keying material to arbitrary authenticators. While this would not enable recovery of EAP keying material without breaking fundamental cryptographic assumptions, it could enable subsequent fraudulent accounting messages, or allow an attacker to disrupt service by increasing load on the backend authentication server or thrashing the authenticator key cache.

Since proactive key distribution requires the distribution of derived keying material to candidate authenticators, the effectiveness of this scheme depends on the ability of backend authentication server to anticipate the movement of the EAP peer. Since proactive key distribution relies on backend authentication server knowledge of the neighbor graph, it is most applicable to intra-domain handoff scenarios. However, in inter-domain handoff, where there can be many authenticators, peers can frequently connect to authenticators that have not been previously encountered, making it difficult for the backend authentication server to derive a complete neighbor graph.

Since proactive key distribution schemes typically require introduction of server-initiated messages as described in RFC5176 and [HANDOFF], security issues described in RFC5176 Section 6 are applicable, including authorization (Section 6.1) and replay detection (Section 6.3) problems.

AAA Bypass

Fast handoff techniques that enable elimination of the AAA exchange (phase 1b) differ fundamentally from typical network access scenarios (dial-up, wired LAN, etc.) that include user authentication as well as authorization for the offered service. Where the AAA exchange (phase 1b) is omitted, authorizations and keying material are not provided by the backend authentication server, and as a result, they need to be supplied by other means. This section describes some of the implications.

Key Transport

Where transported keying material is not supplied by the backend authentication server, it needs to be provided by another party authorized to access that keying material. As noted in Section 1.5, only the EAP peer, authenticator, and server are authorized to possess transported keying material. Since EAP peers do not trust each other, if the backend authentication server does not supply transported keying material to a new authenticator, it can only be provided by a previous authenticator.

As noted in Section 1.5, the goal of the EAP conversation is to derive session keys known only to the peer and the authenticator. If keying material is replicated between a previous authenticator and a new authenticator, then the previous authenticator can possess session keys used between the peer and new authenticator. Also, the new authenticator can possess session keys used between the peer and the previous authenticator.

If a one-way function is used to derive the keying material to be transported to the new authenticator, then the new authenticator cannot possess previous session keys without breaking a fundamental cryptographic assumption.

Authorization

As a part of the authentication process, the backend authentication server determines the user's authorization profile and transmits the authorizations to the authenticator along with the transported keying material. Typically, the profile is determined based on the user identity, but a certificate presented by the user can also provide authorization information.

The backend authentication server is responsible for making a user authorization decision, which requires answering the following questions:

(a) Is this a legitimate user of this network?

(b) Is the user allowed to access this network?

(c) Is the user permitted to access this network on this day and at

    this time?

(d) Is the user within the concurrent session limit?

(e) Are there any fraud, credit limit, or other concerns that could

    lead to access denial?

(f) If access is to be granted, what are the service parameters

    (mandatory tunneling, bandwidth, filters, and so on) to be
    provisioned for the user?

While the authorization decision is, in principle, simple, the distributed decision making process can add complexity. Where brokers or proxies are involved, all of the AAA entities in the chain from the authenticator to the home backend authentication server are involved in the decision. For example, a broker can deny access even if the home backend authentication server would allow it, or a proxy can add authorizations (e.g., bandwidth limits).

Decisions can be based on static policy definitions and profiles as well as dynamic state (e.g., time of day or concurrent session limits). In addition to the Accept/Reject decisions made by AAA entities, service parameters or constraints can be communicated to the authenticator.

The criteria for Accept/Reject decisions or the reasons for choosing particular authorizations are typically not communicated to the authenticator, only the final result is. As a result, the authenticator has no way to know on what the decision was based. Was a set of authorization parameters sent because this service is always provided to the user, or was the decision based on the time of day and the capabilities of the authenticator?

Correctness

When the AAA exchange (phase 1b) is bypassed, several challenges arise in ensuring correct authorization:

Theft of service

  Bypassing the AAA exchange (phase 1b) SHOULD NOT enable a user to
  extend their network access or gain access to services they are
  not entitled to.

Consideration of network-wide state

  Handoff techniques SHOULD NOT render the backend authentication
  server incapable of keeping track of network-wide state.  For
  example, a backend authentication server can need to keep track of
  simultaneous user sessions.

Elevation of privilege

  Backend authentication servers often perform conditional
  evaluation, in which the authorizations returned in an
  Access-Accept message are contingent on the authenticator or on
  dynamic state such as the time of day.  In this situation,
  bypassing the AAA exchange could enable unauthorized access unless
  the restrictions are explicitly encoded within the authorizations
  provided by the backend authentication server.

A handoff mechanism that provides proper authorization is said to be "correct". One condition for correctness is as follows:

  For a handoff to be "correct" it MUST establish on the new
  authenticator the same authorizations as would have been created
  had the new authenticator completed a AAA conversation with the
  backend authentication server.

A properly designed handoff scheme will only succeed if it is "correct" in this way. If a successful handoff would establish "incorrect" authorizations, it is preferable for it to fail. Where the supported services differ between authenticators, a handoff that bypasses the backend authentication server is likely to fail. Section 1.1 of RFC2865 states:

  A authenticator that does not implement a given service MUST NOT
  implement the RADIUS attributes for that service.  For example, a
  authenticator that is unable to offer ARAP service MUST NOT
  implement the RADIUS attributes for ARAP.  A authenticator MUST
  treat a RADIUS access-accept authorizing an unavailable service as
  an access-reject instead.

This behavior applies to attributes that are known, but not implemented. For attributes that are unknown, Section 5 of RFC2865 states:

  A RADIUS server MAY ignore Attributes with an unknown Type.  A
  RADIUS client MAY ignore Attributes with an unknown Type.

In order to perform a correct handoff, if a new authenticator is provided with RADIUS authorizations for a known but unavailable service, then it MUST process these authorizations the same way it would handle a RADIUS Access-Accept requesting an unavailable

service; this MUST cause the handoff to fail. However, if a new authenticator is provided with authorizations including unknown attributes, then these attributes MAY be ignored. The definition of a "known but unsupported service" MUST encompass requests for unavailable security services. This includes vendor-specific attributes related to security, such as those described in RFC2548. Although it can seem somewhat counter-intuitive, failure is indeed the "correct" result where a known but unsupported service is requested.

Presumably, a correctly configured backend authentication server would not request that an authenticator provide a service that it does not implement. This implies that if the new authenticator were to complete a AAA conversation, it would be likely to receive different service instructions. Failure of the handoff is the desired result since it will cause the new authenticator to go back to the backend server in order to receive the appropriate service definition.

Handoff mechanisms that bypass the backend authentication server are most likely to be successful when employed in a homogeneous deployment within a single administrative domain. In a heterogeneous deployment, the backend authentication server can return different authorizations depending on the authenticator making the request in order to make sure that the requested service is consistent with the authenticator capabilities. Where a backend authentication server would send different authorizations to the new authenticator than were sent to a previous authenticator, transferring authorizations between the previous authenticator and the new authenticator will result in incorrect authorization.

Virtual LAN (VLAN) support is defined in [IEEE-802.1Q]; RADIUS support for dynamic VLANs is described in RFC3580 and RFC4675. If some authenticators support dynamic VLANs while others do not, then attributes present in the Access-Request (such as the NAS-Port-Type, NAS-IP-Address, NAS-IPv6-Address, and NAS-Identifier) could be examined by the backend authentication server to determine when VLAN attributes will be returned, and if so, which ones. However, if the backend authenticator is bypassed, then a handoff occurring between authenticators supporting different VLAN capabilities could result in a user obtaining access to an unauthorized VLAN (e.g., a user with access to a guest VLAN being given unrestricted access to the network).

Similarly, it is preferable for a handoff between an authenticator providing confidentiality and another that does not to fail, since if the handoff were successful, the user would be moved from a secure to an insecure channel without permission from the backend authentication server.

Security Considerations

The EAP threat model is described in RFC3748 Section 7.1. The security properties of EAP methods (known as "security claims") are described in RFC3748 Section 7.2.1. EAP method requirements for applications such as Wireless LAN authentication are described in RFC4017. The RADIUS threat model is described in RFC3579 Section 4.1, and responses to these threats are described in RFC3579, Sections 4.2 and 4.3.

However, in addition to threats against EAP and AAA, there are other system level threats. In developing the threat model, it is assumed that:

  All traffic is visible to the attacker.
  The attacker can alter, forge, or replay messages.
  The attacker can reroute messages to another principal.
  The attacker can be a principal or an outsider.
  The attacker can compromise any key that is sufficiently old.

Threats arising from these assumptions include:

(a) An attacker can compromise or steal an EAP peer or

    authenticator, in an attempt to gain access to other EAP peers
    or authenticators or to obtain long-term secrets.

(b) An attacker can attempt a downgrade attack in order to exploit

    known weaknesses in an authentication method or cryptographic
    algorithm.

(c) An attacker can try to modify or spoof packets, including

    Discovery or Secure Association Protocol frames, EAP or AAA
    packets.

(d) An attacker can attempt to induce an EAP peer, authenticator, or

    server to disclose keying material to an unauthorized party, or
    utilize keying material outside the context that it was intended
    for.

(e) An attacker can alter, forge, or replay packets.

(f) An attacker can cause an EAP peer, authenticator, or server to

    reuse a stale key.  Use of stale keys can also occur
    unintentionally.  For example, a poorly implemented backend
    authentication server can provide stale keying material to an
    authenticator, or a poorly implemented authenticator can reuse
    nonces.

(g) An authenticated attacker can attempt to obtain elevated

    privilege in order to access information that it does not have
    rights to.

(h) An attacker can attempt a man-in-the-middle attack in order to

    gain access to the network.

(i) An attacker can compromise an EAP authenticator in an effort to

    commit fraud.  For example, a compromised authenticator can
    provide incorrect information to the EAP peer and/or server via
    out-of-band mechanisms (such as via a AAA or lower-layer
    protocol).  This includes impersonating another authenticator,
    or providing inconsistent information to the peer and EAP
    server.

(j) An attacker can launch a denial-of-service attack against the

    EAP peer, authenticator, or backend authentication server.

In order to address these threats, RFC4962 Section 3 describes required and recommended security properties. The sections that follow analyze the compliance of EAP methods, AAA protocols, and Secure Association Protocols with those guidelines.

Peer and Authenticator Compromise

Requirement: In the event that an authenticator is compromised or stolen, an attacker can gain access to the network through that authenticator, or can obtain the credentials needed for the authenticator/AAA client to communicate with one or more backend authentication servers. Similarly, if a peer is compromised or stolen, an attacker can obtain credentials needed to communicate with one or more authenticators. A mandatory requirement from RFC4962 Section 3:

  Prevent the Domino effect
  Compromise of a single peer MUST NOT compromise keying material
  held by any other peer within the system, including session keys
  and long-term keys.  Likewise, compromise of a single
  authenticator MUST NOT compromise keying material held by any
  other authenticator within the system.  In the context of a key
  hierarchy, this means that the compromise of one node in the key
  hierarchy must not disclose the information necessary to
  compromise other branches in the key hierarchy.  Obviously, the
  compromise of the root of the key hierarchy will compromise all of
  the keys; however, a compromise in one branch MUST NOT result in
  the compromise of other branches.  There are many implications of
  this requirement; however, two implications deserve highlighting.
  First, the scope of the keying material must be defined and
  understood by all parties that communicate with a party that holds
  that keying material.  Second, a party that holds keying material
  in a key hierarchy must not share that keying material with
  parties that are associated with other branches in the key
  hierarchy.
  Group keys are an obvious exception.  Since all members of the
  group have a copy of the same key, compromise of any one of the
  group members will result in the disclosure of the group key.

Some of the implications of the requirement are as follows:

Key Sharing

    In order to be able to determine whether keying material has
    been shared, it is necessary for the identity of the EAP
    authenticator (NAS-Identifier) to be defined and understood by
    all parties that communicate with it.  EAP lower-layer
    specifications such as [IEEE-802.11], [IEEE-802.16e],
    [IEEE-802.1X], IKEv2 RFC4306, and PPP RFC1661 do not involve
    key sharing.

AAA Credential Sharing

    AAA credentials (such as RADIUS shared secrets, IPsec pre-shared
    keys or certificates) MUST NOT be shared between AAA clients,
    since if one AAA client were compromised, this would enable an
    attacker to impersonate other AAA clients to the backend
    authentication server, or even to impersonate a backend
    authentication server to other AAA clients.

Compromise of Long-Term Credentials

    An attacker obtaining keying material (such as TSKs, TEKs, or
    the MSK) MUST NOT be able to obtain long-term user credentials
    such as pre-shared keys, passwords, or private-keys without
    breaking a fundamental cryptographic assumption.  The mandatory
    requirements of RFC4017 Section 2.2 include generation of EAP
    keying material, capability to generate EAP keying material with
    128 bits of effective strength, resistance to dictionary
    attacks, shared state equivalence, and protection against
    man-in-the-middle attacks.

Cryptographic Negotiation

Mandatory requirements from RFC4962 Section 3:

  Cryptographic algorithm independent
  The AAA key management protocol MUST be cryptographic algorithm
  independent.  However, an EAP method MAY depend on a specific
  cryptographic algorithm.  The ability to negotiate the use of a
  particular cryptographic algorithm provides resilience against
  compromise of a particular cryptographic algorithm.  Algorithm
  independence is also REQUIRED with a Secure Association Protocol
  if one is defined.  This is usually accomplished by including an
  algorithm identifier and parameters in the protocol, and by
  specifying the algorithm requirements in the protocol
  specification.  While highly desirable, the ability to negotiate
  key derivation functions (KDFs) is not required.  For
  interoperability, at least one suite of mandatory-to-implement
  algorithms MUST be selected.  Note that without protection by
  IPsec as described in RFC3579 Section 4.2, RADIUS RFC2865 does
  not meet this requirement, since the integrity protection
  algorithm cannot be negotiated.
  This requirement does not mean that a protocol must support both
  public-key and symmetric-key cryptographic algorithms.  It means
  that the protocol needs to be structured in such a way that
  multiple public-key algorithms can be used whenever a public-key
  algorithm is employed.  Likewise, it means that the protocol needs
  to be structured in such a way that multiple symmetric-key
  algorithms can be used whenever a symmetric-key algorithm is
  employed.
  Confirm ciphersuite selection
  The selection of the "best" ciphersuite SHOULD be securely
  confirmed.  The mechanism SHOULD detect attempted roll-back
  attacks.

EAP methods satisfying RFC4017 Section 2.2 mandatory requirements and AAA protocols utilizing transmission-layer security are capable of addressing downgrade attacks. RFC3748 Section 7.2.1 describes the "protected ciphersuite negotiation" security claim that refers to the ability of an EAP method to negotiate the ciphersuite used to protect the EAP method conversation, as well as to integrity protect the ciphersuite negotiation. RFC4017 Section 2.2 requires EAP methods satisfying this security claim. Since TLS v1.2 RFC5246 and IKEv2 RFC4306 support negotiation of Key Derivation Functions (KDFs), EAP methods based on TLS or IKEv2 will, if properly designed,

inherit this capability. However, negotiation of KDFs is not required by RFC 4962 RFC4962, and EAP methods based on neither TLS nor IKEv2 typically do not support KDF negotiation.

When AAA protocols utilize TLS RFC5246 or IPsec RFC4301 for transmission layer security, they can leverage the cryptographic algorithm negotiation support provided by IKEv2 RFC4306 or TLS RFC5246. RADIUS RFC3579 by itself does not support cryptographic algorithm negotiation and relies on MD5 for integrity protection, authentication, and confidentiality. Given the known weaknesses in MD5 [MD5Collision], this is undesirable, and can be addressed via use of RADIUS over IPsec, as described in RFC3579 Section 4.2.

To ensure against downgrade attacks within lower-layer protocols, algorithm independence is REQUIRED with lower layers using EAP for key derivation. For interoperability, at least one suite of mandatory-to-implement algorithms MUST be selected. Lower-layer protocols supporting EAP for key derivation SHOULD also support secure ciphersuite negotiation as well as KDF negotiation.

As described in RFC1968, PPP ECP does not support secure ciphersuite negotiation. While [IEEE-802.16e] and [IEEE-802.11] support ciphersuite negotiation for protection of data, they do not support negotiation of the cryptographic primitives used within the Secure Association Protocol, such as message integrity checks (MICs) and KDFs.

Confidentiality and Authentication

Mandatory requirements from RFC4962 Section 3:

  Authenticate all parties
  Each party in the AAA key management protocol MUST be
  authenticated to the other parties with whom they communicate.
  Authentication mechanisms MUST maintain the confidentiality of any
  secret values used in the authentication process.  When a secure
  association protocol is used to establish session keys, the
  parties involved in the secure association protocol MUST identify
  themselves using identities that are meaningful in the lower-layer
  protocol environment that will employ the session keys.  In this
  situation, the authenticator and peer may be known by different
  identifiers in the AAA protocol environment and the lower-layer
  protocol environment, making authorization decisions difficult
  without a clear key scope.  If the lower-layer identifier of the
  peer will be used to make authorization decisions, then the pair
  of identifiers associated with the peer MUST be authorized by the
  authenticator and/or the AAA server.
  AAA protocols, such as RADIUS RFC2865 and Diameter RFC3588,
  provide a mechanism for the identification of AAA clients; since
  the EAP authenticator and AAA client are always co-resident, this
  mechanism is applicable to the identification of EAP
  authenticators.
  When multiple base stations and a "controller" (such as a WLAN
  switch) comprise a single EAP authenticator, the "base station
  identity" is not relevant; the EAP method conversation takes place
  between the EAP peer and the EAP server.  Also, many base stations
  can share the same authenticator identity.  The authenticator
  identity is important in the AAA protocol exchange and the secure
  association protocol conversation.
  Authentication mechanisms MUST NOT employ plaintext passwords.
  Passwords may be used provided that they are not sent to another
  party without confidentiality protection.
  Keying material confidentiality and integrity
  While preserving algorithm independence, confidentiality and
  integrity of all keying material MUST be maintained.

Conformance to these requirements is analyzed in the sections that follow.

Spoofing

Per-packet authentication and integrity protection provides protection against spoofing attacks.

Diameter RFC3588 provides support for per-packet authentication and integrity protection via use of IPsec or TLS. RADIUS/EAP RFC3579 provides for per-packet authentication and integrity protection via use of the Message-Authenticator Attribute.

RFC3748 Section 7.2.1 describes the "integrity protection" security claim and RFC4017 Section 2.2 requires EAP methods supporting this claim.

In order to prevent forgery of Secure Association Protocol frames, per-frame authentication and integrity protection is RECOMMENDED on all messages. IKEv2 RFC4306 supports per-frame integrity

protection and authentication, as does the Secure Association Protocol defined in [IEEE-802.16e]. [IEEE-802.11] supports per-frame integrity protection and authentication on all messages within the 4-way handshake except the first message. An attack leveraging this omission is described in [Analysis].

Impersonation

Both RADIUS RFC2865 and Diameter RFC3588 implementations are potentially vulnerable to a rogue authenticator impersonating another authenticator. While both protocols support mutual authentication between the AAA client/authenticator and the backend authentication server, the security mechanisms vary.

In RADIUS, the shared secret used for authentication is determined by the source address of the RADIUS packet. However, when RADIUS Access-Requests are forwarded by a proxy, the NAS-IP-Address, NAS-Identifier, or NAS-IPv6-Address attributes received by the RADIUS server will not correspond to the source address. As noted in RFC3579 Section 4.3.7, if the first-hop proxy does not check the NAS identification attributes against the source address in the Access-Request packet, it is possible for a rogue authenticator to forge NAS-IP-Address RFC2865, NAS-IPv6-Address RFC3162, or NAS-Identifier RFC2865 attributes in order to impersonate another authenticator; attributes such as the Called-Station-Id RFC2865 and Calling-Station-Id RFC2865 can be forged as well. Among other things, this can result in messages (and transported keying material) being sent to the wrong authenticator.

While RFC3588 requires use of the Route-Record AVP, this utilizes Fully Qualified Domain Names (FQDNs), so that impersonation detection requires DNS A, AAAA, and PTR Resource Records (RRs) to be properly configured. As a result, Diameter is as vulnerable to this attack as RADIUS, if not more so. RFC3579 Section 4.3.7 recommends mechanisms for impersonation detection; to prevent access to keying material by proxies without a "need to know", it is necessary to allow the backend authentication server to communicate with the authenticator directly, such as via the redirect functionality supported in RFC3588.

Channel Binding

It is possible for a compromised or poorly implemented EAP authenticator to communicate incorrect information to the EAP peer and/or server. This can enable an authenticator to impersonate another authenticator or communicate incorrect information via out-of-band mechanisms (such as via AAA or the lower layer).

Where EAP is used in pass-through mode, the EAP peer does not verify the identity of the pass-through authenticator within the EAP conversation. Within the Secure Association Protocol, the EAP peer and authenticator only demonstrate mutual possession of the transported keying material; they do not mutually authenticate. This creates a potential security vulnerability, described in RFC3748 Section 7.15.

As described in RFC3579 Section 4.3.7, it is possible for a first-hop AAA proxy to detect a AAA client attempting to impersonate another authenticator. However, it is possible for a pass-through authenticator acting as a AAA client to provide correct information to the backend authentication server while communicating misleading information to the EAP peer via the lower layer.

For example, a compromised authenticator can utilize another authenticator's Called-Station-Id or NAS-Identifier in communicating with the EAP peer via the lower layer. Also, a pass-through authenticator acting as a AAA client can provide an incorrect peer Calling-Station-Id RFC2865 RFC3580 to the backend authentication server via the AAA protocol.

As noted in RFC3748 Section 7.15, this vulnerability can be addressed by EAP methods that support a protected exchange of channel properties such as endpoint identifiers, including (but not limited to): Called-Station-Id RFC2865 RFC3580, Calling-Station-Id RFC2865 RFC3580, NAS-Identifier RFC2865, NAS-IP-Address RFC2865, and NAS-IPv6-Address RFC3162.

Using such a protected exchange, it is possible to match the channel properties provided by the authenticator via out-of-band mechanisms against those exchanged within the EAP method. Typically, the EAP method imports channel binding parameters from the lower layer on the peer, and transmits them securely to the EAP server, which exports them to the lower layer or AAA layer. However, transport can occur from EAP server to peer, or can be bi-directional. On the side of the exchange (peer or server) where channel binding is verified, the lower layer or AAA layer passes the result of the verification (TRUE or FALSE) up to the EAP method. While the verification can be done either by the peer or the server, typically only the server has the knowledge to determine the correctness of the values, as opposed to merely verifying their equality. For further discussion, see [EAP-SERVICE].

It is also possible to perform channel binding without transporting data over EAP, as described in [EAP-CHANNEL]. In this approach the EAP method includes channel binding parameters in the calculation of exported EAP keying material, making it impossible for the peer and

authenticator to complete the Secure Association Protocol if there is a mismatch in the channel binding parameters. However, this approach can only be applied where methods generating EAP keying material are used along with lower layers that utilize EAP keying material. For example, this mechanism would not enable verification of channel binding on wired IEEE 802 networks using [IEEE-802.1X].

Mutual Authentication

RFC3748 Section 7.2.1 describes the "mutual authentication" and "dictionary attack resistance" claims, and RFC4017 requires EAP methods satisfying these claims. EAP methods complying with RFC4017 therefore provide for mutual authentication between the EAP peer and server.

RFC3748 Section 7.2.1 also describes the "Cryptographic binding" security claim, and RFC4017 Section 2.2 requires support for this claim. As described in [EAP-BINDING], EAP method sequences and compound authentication mechanisms can be subject to man-in-the-middle attacks. When such attacks are successfully carried out, the attacker acts as an intermediary between a victim and a legitimate authenticator. This allows the attacker to authenticate successfully to the authenticator, as well as to obtain access to the network.

In order to prevent these attacks, [EAP-BINDING] recommends derivation of a compound key by which the EAP peer and server can prove that they have participated in the entire EAP exchange. Since the compound key MUST NOT be known to an attacker posing as an authenticator, and yet must be derived from EAP keying material, it MAY be desirable to derive the compound key from a portion of the EMSK. Where this is done, in order to provide proper key hygiene, it is RECOMMENDED that the compound key used for man-in-the-middle protection be cryptographically separate from other keys derived from the EMSK.

Diameter RFC3588 provides for per-packet authentication and integrity protection via IPsec or TLS, and RADIUS/EAP RFC3579 also provides for per-packet authentication and integrity protection. Where the authenticator/AAA client and backend authentication server communicate directly and credible key wrap is used (see Section 3.8), this ensures that the AAA Key Transport (phase 1b) achieves its security objectives: mutually authenticating the AAA client/authenticator and backend authentication server and providing transported keying material to the EAP authenticator and to no other party.

RFC2607 Section 7 describes the security issues occurring when the authenticator/AAA client and backend authentication server do not communicate directly. Where a AAA intermediary is present (such as a RADIUS proxy or a Diameter agent), and data object security is not used, transported keying material can be recovered by an attacker in control of the intermediary. As discussed in Section 2.1, unless the TSKs are derived independently from EAP keying material (as in IKEv2), possession of transported keying material enables decryption of data traffic sent between the peer and the authenticator to whom the keying material was transported. It also allows the AAA intermediary to impersonate the authenticator or the peer. Since the peer does not authenticate to a AAA intermediary, it has no ability to determine whether it is authentic or authorized to obtain keying material.

However, as long as transported keying material or keys derived from it are only utilized by a single authenticator, compromise of the transported keying material does not enable an attacker to impersonate the peer to another authenticator. Vulnerability to compromise of a AAA intermediary can be mitigated by implementation of redirect functionality, as described in RFC3588 and RFC4072.

The Secure Association Protocol does not provide for mutual authentication between the EAP peer and authenticator, only mutual proof of possession of transported keying material. In order for the peer to verify the identity of the authenticator, mutual proof of possession needs to be combined with impersonation prevention and channel binding. Impersonation prevention (described in Section 5.3.2) enables the backend authentication server to determine that the transported keying material has been provided to the correct authenticator. When utilized along with impersonation prevention, channel binding (described in Section 5.3.3) enables the EAP peer to verify that the EAP server has authorized the authenticator to possess the transported keying material. Completion of the Secure Association Protocol exchange demonstrates that the EAP peer and the authenticator possess the transported keying material.

Key Binding

Mandatory requirement from RFC4962 Section 3:

  Bind key to its context
  Keying material MUST be bound to the appropriate context.  The
  context includes the following:
  o  The manner in which the keying material is expected to be used.
  o  The other parties that are expected to have access to the
     keying material.
  o  The expected lifetime of the keying material.  Lifetime of a
     child key SHOULD NOT be greater than the lifetime of its parent
     in the key hierarchy.
  Any party with legitimate access to keying material can determine
  its context.  In addition, the protocol MUST ensure that all
  parties with legitimate access to keying material have the same
  context for the keying material.  This requires that the parties
  are properly identified and authenticated, so that all of the
  parties that have access to the keying material can be determined.
  The context will include the peer and NAS identities in more than
  one form.  One (or more) name form is needed to identify these
  parties in the authentication exchange and the AAA protocol.
  Another name form may be needed to identify these parties within
  the lower layer that will employ the session key.

Within EAP, exported keying material (MSK, EMSK,IV) is bound to the Peer-Id(s) and Server-Id(s), which are exported along with the keying material. However, not all EAP methods support authenticated server identities (see Appendix A).

Within the AAA protocol, transported keying material is destined for the EAP authenticator identified by the NAS-Identifier Attribute within the request, and is for use by the EAP peer identified by the Peer-Id(s), User-Name RFC2865, or Chargeable User Identity (CUI) RFC4372 attributes. The maximum lifetime of the transported keying material can be provided, as discussed in Section 3.5.1. Key usage restrictions can also be included as described in Section 3.2. Key lifetime issues are discussed in Sections 3.3, 3.4, and 3.5.

Authorization

Requirement: The Secure Association Protocol (phase 2) conversation may utilize different identifiers from the EAP conversation (phase 1a), so that binding between the EAP and Secure Association Protocol identities is REQUIRED.

Mandatory requirement from RFC4962 Section 3:

  Peer and authenticator authorization
  Peer and authenticator authorization MUST be performed.  These
  entities MUST demonstrate possession of the appropriate keying
  material, without disclosing it.  Authorization is REQUIRED
  whenever a peer associates with a new authenticator.  The
  authorization checking prevents an elevation of privilege attack,
  and it ensures that an unauthorized authenticator is detected.
  Authorizations SHOULD be synchronized between the peer, NAS, and
  backend authentication server.  Once the AAA key management
  protocol exchanges are complete, all of these parties should hold
  a common view of the authorizations associated with the other
  parties.
  In addition to authenticating all parties, key management
  protocols need to demonstrate that the parties are authorized to
  possess keying material.  Note that proof of possession of keying
  material does not necessarily prove authorization to hold that
  keying material.  For example, within an IEEE 802.11, the 4-way
  handshake demonstrates that both the peer and authenticator
  possess the same EAP keying material.  However, by itself, this
  possession proof does not demonstrate that the authenticator was
  authorized by the backend authentication server to possess that
  keying material.  As noted in RFC3579 in Section 4.3.7, where
  AAA proxies are present, it is possible for one authenticator to
  impersonate another, unless each link in the AAA chain implements
  checks against impersonation.  Even with these checks in place, an
  authenticator may still claim different identities to the peer and
  the backend authentication server.  As described in RFC3748
  Section 7.15, channel binding is required to enable the peer to
  verify that the authenticator claim of identity is both consistent
  and correct.

Recommendation from RFC4962 Section 3:

  Authorization restriction
  If peer authorization is restricted, then the peer SHOULD be made
  aware of the restriction.  Otherwise, the peer may inadvertently
  attempt to circumvent the restriction.  For example, authorization
  restrictions in an IEEE 802.11 environment include:
  o  Key lifetimes, where the keying material can only be used for a
     certain period of time;
  o  SSID restrictions, where the keying material can only be used
     with a specific IEEE 802.11 SSID;
  o  Called-Station-ID restrictions, where the keying material can
     only be used with a single IEEE 802.11 BSSID; and
  o  Calling-Station-ID restrictions, where the keying material can
     only be used with a single peer IEEE 802 MAC address.

As described in Section 2.3, consistent identification of the EAP authenticator enables the EAP peer to determine the scope of keying material provided to an authenticator, as well as to confirm with the backend authentication server that an EAP authenticator proving possession of EAP keying material during the Secure Association Protocol was authorized to obtain it.

Within the AAA protocol, the authorization attributes are bound to the transported keying material. While the AAA exchange provides the AAA client/authenticator with authorizations relating to the EAP peer, neither the EAP nor AAA exchanges provide authorizations to the EAP peer. In order to ensure that all parties hold the same view of the authorizations, it is RECOMMENDED that the Secure Association Protocol enable communication of authorizations between the EAP authenticator and peer.

In lower layers where the authenticator consistently identifies itself to the peer and backend authentication server and the EAP peer completes the Secure Association Protocol exchange with the same authenticator through which it completed the EAP conversation, authorization of the authenticator is demonstrated to the peer by mutual authentication between the peer and authenticator as discussed in the previous section. Identification issues are discussed in Sections 2.3, 2.4, and 2.5 and key scope issues are discussed in Section 3.2.

Where the EAP peer utilizes different identifiers within the EAP method and Secure Association Protocol conversations, peer authorization can be difficult to demonstrate to the authenticator without additional restrictions. This problem does not exist in IKEv2 where the Identity Payload is used for peer identification both within IKEv2 and EAP, and where the EAP conversation is cryptographically protected within IKEv2 binding the EAP and IKEv2 exchanges. However, within [IEEE-802.11], the EAP peer identity is not used within the 4-way handshake, so that it is necessary for the authenticator to require that the EAP peer utilize the same MAC address for EAP authentication as for the 4-way handshake.

Replay Protection

Mandatory requirement from RFC4962 Section 3:

  Replay detection mechanism
  The AAA key management protocol exchanges MUST be replay
  protected, including AAA, EAP and Secure Association Protocol
  exchanges.  Replay protection allows a protocol message recipient
  to discard any message that was recorded during a previous
  legitimate dialogue and presented as though it belonged to the
  current dialogue.

RFC3748 Section 7.2.1 describes the "replay protection" security claim, and RFC4017 Section 2.2 requires use of EAP methods supporting this claim.

Diameter RFC3588 provides support for replay protection via use of IPsec or TLS. "RADIUS Support for EAP" RFC3579 protects against replay of keying material via the Request Authenticator. According to RFC2865 Section 3:

  In Access-Request Packets, the Authenticator value is a 16 octet
  random number, called the Request Authenticator.

However, some RADIUS packets are not replay protected. In Accounting, Disconnect, and Care-of Address (CoA)-Request packets, the Request Authenticator contains a keyed Message Integrity Code (MIC) rather than a nonce. The Response Authenticator in Accounting, Disconnect, and CoA-Response packets also contains a keyed MIC whose calculation does not depend on a nonce in either the Request or Response packets. Therefore, unless an Event-Timestamp attribute is included or IPsec is used, it is possible that the recipient will not be able to determine whether these packets have been replayed. This issue is discussed further in RFC5176 Section 6.3.

In order to prevent replay of Secure Association Protocol frames, replay protection is REQUIRED on all messages. [IEEE-802.11] supports replay protection on all messages within the 4-way handshake; IKEv2 RFC4306 also supports this.

Key Freshness

Requirement: A session key SHOULD be considered compromised if it remains in use beyond its authorized lifetime. Mandatory requirement from RFC4962 Section 3:

  Strong, fresh session keys
  While preserving algorithm independence, session keys MUST be
  strong and fresh.  Each session deserves an independent session
  key.  Fresh keys are required even when a long replay counter
  (that is, one that "will never wrap") is used to ensure that loss
  of state does not cause the same counter value to be used more
  than once with the same session key.
  Some EAP methods are capable of deriving keys of varying strength,
  and these EAP methods MUST permit the generation of keys meeting a
  minimum equivalent key strength.  BCP 86 RFC3766 offers advice
  on appropriate key sizes.  The National Institute for Standards
  and Technology (NIST) also offers advice on appropriate key sizes
  in [SP800-57].
  A fresh cryptographic key is one that is generated specifically
  for the intended use.  In this situation, a secure association
  protocol is used to establish session keys.  The AAA protocol and
  EAP method MUST ensure that the keying material supplied as an
  input to session key derivation is fresh, and the secure
  association protocol MUST generate a separate session key for each
  session, even if the keying material provided by EAP is cached.  A
  cached key persists after the authentication exchange has
  completed.  For the AAA/EAP server, key caching can happen when
  state is kept on the server.  For the NAS or client, key caching
  can happen when the NAS or client does not destroy keying material
  immediately following the derivation of session keys.
  Session keys MUST NOT be dependent on one another.  Multiple
  session keys may be derived from a higher-level shared secret as
  long as a one-time value, usually called a nonce, is used to
  ensure that each session key is fresh.  The mechanism used to
  generate session keys MUST ensure that the disclosure of one
  session key does not aid the attacker in discovering any other
  session keys.

EAP, AAA, and the lower layer each bear responsibility for ensuring the use of fresh, strong session keys. EAP methods need to ensure the freshness and strength of EAP keying material provided as an input to session key derivation. RFC3748 Section 7.10 states:

  EAP methods SHOULD ensure the freshness of the MSK and EMSK, even
  in cases where one party may not have a high quality random number
  generator.  A RECOMMENDED method is for each party to provide a
  nonce of at least 128 bits, used in the derivation of the MSK and
  EMSK.

The contribution of nonces enables the EAP peer and server to ensure that exported EAP keying material is fresh.

RFC3748 Section 7.2.1 describes the "key strength" and "session independence" security claims, and RFC4017 requires EAP methods supporting these claims as well as methods capable of providing equivalent key strength of 128 bits or greater. See Section 3.7 for more information on key strength.

The AAA protocol needs to ensure that transported keying material is fresh and is not utilized outside its recommended lifetime. Replay protection is necessary for key freshness, but an attacker can deliver a stale (and therefore potentially compromised) key in a replay-protected message, so replay protection is not sufficient. As discussed in Section 3.5, the Session-Timeout Attribute enables the backend authentication server to limit the exposure of transported keying material.

The EAP Session-Id, described in Section 1.4, enables the EAP peer, authenticator, and server to distinguish EAP conversations. However, unless the authenticator keeps track of EAP Session-Ids, the authenticator cannot use the Session-Id to guarantee the freshness of keying material.

The Secure Association Protocol, described in Section 3.1, MUST generate a fresh session key for each session, even if the EAP keying material and parameters provided by methods are cached, or either the peer or authenticator lack a high entropy random number generator. A RECOMMENDED method is for the peer and authenticator to each provide a nonce or counter used in session key derivation. If a nonce is used, it is RECOMMENDED that it be at least 128 bits. While [IEEE-802.11] and IKEv2 RFC4306 satisfy this requirement, [IEEE-802.16e] does not, since randomness is only contributed from the Base Station.

Key Scope Limitation

Mandatory requirement from RFC4962 Section 3:

  Limit key scope
  Following the principle of least privilege, parties MUST NOT have
  access to keying material that is not needed to perform their
  role.  A party has access to a particular key if it has access to
  all of the secret information needed to derive it.
  Any protocol that is used to establish session keys MUST specify
  the scope for session keys, clearly identifying the parties to
  whom the session key is available.

Transported keying material is permitted to be accessed by the EAP peer, authenticator and server. The EAP peer and server derive EAP keying material during the process of mutually authenticating each other using the selected EAP method. During the Secure Association Protocol exchange, the EAP peer utilizes keying material to demonstrate to the authenticator that it is the same party that authenticated to the EAP server and was authorized by it. The EAP authenticator utilizes the transported keying material to prove to the peer not only that the EAP conversation was transported through it (this could be demonstrated by a man-in-the-middle), but that it was uniquely authorized by the EAP server to provide the peer with access to the network. Unique authorization can only be demonstrated if the EAP authenticator does not share the transported keying material with a party other than the EAP peer and server. TSKs are permitted to be accessed only by the EAP peer and authenticator (see Section 1.5); TSK derivation is discussed in Section 2.1. Since demonstration of authorization within the Secure Association Protocol exchange depends on possession of transported keying material, the backend authentication server can obtain TSKs unless it deletes the transported keying material after sending it.

Key Naming

Mandatory requirement from RFC4962 Section 3:

  Uniquely named keys
  AAA key management proposals require a robust key naming scheme,
  particularly where key caching is supported.  The key name
  provides a way to refer to a key in a protocol so that it is clear
  to all parties which key is being referenced.  Objects that cannot
  be named cannot be managed.  All keys MUST be uniquely named, and
  the key name MUST NOT directly or indirectly disclose the keying
  material.  If the key name is not based on the keying material,
  then one can be sure that it cannot be used to assist in a search
  for the key value.

EAP key names (defined in Section 1.4.1), along with the Peer-Id(s) and Server-Id(s), uniquely identify EAP keying material, and do not directly or indirectly expose EAP keying material.

Existing AAA server implementations do not distribute key names along with the transported keying material. However, Diameter EAP RFC4072 Section 4.1.4 defines the EAP-Key-Name AVP for the purpose of transporting the EAP Session-Id. Since the EAP-Key-Name AVP is defined within the RADIUS attribute space, it can be used either with RADIUS or Diameter.

Since the authenticator is not provided with the name of the transported keying material by existing backend authentication server implementations, existing Secure Association Protocols do not utilize EAP key names. For example, [IEEE-802.11] supports PMK caching; to enable the peer and authenticator to determine the cached PMK to utilize within the 4-way handshake, the PMK needs to be named. For this purpose, [IEEE-802.11] utilizes a PMK naming scheme that is based on the key. Since IKEv2 RFC4306 does not cache transported keying material, it does not need to refer to transported keying material.

5.10. Denial-of-Service Attacks

Key caching can result in vulnerability to denial-of-service attacks. For example, EAP methods that create persistent state can be vulnerable to denial-of-service attacks on the EAP server by a rogue EAP peer.

To address this vulnerability, EAP methods creating persistent state can limit the persistent state created by an EAP peer. For example, for each peer an EAP server can choose to limit persistent state to a few EAP conversations, distinguished by the EAP Session-Id. This prevents a rogue peer from denying access to other peers.

Similarly, to conserve resources an authenticator can choose to limit the persistent state corresponding to each peer. This can be accomplished by limiting each peer to persistent state corresponding to a few EAP conversations, distinguished by the EAP Session-Id.

Whether creation of new TSKs implies deletion of previously derived TSKs depends on the EAP lower layer. Where there is no implied deletion, the authenticator can choose to limit the number of TSKs and associated state that can be stored for each peer.

References

Normative References

RFC2119 Bradner, S., "Key words for use in RFCs to Indicate

              Requirement Levels", BCP 14, RFC 2119, March 1997.

RFC3748 Aboba, B., Blunk, L., Vollbrecht, J., Carlson, J., and

              H. Levkowetz, Ed., "Extensible Authentication Protocol
              (EAP)", RFC 3748, June 2004.

RFC4962 Housley, R. and B. Aboba, "Guidance for

              Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA)
              Key Management", BCP 132, RFC 4962, July 2007.

Informative References

[8021XPreAuth] Pack, S. and Y. Choi, "Pre-Authenticated Fast Handoff

              in a Public Wireless LAN Based on IEEE 802.1x Model",
              Proceedings of the IFIP TC6/WG6.8 Working Conference
              on Personal Wireless Communications, p.175-182,
              October 23-25, 2002.

[Analysis] He, C. and J. Mitchell, "Analysis of the 802.11i 4-Way

              Handshake", Proceedings of the 2004 ACM Workshop on
              Wireless Security, pp. 43-50, ISBN: 1-58113-925-X.

[Bargh] Bargh, M., Hulsebosch, R., Eertink, E., Prasad, A.,

              Wang, H. and P. Schoo, "Fast Authentication Methods
              for Handovers between IEEE 802.11 Wireless LANs",
              Proceedings of the 2nd ACM international workshop on
              Wireless mobile applications and services on WLAN
              hotspots, October, 2004.

[GKDP] Dondeti, L., Xiang, J., and S. Rowles, "GKDP: Group

              Key Distribution Protocol", Work in Progress, March
              2006.

[He] He, C., Sundararajan, M., Datta, A. Derek, A. and J.

              C.  Mitchell, "A Modular Correctness Proof of TLS and
              IEEE 802.11i", ACM Conference on Computer and
              Communications Security (CCS '05), November, 2005.

[IEEE-802.11] Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,

              "Information technology - Telecommunications and
              information exchange between systems - Local and
              metropolitan area networks - Specific Requirements
              Part 11:  Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and
              Physical Layer (PHY) Specifications", IEEE Standard
              802.11-2007, 2007.

[IEEE-802.1X] Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,

              "Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Port-Based
              Network Access Control", IEEE Standard 802.1X-2004,
              December 2004.

[IEEE-802.1Q] IEEE Standards for Local and Metropolitan Area

              Networks:  Draft Standard for Virtual Bridged Local
              Area Networks, P802.1Q-2003, January 2003.

[IEEE-802.11i] Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,

              "Supplement to Standard for Telecommunications and
              Information Exchange Between Systems - LAN/MAN
              Specific Requirements - Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium
              Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)
              Specifications:  Specification for Enhanced Security",
              IEEE 802.11i/D1, 2001.

[IEEE-802.11F] Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,

              "Recommended Practice for Multi-Vendor Access Point
              Interoperability via an Inter-Access Point Protocol
              Across Distribution Systems Supporting IEEE 802.11
              Operation", IEEE 802.11F, July 2003 (now deprecated).

[IEEE-802.16e] Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,

              "IEEE Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area
              Networks: Part 16: Air Interface for Fixed and Mobile
              Broadband Wireless Access Systems: Amendment for
              Physical and Medium Access Control Layers for Combined
              Fixed and Mobile Operations in Licensed Bands" IEEE
              802.16e, August 2005.

[IEEE-03-084] Mishra, A., Shin, M., Arbaugh, W., Lee, I. and K.

              Jang, "Proactive Key Distribution to support fast and
              secure roaming", IEEE 802.11 Working Group, IEEE-03-
              084r1-I, http://www.ieee802.org/11/Documents/
              DocumentHolder/3-084.zip, January 2003.

[EAP-SERVICE] Arkko, J. and P. Eronen, "Authenticated Service

              Information for the Extensible Authentication Protocol
              (EAP)", Work in Progress, October 2005.

[SHORT-TERM] Friedman, A., Sheffer, Y., and A. Shaqed, "Short-Term

              Certificates", Work in Progress, June 2007.

[HANDOFF] Arbaugh, W. and B. Aboba, "Handoff Extension to

              RADIUS", Work in Progress, October 2003.

[EAP-CHANNEL] Ohba, Y., Parthasrathy, M., and M. Yanagiya, "Channel

              Binding Mechanism Based on Parameter Binding in Key
              Derivation", Work in Progress, June 2007.

[EAP-BINDING] Puthenkulam, J., Lortz, V., Palekar, A., and D. Simon,

              "The Compound Authentication Binding Problem", Work in
              Progress, October 2003.

[MD5Collision] Klima, V., "Tunnels in Hash Functions: MD5 Collisions

              Within a Minute", Cryptology ePrint Archive, March
              2006, http://eprint.iacr.org/2006/105.pdf

[MishraPro] Mishra, A., Shin, M. and W. Arbaugh, "Pro-active Key

              Distribution using Neighbor Graphs", IEEE Wireless
              Communications, vol. 11, February 2004.

RFC1661 Simpson, W., Ed., "The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)",

              STD 51, RFC 1661, July 1994.

RFC1968 Meyer, G., "The PPP Encryption Control Protocol

              (ECP)", RFC 1968, June 1996.

RFC2230 Atkinson, R., "Key Exchange Delegation Record for the

              DNS", RFC 2230, November 1997.

RFC2409 Harkins, D. and D. Carrel, "The Internet Key Exchange

              (IKE)", RFC 2409, November 1998.

RFC2516 Mamakos, L., Lidl, K., Evarts, J., Carrel, D., Simone,

              D., and R. Wheeler, "A Method for Transmitting PPP
              Over Ethernet (PPPoE)", RFC 2516, February 1999.

RFC2548 Zorn, G., "Microsoft Vendor-specific RADIUS

              Attributes", RFC 2548, March 1999.

RFC2607 Aboba, B. and J. Vollbrecht, "Proxy Chaining and

              Policy Implementation in Roaming", RFC 2607, June
              1999.

RFC2716 Aboba, B. and D. Simon, "PPP EAP TLS Authentication

              Protocol", RFC 2716, October 1999.

RFC2782 Gulbrandsen, A., Vixie, P., and L. Esibov, "A DNS RR

              for specifying the location of services (DNS SRV)",
              RFC 2782, February 2000.

RFC2845 Vixie, P., Gudmundsson, O., Eastlake 3rd, D., and B.

              Wellington, "Secret Key Transaction Authentication for
              DNS (TSIG)", RFC 2845, May 2000.

RFC2865 Rigney, C., Willens, S., Rubens, A., and W. Simpson,

              "Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS)",
              RFC 2865, June 2000.

RFC3007 Wellington, B., "Secure Domain Name System (DNS)

              Dynamic Update", RFC 3007, November 2000.

RFC3162 Aboba, B., Zorn, G., and D. Mitton, "RADIUS and IPv6",

              RFC 3162, August 2001.

RFC3547 Baugher, M., Weis, B., Hardjono, T., and H. Harney,

              "The Group Domain of Interpretation", RFC 3547, July
              2003.

RFC3579 Aboba, B. and P. Calhoun, "RADIUS (Remote

              Authentication Dial In User Service) Support For
              Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)", RFC 3579,
              September 2003.

RFC3580 Congdon, P., Aboba, B., Smith, A., Zorn, G., and J.

              Roese, "IEEE 802.1X Remote Authentication Dial In User
              Service (RADIUS) Usage Guidelines", RFC 3580,
              September 2003.

RFC3588 Calhoun, P., Loughney, J., Guttman, E., Zorn, G., and

              J. Arkko, "Diameter Base Protocol", RFC 3588,
              September 2003.

RFC3766 Orman, H. and P. Hoffman, "Determining Strengths For

              Public Keys Used For Exchanging Symmetric Keys", BCP
              86, RFC 3766, April 2004.

RFC3830 Arkko, J., Carrara, E., Lindholm, F., Naslund, M., and

              K. Norrman, "MIKEY: Multimedia Internet KEYing", RFC
              3830, August 2004.

RFC4005 Calhoun, P., Zorn, G., Spence, D., and D. Mitton,

              "Diameter Network Access Server Application", RFC
              4005, August 2005.

RFC4017 Stanley, D., Walker, J., and B. Aboba, "Extensible

              Authentication Protocol (EAP) Method Requirements for
              Wireless LANs", RFC 4017, March 2005.

RFC4033 Arends, R., Austein, R., Larson, M., Massey, D., and

              S. Rose, "DNS Security Introduction and Requirements",
              RFC 4033, March 2005.

RFC4035 Arends, R., Austein, R., Larson, M., Massey, D., and

              S. Rose, "Protocol Modifications for the DNS Security
              Extensions", RFC 4035, March 2005.

RFC4067 Loughney, J., Ed., Nakhjiri, M., Perkins, C., and R.

              Koodli, "Context Transfer Protocol (CXTP)", RFC 4067,
              July 2005.

RFC4072 Eronen, P., Ed., Hiller, T., and G. Zorn, "Diameter

              Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) Application",
              RFC 4072, August 2005.

RFC4118 Yang, L., Zerfos, P., and E. Sadot, "Architecture

              Taxonomy for Control and Provisioning of Wireless
              Access Points (CAPWAP)", RFC 4118, June 2005.

RFC4186 Haverinen, H., Ed., and J. Salowey, Ed., "Extensible

              Authentication Protocol Method for Global System for
              Mobile Communications (GSM) Subscriber Identity
              Modules (EAP-SIM)", RFC 4186, January 2006.

RFC4187 Arkko, J. and H. Haverinen, "Extensible Authentication

              Protocol Method for 3rd Generation Authentication and
              Key Agreement (EAP-AKA)", RFC 4187, January 2006.

RFC4282 Aboba, B., Beadles, M., Arkko, J., and P. Eronen, "The

              Network Access Identifier", RFC 4282, December 2005.

RFC4284 Adrangi, F., Lortz, V., Bari, F., and P. Eronen,

              "Identity Selection Hints for the Extensible
              Authentication Protocol (EAP)", RFC 4284, January
              2006.

RFC4301 Kent, S. and K. Seo, "Security Architecture for the

              Internet Protocol", RFC 4301, December 2005.

RFC4306 Kaufman, C., Ed., "Internet Key Exchange (IKEv2)

              Protocol", RFC 4306, December 2005.

RFC4372 Adrangi, F., Lior, A., Korhonen, J., and J. Loughney,

              "Chargeable User Identity", RFC 4372, January 2006.

RFC4334 Housley, R. and T. Moore, "Certificate Extensions and

              Attributes Supporting Authentication in Point-to-Point
              Protocol (PPP) and Wireless Local Area Networks
              (WLAN)", RFC 4334, February 2006.

RFC4535 Harney, H., Meth, U., Colegrove, A., and G. Gross,

              "GSAKMP: Group Secure Association Key Management
              Protocol", RFC 4535, June 2006.

RFC4763 Vanderveen, M. and H. Soliman, "Extensible

              Authentication Protocol Method for Shared-secret
              Authentication and Key Establishment (EAP-SAKE)", RFC
              4763, November 2006.

RFC4675 Congdon, P., Sanchez, M., and B. Aboba, "RADIUS

              Attributes for Virtual LAN and Priority Support", RFC
              4675, September 2006.

RFC4718 Eronen, P. and P. Hoffman, "IKEv2 Clarifications and

              Implementation Guidelines", RFC 4718, October 2006.

RFC4764 Bersani, F. and H. Tschofenig, "The EAP-PSK Protocol:

              A Pre-Shared Key Extensible Authentication Protocol
              (EAP) Method", RFC 4764, January 2007.

RFC5176 Chiba, M., Dommety, G., Eklund, M., Mitton, D., and B.

              Aboba, "Dynamic Authorization Extensions to Remote
              Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS)", RFC
              5176, January 2008.

RFC5216 Simon, D., Aboba, B., and R. Hurst, "The EAP-TLS

              Authentication Protocol", RFC 5216, March 2008.

RFC5246 Dierks, T. and E. Rescorla, "The Transport Layer

              Security (TLS) Protocol Version 1.2", RFC 5246, August
              2008.

[SP800-57] National Institute of Standards and Technology,

              "Recommendation for Key Management", Special
              Publication 800-57, May 2006.

[Token] Fantacci, R., Maccari, L., Pecorella, T., and F.

              Frosali, "A secure and performant token-based
              authentication for infrastructure and mesh 802.1X
              networks", IEEE Conference on Computer Communications,
              June 2006.

[Tokenk] Ohba, Y., Das, S., and A. Duttak, "Kerberized Handover

              Keying: A Media-Independent Handover Key Management
              Architecture", Mobiarch 2007.

Acknowledgments

Thanks to Ashwin Palekar, Charlie Kaufman, and Tim Moore of Microsoft, Jari Arkko of Ericsson, Dorothy Stanley of Aruba Networks, Bob Moskowitz of TruSecure, Jesse Walker of Intel, Joe Salowey of Cisco, and Russ Housley of Vigil Security for useful feedback.

Appendix A - Exported Parameters in Existing Methods

This Appendix specifies Session-Id, Peer-Id, Server-Id and Key-Lifetime for EAP methods that have been published prior to this specification. Future EAP method specifications MUST include a definition of the Session-Id, Peer-Id and Server-Id (could be the null string). In the descriptions that follow, all fields comprising the Session-Id are assumed to be in network byte order.

EAP-Identity

  The EAP-Identity method is defined in RFC3748.  It does not
  derive keys, and therefore does not define the Session-Id.  The
  Peer-Id and Server-Id are the null string (zero length).

EAP-Notification

  The EAP-Notification method is defined in RFC3748.  It does not
  derive keys and therefore does not define the Session-Id.  The
  Peer-Id and Server-Id are the null string (zero length).

EAP-MD5-Challenge

  The EAP-MD5-Challenge method is defined in RFC3748.  It does not
  derive keys and therefore does not define the Session-Id.  The
  Peer-Id and Server-Id are the null string (zero length).

EAP-GTC

  The EAP-GTC method is defined in RFC3748.  It does not derive
  keys and therefore does not define the Session-Id.  The Peer-Id
  and Server-Id are the null string (zero length).

EAP-OTP

  The EAP-OTP method is defined in RFC3748.  It does not derive
  keys and therefore does not define the Session-Id.  The Peer-Id
  and Server-Id are the null string (zero length).

EAP-AKA

  EAP-AKA is defined in RFC4187.  The EAP-AKA Session-Id is the
  concatenation of the EAP Type Code (0x17) with the contents of the
  RAND field from the AT_RAND attribute, followed by the contents of
  the AUTN field in the AT_AUTN attribute:
  Session-Id = 0x17 || RAND || AUTN
  The Peer-Id is the contents of the Identity field from the
  AT_IDENTITY attribute, using only the Actual Identity Length
  octets from the beginning, however.  Note that the contents are
  used as they are transmitted, regardless of whether the
  transmitted identity was a permanent, pseudonym, or fast EAP
  re-authentication identity.  The Server-Id is the null string
  (zero length).

EAP-SIM

  EAP-SIM is defined in RFC4186.  The EAP-SIM Session-Id is the
  concatenation of the EAP Type Code (0x12) with the contents of the
  RAND field from the AT_RAND attribute, followed by the contents of
  the NONCE_MT field in the AT_NONCE_MT attribute:
  Session-Id = 0x12 || RAND || NONCE_MT
  The Peer-Id is the contents of the Identity field from the
  AT_IDENTITY attribute, using only the Actual Identity Length
  octets from the beginning, however.  Note that the contents are
  used as they are transmitted, regardless of whether the
  transmitted identity was a permanent, pseudonym, or fast EAP
  re-authentication identity.  The Server-Id is the null string
  (zero length).

EAP-PSK

  EAP-PSK is defined in RFC4764.  The EAP-PSK Session-Id is the
  concatenation of the EAP Type Code (0x2F) with the peer (RAND_P)
  and server (RAND_S) nonces:
  Session-Id = 0x2F || RAND_P || RAND_S
  The Peer-Id is the contents of the ID_P field and the Server-Id is
  the contents of the ID_S field.

EAP-SAKE

  EAP-SAKE is defined in RFC4763.  The EAP-SAKE Session-Id is the
  concatenation of the EAP Type Code (0x30) with the contents of the
  RAND_S field from the AT_RAND_S attribute, followed by the
  contents of the RAND_P field in the AT_RAND_P attribute:
  Session-Id = 0x30 || RAND_S || RAND_P
  Note that the EAP-SAKE Session-Id is not the same as the "Session
  ID" parameter chosen by the Server, which is sent in the first
  message, and replicated in subsequent messages.  The Peer-Id is
  contained within the value field of the AT_PEERID attribute and
  the Server-Id, if available, is contained in the value field of
  the AT_SERVERID attribute.

EAP-TLS

  For EAP-TLS, the Peer-Id, Server-Id and Session-Id are defined in
  RFC5216.

Authors' Addresses

Bernard Aboba
Microsoft Corporation
One Microsoft Way
Redmond, WA 98052
EMail: [email protected]
Phone: +1 425 706 6605
Fax:   +1 425 936 7329
Dan Simon
Microsoft Research
Microsoft Corporation
One Microsoft Way
Redmond, WA 98052
EMail: [email protected]
Phone: +1 425 706 6711
Fax:   +1 425 936 7329
Pasi Eronen
Nokia Research Center
P.O. Box 407
FIN-00045 Nokia Group
Finland
EMail: [email protected]

Full Copyright Statement

Copyright (C) The IETF Trust (2008).

This document is subject to the rights, licenses and restrictions contained in BCP 78, and except as set forth therein, the authors retain all their rights.

This document and the information contained herein are provided on an "AS IS" basis and THE CONTRIBUTOR, THE ORGANIZATION HE/SHE REPRESENTS OR IS SPONSORED BY (IF ANY), THE INTERNET SOCIETY, THE IETF TRUST AND THE INTERNET ENGINEERING TASK FORCE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY THAT THE USE OF THE INFORMATION HEREIN WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY RIGHTS OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Intellectual Property

The IETF takes no position regarding the validity or scope of any Intellectual Property Rights or other rights that might be claimed to pertain to the implementation or use of the technology described in this document or the extent to which any license under such rights might or might not be available; nor does it represent that it has made any independent effort to identify any such rights. Information on the procedures with respect to rights in RFC documents can be found in BCP 78 and BCP 79.

Copies of IPR disclosures made to the IETF Secretariat and any assurances of licenses to be made available, or the result of an attempt made to obtain a general license or permission for the use of such proprietary rights by implementers or users of this specification can be obtained from the IETF on-line IPR repository at http://www.ietf.org/ipr.

The IETF invites any interested party to bring to its attention any copyrights, patents or patent applications, or other proprietary rights that may cover technology that may be required to implement this standard. Please address the information to the IETF at [email protected].